PHITS
Ver. 3.02
User’s Manual
English version

Preface
This manual is the Particle and Heavy Ion Transport code System (PHITS) user’s guide. PHITS is a generalpurpose Monte Carlo particle transport simulation code that is used in many studies in the fields of accelerator
technology, radiotherapy, space radiation, etc. For details on the physical models and important functions implemented in PHITS, see the main article 1 , benchmark study 2 , and papers citing them. This manual explains how to
execute PHITS and which parameters should be used in the system.
The contents of this manual correspond to the PHITS version number shown on the title page and are subject
to change without notice. If you have any question or comment regarding this manual, please contact the PHITS
oﬃce (phits-oﬃce@jaea.go.jp).

1 T. Sato, K. Niita, N. Matsuda, S. Hashimoto, Y. Iwamoto, S. Noda, T. Ogawa, H. Iwase, H. Nakashima, T. Fukahori, K. Okumura, T. Kai,
S. Chiba, T. Furuta, and L. Sihver, Particle and Heavy Ion Transport Code System PHITS, Version 2.52, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 50:9, 913-923(2013).
2 Y. Iwamoto, T. Sato, S. Hashimoto, T. Ogawa, T. Furuta, S. Abe, T. Kai, N. Matsuda, R. Hosoyamada, and K. Niita, Benchmark study of
the recent version of the PHITS code, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 54:5, 617-635 (2017).

I

Contents
1

Recent Improvements and Development members
1.1 Recent Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Development members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Reference of PHITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
1
12
12

2

Installation, compilation and execution of PHITS
2.1 Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Installation and execution on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Installation and execution on Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Compilation using “make”command for Windows, Mac, and Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Compilation using Microsoft Visual Studio with Intel Fortran for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Compilation of ANGEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Executable file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Terminating the PHITS code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Array sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
14
14
15
18
19
20
20
20
21

3

Input File
3.1 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Reading control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Inserting files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 User-defined variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Using mathematical expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Particle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22
22
23
24
24
25
26

4

Sections format
4.1 [ Title ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 [ Parameters ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 Calculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Number of history and Bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 Cut-oﬀ energy and switching energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 Cut-oﬀ time, cut-oﬀ weight, and weight window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 Model option (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.6 Model option (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.7 Model option (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.8 Model option (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.9 Model option (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.10 Output options (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.11 Output options (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.12 Output option (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.13 Output option (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.14 Output option (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.15 About geometrical errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.16 Input-output file name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.17 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.18 Physical parameters for low energy neutrons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.19 Physical parameters for photon and electron transport based on the original model . . . .
4.2.20 Parameters for EGS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.21 Dumpall option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.22 Event Generator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 [ Source ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 <Source> : Multi-source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Common parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Cylinder distribution source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Rectangular solid distribution source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 Gaussian distribution source (x,y,z independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28
28
29
29
30
32
35
36
37
38
39
40
40
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
49
50
51
54
58
59
60
61
63
63
64

ii

4.3.6 Generic parabola distribution source (x,y,z independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.7 Gaussian distribution source (x-y plane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.8 Generic parabola distribution source (x-y plane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.9 Sphere and spherical shell distribution source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.10 s-type = 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.11 s-type = 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.12 Cone shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.13 Triangle prism shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.14 xyz-mesh distribution source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.15 Reading dump file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.16 User definition source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.17 Definitions for energy distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.18 Definition for angular distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.19 Definition for time distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.20 Example of multi-source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.21 Duct source option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 [ Material ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Element (nuclide) definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Composition ratio definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Material parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 S (α, β) settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 [ Surface ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.1 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.2 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5.3 Surface Definition by Macro Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6 [ Cell ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.1 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.2 Description of cell definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3 Universe frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.4 Lattice definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.5 Repeated structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7 [ Transform ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1 Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 Mathematical definition of the transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.3 Examples (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.4 Examples (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 [ Temperature ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.9 [ Mat Time Change ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10 [ Magnetic Field ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.1 Charged particle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.2 Neutron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11 [ Electro Magnetic Field ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12 [ Delta Ray ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13 [ Track Structure ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14 [ Super Mirror ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15 [ Elastic Option ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16 [ Data Max ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17 [ Frag Data ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18 [ Importance ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.19 [ Weight Window ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.20 [ WW Bias ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.21 [ Forced Collisions ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.22 [ Volume ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.23 [ Multiplier ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.24 [ Mat Name Color ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iii

64
65
65
66
67
67
68
69
70
72
75
78
90
92
94
98
101
101
101
101
102
102
103
104
104
107
117
118
118
119
122
123
125
132
132
132
133
133
134
135
136
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
147
148
149
152
153
154
155

4.25 [ Reg Name ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.26 [ Counter ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.27 [ Timer ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
5Common parameters for tallies
5.1 Geometrical mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Region mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2 Definition of the region and volume for repeated structures and lattices . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3 r-z mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.4 xyz mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Energy mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 LET mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Time mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Angle mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Mesh definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Mesh type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 e-type = 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 e-type = 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 e-type = 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 e-type = 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Other tally definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Particle definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 axis definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 file definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 resfile definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.5 unit definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.6 factor definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.7 output definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.8 info definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.9 title definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.10 ANGEL parameter definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.11 SANGEL parameter definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.12 2d-type definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.13 gshow definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.14 rshow definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.15 x-txt, y-txt, z-txt definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.16 volmat definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.17 epsout definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.18 counter definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.19 resolution and line thickness definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.20 trcl coordinate transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.21 dump definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Function to sum up two (or more) tally results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

161
161
161
162
163
164
164
164
165
165
165
165
165
167
167
167
167
167
168
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
170
171
171
172
172
173
173
173
174
174
174
174
176

6

Tally input format
6.1 [ T-Track ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 [ T-Cross ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 [ T-Point ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 [ T-Heat ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 [ T-Deposit ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 [ T-Deposit2 ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 [ T-Yield ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 [ T-Product ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 [ T-DPA ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 [ T-LET ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 [ T-SED ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.12 [ T-Time ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

178
178
182
188
191
194
199
201
204
208
211
214
217

iv

6.13 [ T-Star ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.14 [ T-Dchain ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.15 [ T-WWG ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.16 [ T-WWBG ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17 [ T-Volume ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.18 [ T-Userdefined ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.19 [ T-Gshow ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20 [ T-Rshow ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21.1 box definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21.2 3dshow example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220
223
227
229
232
233
237
239
241
244
245

7

Automatic calculation of region volume

248

8Processing dump file249

9Output cutoﬀ data format

253

10 Region error check254

11 Additional explanation for parallel computing
11.1 Distributed memory parallel computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1 Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2 Adjustment of maxcas and maxbch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.3 Treatment of abnormal ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.4 ncut, gcut, pcut, and dumpall file definition in PHITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.5 Read-in file definition in PHITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 Shared-memory parallel computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.1 Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2 Important notices for shared-memory parallel computing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

255
255
255
255
255
256
256
256
256
257

12 FAQ12.1 Questions related to parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Questions related to error occurred in compiling or executing PHITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 Questions related to Tally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Questions related to source generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

258
258
259
260
261

index

262

v

1

1

Recent Improvements and Development members

1.1 Recent Improvements
Essences of improvements after version 2.24 are described below.
From ver. 3.02, the following functions were implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/12/01)• New parameters nudtvar and udtvar(i) were introduced for [t-userdefined]. After variables udtvar(i),(i = 1, · · · , nudtvar) was set in an input file, these can be used in subroutine usrtally. There is no
upper limit of the number of udtvar(i) unlike udtpara before ver. 3.01. udtpara can be also set after thisversion.
• New options were implemented for the unit of [t-let] and [t-sed].
• Position of the source generation was adjusted to just on the spherical surface for s-type=9 with dir=iso.
This revision influences only when some materials are placed outside the source sphere.
• A bug related to [counter] section was revised. Before this revision, occurrence of atomic interactions
were ignored in calculating counter when negs was set to -1 (only photon transport mode).
• A bug in the calculation of the restricted stopping power when delta-rays are generated by [delta ray]
was fixed.
• The bug in the calculation of angular straggling using nspred = 2 was fixed. This bug was introducedin PHITS2.96, and calculation results for charged particle beam using the versions between 2.96 and 3.01
might be strange.
From ver. 3.01, the following functions were implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/10/31)• A special ANGEL parameter sangel was introduced to insert all ANGEL parameters into tally output
files. This function was developed by Mr. Takamitsu Miura of RIST, and was supported by Center for
Computational Science & e-Systems, JAEA.
• Reading algorithm for tetrahedral geometry was revised to reduce the computational time.
• ANGEL was revised to reduce the computational time for making eps files of tally results with 2-dimensional
type such as axis=xy.
• A bug for ignoring stdcut in [t-deposit] was fixed.
From ver. 3.00, the Kurotama model was used as the default model to give nucleus-nucleus reaction crosssections, and the natural isotope expansion was eﬀective in input files of DCHAIN-SP generated by [t-dchain].
In addition, some bugs were fixed. (2017/10/04)
From ver. 2.97, the following functions were implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/09/21)• A new parameter iMeVperu was introduced to convert the unit of nucleus energy [MeV] to [MeV/u] in
outputs of all tallies. By setting of iMeVperu=1 in [parameters], all tally results are output with the unitof MeV/u for the nucleus energy. This function was developed by Mr. Takamitsu Miura of RIST, and was
supported by Center for Computational Science & e-Systems, JAEA.
• New parameters r-from, r-to in [t-cross] with mesh=reg were added, because conventional parameters r-in, r-out were confusing. r-from, r-to can be used instead of r-in, r-out, respectively.
• The option of the stopping power ndedx=3 became applicable for target nuclei with the mass number of
93 ≤ Z ≤ 97 (from Np to Bk). See Section 4.2.8 for more detail.
• By adding “$OMP=N” (N is the number of CPU cores to be used) before the first section in a PHITS input
file, the shared-memory parallel computing using OpenMP is executed. Even when infl: is set, a line of“file=input file name” is not required. In Mac OS, a terminal window is opened when PHITS is executedby drag and drop on the Dock. Note that these function are not available when to run PHITS on the commandline on Linux and so on.

2

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS• The default value of the switching energy from JQMD to JAMQMD, ejamqmd, was changed to 3GeV.
From ver. 2.96, the following functions were implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/08/28)• A new section [ww bias] and a new tally [t-wwbg] were implemented to bias [weight window] toobtain better statistics for a certain direction. See Section 4.20 and 6.16 in more detail.
• The numerical data of tally results are outputted after each batch is finished even for itall=0 (default).
Thus, the diﬀerence between itall=1 and 0 is whether the image (*.eps) files are generated or not. Owing
to this revision, the parameter stdcut works in the default setting.
• Only related tallies to the setting of the icntl parameter work. For example, all tallies except for [t-volume]are disabled when icntl=14, while [t-volume] is disabled when icntl,14. Warning is outputted wheninfl or set command is written in the disabled section.
• Some ANGEL parameters were introduced to change the length or time axis of figures. For example, you
can draw a figure of spatial dose distribution with the axis in nm scale by setting angel=cmnm in the tally.
See section 5.7.10 in more detail.
• PHITS execution is terminated when two or more [parameters] sections exist in one input file.
• Some bugs are fixed in terms of the systematic equation for calculating the giant-dipole resonance cross sections, the angular straggling function for very short range particle, high-energy nucleon-nucleon interaction
model JAMQMD2, and the formula for calculating the source spectrum with the Maxwell distribution.
From ver. 2.95, the procedure for s-type depending on the setting of the energy of source particles waschanged. The mono-energetic and energy-distributed sources can be defined by setting e0 and e-type, respectively, irrespective of the value of s-type. If both e0 and e-type are defined, the energy is decided according to
the previous procedure of s-type. In addition, some bugs were fixed. (2017/07/21)
From ver. 2.94, bug in [t-track] and [t-cross] was fixed. Before this revision, the energy of electrons andpositrons passing through vacuum is slightly diﬀerent from the real value when EGS5 mode is used. Note that thisrevision only influences the tally results, and has no relation with particle transport simulation itself. In addition,
bugs in track-structure mode were fixed. (2017/06/30)
From version 2.93, the following functions were implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/06/16)• A new parameter file(1) was introduced to specify the PHITS installation folder name. When you properly
set this parameter, you do not have to specify the name of other input files i.e. file(7, 20, 21, 24, and25) unless you have changed the folder structure of PHITS.
• A new parameter nucdata was introduced to automatically adjust emin(2) and dmax(2) parameters suitable for JENDL-4.0. The default value of this parameter is set to 1, i.e. neutrons below 20 MeV are
automatically transported using nuclear data library.
• A new option for negs parameter, -1, was introduced. When you set negs = -1, PHITS treats photontransport using the original algorithm (i.e. not EGS5), and ignores the electron and positron transport. This
option is selected as the default setting.
• The default value of ides parameter was changed to 1, i.e. photon does not produce electrons in the PHITS
original algorithm. If you would like to transport electrons and positrons, you have to use EGS5.
• The default value of igamma parameter was changed to 2, i.e. γ-rays are produced in the de-excitation
process based on EBITEM model in the default setting.
• RI source function was improved to be applicable to α and β decays including Auger electron production.
See Table 4.53 in more detail.
• Track-structure mode was developed in PHITS. Using this mode, PHITS can analyze ionization, excitation,and oscillation induced by electrons and positrons event-by-event. See Section 4.13 in more detail.

1.1 Recent Improvements

3• A new method for calculating the energy loss of charged particles with explicitly generating δ-rays wasdeveloped, based on their restricted stopping power. This method is selected as the default setting, i.e.
irlet = 1.
• JAMQMD, which is used for simulating nucleus-nucleus interactions above 3 GeV/u, was improved toconsider the relativistic eﬀect.
• [t-dpa] was improved to be capable of calculating DPA by electrons, positrons, pions etc.
• Bug in the normalization process of the self-fission source (ispfs option) was fixed.
From ver. 2.92, the default setting of output in [t-dchain] tally changed to cutoff in order to score
particles stopped in specified regions. Note that in the previous setting output=product heavy ions produced
in a thin target were scored even though the ions don’t stop in the target. In addition, we replaced a place wherethe version of PHITS is shown in eps files by that of ANGEL. We fixed a bug about triangle prism shape source.
(2017/04/18)
From version 2.91, a following function was implemented, and some bugs were fixed. (2017/02/20)• A new function to display error bars of statistical uncertainties in eps files of tally results was implemented.
This function is available by setting epsout=2 in each tally section. It should be noted that the setting is
ignored when the output format is 2-dimensional type such as axis=xy.
• A bug in the combination of EGS5 and [t-cross] was fixed. This bug aﬀected calculations in whichelectrons or positrons were scored with [t-cross] using EGS5.
From version 2.90, following functions were implemented. (2017/02/09)• A new function to analyze the motion of electrons and positrons in the electro-magnetic fields was implemented. This implementation was performed under support of NAIS Inc.
• The default value of the ascat2 parameter introduced in version 2.77 was revised from 0.088 to 0.038, in
accordance with the original paper 3 . The PHITS results obtained by setting nspred = 2 without specifying
ascat2 will be changed.
• A new function to generate xyz-mesh distribution source was implemented. Using this function, you canreproduce sources having a complex spatial distribution. See Section 4.3.14 in more detail.
• A new tally named [t-volume] was developed in order to automatically calculate the volume of each cell.
See Sections 6.17 and 7 in more detail.
• A new parameter timeout was introduced in the [parameters] section. When CPU time exceeds thisvalue, the PHITS simulation is automatically stopped. This check function works at the end of each batch.
• A new parameter stdcut was introduced in each tally. When the all statistical uncertainties of the tally
results become less than this value, the PHITS simulation is automatically stopped. This check function
works at the end of each batch.
• Nuclear and atomic interactions are explicitly distinguished in [t-product], [t-star], and [counter].
Information on further detailed channels such as the production of bremsstrahlung can be also deduced. See
Sections 6.8, 6.13, 4.26 in more detail.
From version 2.89, following functions were implemented. (2017/01/11)• In the default setting, c became unusable as comment marks in [material] section in order to avoid anerror that the elemental symbol for carbon, C, is read as comment marks. When you use c as comment
marks in the section, set icommat=1 in [parameters] section.
• A new option of [t-deposit] was developed to sum up the deposit energies weighted by user definedconditions. This option can be applied to simulation, for example soft errors in semiconductor devices.
3 G.R. Lynch and O.I. Dahl, Nucl. Instrum. Methods Phys. Res, B 58, 6-10 (1991).

4

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS• A new function to use results of tallies as an energy distribution of source particles was added in [source].
This function can be used by specifying e-type=20.
• User defined function 2 (usrdfn2.f) in [t-deposit] was changed to the new option to estimate biologicaldose on the basis of Microdosimetric Kinetic Model. See the paper 4 in more detail.
From version 2.88, following functions were implemented. (2016/09/29)• The sumtally function became applicable to [t-dchain] tally.
• Two options of the function about user defined cross sections were developed. One is an extrapolation
function to extrapolate given data for incident energies, emission angles, and emission energies. The other is
eﬀective in the case that there are no data of diﬀerential cross section. You can use nuclear reaction models
to simulate nuclear reaction events only with data of total reaction cross section.
• Bug that all neutrons with lower energy than emin(2) decay was fixed. (From ver. 2.83, this bug occurred.)From version 2.87, following functions were implemented. (2016/09/15)• The arrows to indicate the xyz coordinates are depicted in [t-3dshow] tally.
• Calculation algorithm for tetrahedral geometry was revised to reduce the computational time.
• The file name of geometry-error information file (“*.err” ) was changed to (“* geo.out” )• Bug in the use of MTx, i.e. S (α, β) table, in [material] section was fixed. This bug occurred only inversion 2.86.
From version 2.86, following functions were implemented. (2016/08/23)• A new tally [t-wwg] was introduced. Using this tally, you can automatically determine an appropriate
setting for the [Weight Window] section. See Section 6.15 in more detail.
• A function to output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView, which is an opensource, multi-platform data analysis and visualization application, was implemented. See documents in\utility\ParaView folder in more detail. Furthermore, a function to generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensionaltally output was implemented. These improvements were performed under supports of Dr. Furutaka of Research Group for Nuclear Sensing, JAEA, and V.I.C., Inc.
• A new mode for calculating stopping power of all charged particle by ATIMA, ndedx = 3, was added, andset as the default value.
• The name of file to output the current batch information was changed from batch.now to batch.out. You
can specify this file name by setting file(22) in [parameters] section.
• The RI-source function was implemented. Using this function, PHITS can generate photon sources withenergy spectra of radioisotope (RI) decay by simply specifying the activity and name of the RIs. Nuclear
decay database DECDC 5 was used in this function. This database is equivalent to ICRP107. See Table 4.53
in more detail. This improvement was performed under support of Dr. A. Endo of Japan Atomic Energy
Agency (JAEA).
• A new parameter natural was introduced. When you define an element without specifying its mass numberin [material] section, and set natural = 1 or 2, PHITS assumes that it has natural isotope composition.
Note that natural isotopes whose nuclear data are not included in JENDL-4.0 are ignored in the calculation.
This improvement was performed under support of Center for Computational Science & e-Systems, JAEA.
• A new section [Data Max] was introduced to specify the dmax parameter for each nucleus and material. See
Section 4.16 in more detail. This improvement was performed under support of Center for Computational
Science & e-Systems, JAEA.
4 T.Sato et al. Biological dose estimation for charged-particle therapy using an improved PHITS code coupled with a microdosimetrickinetic model, Radiat. Res. 171, 107-117 (2009).
5 A. Endo, Y. Yamaguchi and K.F. Eckerman, Nuclear decay data for dosimetry calculation - Revised data of ICRP Publication 38, JAERI
1347 (2005).

1.1 Recent Improvements

5• Muon nuclear reaction model was improved. See this paper 6 in more detail.
• A new model for deuteron-nucleus total reaction cross sections was introduced. This model can be used by
setting icrdm=1 in [parameters] section. See this paper 7 in more detail.
• The pion total reaction cross section model was improved, and employed as the default model. The improved
model reproduces experimental data of the cross sections better than the old model, which uses geometricalformula. You can select the models by icxspi parameter.
• Several sumtally subsection can be defined in an input. Some bugs were fixed related to sumtally.
From version 2.85, following functions were implemented. (2016/05/16)• High-energy heavy ion reaction model, JAMQMD, which works above 3 GeV/u, was improved to JAMQMD2,
in the same manner as JQMD. The accuracy as well as the stability of the calculation is improved, particularly for cosmic-ray simulation.
• Algorithm of stopping power calculation ATIMA in PHITS was improved. PHITS simulation with highprecision ATIMA is now possible in the almost same calculation time with SPAR by this improvement.
This improvement was performed by Mr. Akio Wada of Research Organization for Information Science &Technology (RIST), and was supported by Center for Computational Science & e-Systems, Japan Atomic
Energy Agency (JAEA).
• The unit of esmin and esmax parameters is changed from MeV to MeV/u. These parameters define theminimum and maximum energy of charged particles treated in the simulation, respectively.
• A bug in the high-energy photon transport (approximately above 10 MeV) using EGS5 mode was fixed.
• A bug in the capture reaction of negative muon when 1 H is included in the material was fixed.
From ver. 2.84, some bugs were fixed. (2016/03/16)
From version 2.83, following functions were implemented. (2016/03/03)• Neutron decay can be considered. Mean life time of neutron is approximately 886.7 sec. Thus, you have to
set a very large value for tmax (default = 1.0e9 ns) when you would like to consider neutron decay in yoursimulation.
• Bug in the treatment of the Doppler eﬀect using the EGS5 mode was fixed. Due to this bug, previous versionsof PHITS scored some energies for [t-deposit] with part = photon, which should have been 0.
• A bug in [t-point] was fixed. This bug occurred when you write other tallies with mesh = reg behind a[t-point] tally, and might cause the results of the other tallies to be wrong.
• We fixed a bug that the sumtally function doesn’t work in an input file including infl.
From version 2.82, following functions were implemented. (2015/12/16)• Point estimator tally [t-point] was implemented to calculate the particle fluence at a certain point or ring(see section 6.3 as well as \utility\tpoint folder)• A new parameter elastic was added in [t-yield] tally to output recoil nucleus from elastic scattering.
• A new output option transmut was added in [t-star] tally to output star density for a reaction which
induces transmutation of target nucleus.
• A new option fiss was added in [counter] section to output the information on secondary particles generated through fission reaction, particularly in each generation of sequential fissions.
6 S. Abe and T. Sato, Implementation of muon interaction models in PHITS, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. (2016)[http://www.tandfonline.com/doi/abs/10.1080/00223131.2016.1210043]
7 K. Minomo, K. Washiyama, and K. Ogata, J. Nucl. Sci. Tech. DOI:10.1080/00223131.2016.1213672

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS

6• A new function was implemented in [source] section to generate neutron sources from spontaneous fission.
In this function, the multiplicity of neutron and its energy spectrum are taken from Ref. 8 . See section 4.3.2
in more detail. The PHITS development team is grateful to Dr. Liem Peng Hong of NAIS, Co., Inc. for his
support on developing the function.
• A new function was implemented in [source] section to generate particles from a triangle prism. See
section 4.3.13 in more detail.
• A new function was implemented in [source] section to generate particles with arbitrary time information.
See section 4.3.19 in more detail.
• A new parameter NONU was added in [parameters] section to control the neutron multiplicity.
• A new function to calculate the particle fluence in sector prisms was implemented in [t-track] tally byintroducing θ mesh in the case of mesh = r-z.
• Some bugs in the EGS5 algorithm were fixed.
• A new function to consider the polarization of photon was implemented in the calculation of nuclear florescence resonance (NRF).
• Restart calculation using [t-dpa] tally became feasible.
• Sum tally function became applicable to all tallies except for [t-dchain]. (From ver. 2.88, this function
became applicable to all tallies.)• Contribution of each particle can be properly calculated using [t-deposit] with output = deposit
option.
• Some bugs in the muon- and photon-induced nuclear reaction models as well as JQMD-2.0 were fixed.
• Instructions how to use tetrahedral geometry (TetraGEOM), point estimator tally (tpoint), and user-definedtally (usrtally) were added in the utility folder.
From version 2.81, following functions were implemented. (2015/10/15)• We revised makefile to consider the dependence of each source file. Owning to this improvement, you can
use make -j option to speed up the compilation of PHITS. Please be careful that the target (executable) filename was changed in the revised makefile. This revision was performed under support of Dr. Furutaka of
Research Group for Nuclear Sensing, JAEA.
• The limitation of the number of material when you use EGS5 was eliminated. However, PHITS calculation
may crash due to insuﬃcient memory when you define more than a few hundred materials. In addition, themaximum number of elements per one material is still limited to 20.
• We fixed bugs in [t-track] and [t-deposit] when you use EGS5.
• We fixed a bug in [t-dchain] to properly consider the successive lines. The maximum number of regionsthat can be specified in [t-dchain] was extended up to 500.
• We fixed a bug in [t-deposit], mesh=reg, output=deposit when you use [delta-ray] section.
• We fixed a bug in [t-heat] with mesh=r-z.
From version 2.80, following functions were implemented. (2015/09/02)• The function to read tetrahedral geometry (a kind of polygonal geometry) was implemented (see section
4.6.5). This implementation was carried out under support of HUREL, Hanyang University, Korea.
• The function to produce bremsstrahlung and electron-positron pair by muon interaction was implemented.
8 J. M. Verbeke, C. Hagmnn, and D. Wright, “Simulation of Neutron and Gamma Ray Emission from Fission and Photofission”, UCRL-

AR-228518 (2014).

1.1 Recent Improvements

7• The function for simulating nuclear resonance florescence (NRF) was implemented. This function enables toreproduce the excitation of nucleus and the associate production of isomer by lower energy photon. Nuclear
resonance fluorescence model can be activated by setting ipnint=2 in the [parameters] section.
• “Sum” tally function became applicable to all tallies except for [t-dpa] and [t-dchain].
• The function to read user defined cross sections was implemented (see Section 4.17)• Algorithm to consider energy straggling of charged particles was revised to reproduce the doses around
Bragg peak more precisely.
• A new parameter idelt was introduced to reduce the computational time for particle transport simulationin very large gas area. When idelt=1, deltm and deltc are divided by the density of each material.
• The function to properly calculate the uncertainty of tally results was implemented in the case of using“dump” source (see Section 4.3.15).
• A new parameter pnimul was introduced to bias the photo-nuclear reaction cross section against photoatomic interaction cross section.
• Bug in the calculation of the uncertainty of [t-yield] was fixed• Improvements related to EGS5 mode
– A new parameter ipegs was introduced to control PEGS5 execution before PHITS simulation.
– A new parameter imsegs was introduced to precisely simulate the multiple scattering of electron every
time when electron goes into a new material. This is an original option only in PHITS (not in theoriginal EGS5).
– A bug in the electron transport algorithm only in PHITS2.77 (not PHITS 2.76 or before) was fixed.
Due to this bug, the range of electrons calculated by PHITS2.77 was too short.
– The limitation of the number of material used in PHITS was eliminated even using EGS5.
From version 2.77, following functions were implemented. (2015/05/19)• We fixed a bug that unnatural energy distribution is tallied with setting axis=eng when EGS5 is used.
• Muon-nuclear interaction model about muon capture reaction was revised.
• We changed the default setting of the nuclear reaction model in the case that light ions are targets. Whensuch a reaction occurs, PHITS calculates it with regarding the light ions as projectile on the basis of theinverse kinematics. For example, in the default setting, INCL is used even for heavy ion induced reactions
when deuteron is set to be its target nucleus.
From version 2.76, following functions were implemented. (2015/03/23)• Muon-nuclear interaction model based on the virtual photon production theory was implemented. Characteristic X-ray production from muonic atoms as well as associating muon capture reaction can be also
considered in the new version.
• Adjustment parameters for determing the magnitude of angular straggling for nspred = 2 were introduced.
• Bugs due to the problem of Intel Fortran 2015 were fixed.
From ver. 2.75, we fixed a bug that the function of sum tally does not work when you use an input file including
some sections of tally, and corrected a bug occurs in setting e-mode=2. (2015/02/09)
From version 2.74, following functions were implemented. (2015/01/30)• Version of DCHAIN-SP included in the PHITS package was changed from DCHAIN-SP2001 (dchain264.exe)
to DCHAIN-SP2014 (dchain274.exe). DCHAIN-SP2014 was improved from DCHAIN-SP2001 in terms of
the following aspects;

8

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS(1) The input format was changed.
(2) The number of energy groups of neutron activation cross section libraries was increased from 175 to
1968.
(3) A new function was implemented to output the [source] section of PHITS from the activities calculatedby DCHAIN-SP.
(4) A new function was implemented to output the time dependence of radioactivities in each region in the
input format of ANGEL.
• Thread parallelization is available even using EGS5, i.e. negs = 1. Some bugs related to EGS5 were fixed.
This improvement was performed by Mr. Masaaki Adachi of Research Organization for Information Science& Technology (RIST), and was supported by Center for Computational Science & e-Systems, Japan Atomic
Energy Agency (JAEA).
• A new function to combine two (or more) tally results, named “sum tally”, was implemented. (From ver.
2.88, this function became applicable to all tallies.) See Sec. 5.8 in more detail. This function was developedby Mr. Takamitsu Miura of RIST, and was supported by Center for Computational Science & e-Systems,
JAEA.
• The Kurotama model was revised to be capable of calculating the cross sections over 5 GeV/u. See thisarticle 9 in more detail.
• The gamma de-excitation data contained in trxcrd.dat was incorporated in the source files of PHITS. Consequently, file(14) parameter is not necessary to be specified in PHITS input file even setting e-mode≥1
or igamma≥1.
• Some bugs related to JAM and JAMQMD etc. were revised.
From ver. 2.73, we fixed a bug producing abnormal nuclei such as di-neutron in calculation of nuclear reaction
models. For Windows, an installed executable file of the OpenMP version is available only on 64-bit. You can
execute PHITS in single processing on both the 32-bit and 64-bit systems, but you cannot do it using OpenMP on
32-bit. (2014/11/05)
From ver. 2.72, we fixed a bug occurs in setting igamma=2, and corrected an error that the GEM model
produces di-neutron. An error of angular distribution defined by degree in [source] section using a-type wascorrected. In the former version, because of an incorrect interpolation, a biased distribution was used when you set
the a-type sub-section using degree. Furthermore, we changed the definition of na and nn in [source] section
using a-type. You cannot set these parameters to be negative. (2014/10/21)
From ver. 2.71, we fixed a bug about electron-positron annihilation occurred when EGS5 was used. (2014/09/26)
From ver. 2.70, the following functions were implemented. (2014/08/30)• Transport algorithm for photons, electrons and positions in EGS5 (Electron Gamma Shower Version 5
10) was incorporated. You can use this algorithm instead of the original one by setting negs = 1 in[parameters] section. In addition, file(20) must be specified. At this moment, you cannot set negs
= 1 in the OpenMP version of PHITS. The maximum number of material is limited to 100 when negs = 1.
(From ver. 2.80, there is no this limitation.) See Sec. 4.2.20 in detail. This improvement was supported by
Dr. Hirayama and Dr. Namito of KEK.
• High-energy photo-nuclear reaction can be treated up to 1 TeV by implementing non-resonant photo-nuclear
reaction mechanism in JAM.
• Muon-induced nuclear reaction can be treated up to 1 TeV by considering the generation of virtual photon
from muon. You can activate this model by setting imuint = 1 in [parameters] section.
• The event generator mode ver.2 was improved to precisely determine the charged particle spectra on thebasis of their cross section data such as (n, p) and (n, α) contained in evaluated nuclear data library. You can
use this new event generator mode by setting e-mode=2 in [parameters] section.
9 L. Sihver et al., Nucl. Instr. & Meth. B 334, 34-39 (2014).
10 H. Hirayama et al., SLAC-R-730 (2005) and KEK Report 2005-8 (2005).

1.1 Recent Improvements

9• JQMD was improved to consider the relativistic eﬀect. The algorithm for stabilizing the initial state ofnucleus was also implemented. The improved JQMD, named JQMD-2.0, can be activated by setting irqmd= 1 in [parameters] section. This improvement was performed under collaboration with Dr. D. Mancusi
at CEA/Saclay.
• Detector resolution can be considered in the event-by-event deposition energy calculation using [t-deposit]
with output = deposit.
From ver. 2.67, the following functions were implemented. (2014/05/22)• A geometry check function was implemented. This function works when you specify a tally for generating
the two-dimensional view of your geometry. When double defined or undefined regions are detected, theirregions are painted on the two-dimensional view. See Sec. 10 in detail.
• An extension of the event generator mode (ver.2) was implemented. Owing to this implementation, theaccuracy of event-by-event analysis for the reactions induced by neutrons below 20 MeV was improved. See
Sec. 4.2.22 in detail.
• New parameter infout was added to control output information in file(6) (D=phits.out). You canselect the information that you need.
• The current batch number appears on the console window in real time. Some important error and warning
messages such as “input data file for cross section directory does not exist.” are also shown in the window.
• Cone shape can be used for specifying the source locations by setting s-type=18.
• Dumpall and dump function for [t-cross], [t-time], [t-product] tallies can be used in the restartcalculation. For this revision, the rule for specifying the file names was changed. Results written in aconfiguration file (.cfg) in the former version of PHITS (before 2.66) are outputted in a file specified by“file=***”. Dump data are outputted in another file named “*** dmp”.
• We increased the total memory usage of PHITS (mdas) given in the param.inc file to 120,000,000 (equivalent to 1GB), and the maximum number of lattice in a cell to 25,000,000. By this extention, we can use adetailed voxel phantom such as ICRP phantom without recompiling the source code.
From ver. 2.66, the following functions were implemented. (2014/02/21)• Algorithm for including discrete spectra calculated by DWBA (Distorted Wave Born Approximation) was
implemented. In several nuclear reactions induced by protons or deuterons, discrete peaks are added toneutron and proton spectra obtained by nuclear reaction models.
• Pion production processes in photo-nuclear reactions were included by implementing ∆ and N ∗ resonances.
Thus, PHITS2.66 can treat the photo-nuclear reaction up to 1 GeV. （From ver. 2.70, this model is available
up to 1 TeV.）• Results in the unit of Gy can be also obtained in [t-heat] tally. We corrected a bug that NaN was detectedin the case of void regions.
• We fixed a bug occurred when you set nm to be negative in [source] section using e-type = 2,3,5,6,7,
12,15,16, which specify the energy spectrum by functional shape. Furthermore, we also fixed the similar
bug for nn in the cases of a-type = 5,6,15,16, which specify the angular distribution by the shape.
From ver. 2.65, dose in the unit of Gy can be obtained in [t-deposit] tally. Furthermore, a bug in converting
mass density to particle density in [material] and [cell] sections was fixed. This bug caused errors (0.6% at themost) in calculated results, when neutron-rich nuclei were used. (2014/01/30)
From ver. 2.64, bugs in photo-nuclear reaction model and EBITEM, and other minor bugs were fixed. Furthermore, NaN was detected in [T-Heat] calculations because of negative values in the probability table (p-table).
The Ace libraries were re-produced by neglecting p-tables for the following 130 nuclides:

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS

10

As075 Ba130 Ba132 Ba134 Ba135 Ba136 Ba137 Ba140 Br079 Br081 Cd106 Cd108
Cd110 Cd111 Cd112 Cd113 Cd114 Cd116 Ce141 Ce142 Ce143 Ce144 Cf250 Fe059
Ga069 Ga071 Hf174 Hf176 Hf177 Hf178 Hf179 Hf180 Hf181 Hf182 I_127 I_129
I_130 I_131 I_135 In113 In115 Kr078 Kr080 Kr082 Kr083 Kr084 Kr085 La138
La139 La140 Mo092 Mo094 Mo095 Mo096 Mo097 Mo098 Mo099 Mo100 Nb094 Nb095
Ni059 Pr141 Pr143 Rb085 Rb086 Rb087 Rh103 Rh105 Ru096 Ru098 Ru099 Ru100
Ru101 Ru102 Ru103 Ru104 Ru105 Ru106 Sb121 Sb123 Sb124 Sb125 Sb126 Se074
Se076 Se077 Se078 Se079 Se080 Se082 Sr084 Sr086 Sr087 Sr088 Sr089 Sr090
Tc099 Te120 Te122 Te123 Te124 Te125 Te126 Te127m Te128 Te129m Te130 Te132
Xe124 Xe126 Xe128 Xe129 Xe130 Xe131 Xe132 Xe133 Xe134 Xe135 Y_089 Y_090
Y_091 Yb168 Yb170 Yb171 Yb172 Yb173 Yb174 Yb176 Zr093 Zr095(2013/11/19)
From ver. 2.60, the following functions are implemented. (2013/08/22)• Algorithm for de-excitation of nucleus after the evaporation process was improved by implementing EBITEM(ENSDF-Based Isomeric Transition and isomEr production Model). Prompt gamma spectrum can be precisely estimated, including discrete peaks. The isomer production rates can be properly estimated.
• Quasi-deuteron disintegration, which is the dominant photo-nuclear mechanism between 25 to 140 MeV,
was implemented in JQMD. Thus, PHITS2.60 can treat the photo-nuclear reaction up to 140 MeV. （Fromver. 2.70, this model is available up to 1 TeV.）The evaporation process after the giant resonance of 6 Li, 12 C,
14
N, 16 O was improved by considering the isospin of excited nucleus. Thus the alpha emission is suppressedand neutron and proton emission is enhanced from the giant resonance of these nuclei.
• Particle transport simulation in the combination field of electro-magnetic fields became available. See 4.11
section in detail.
• New energy mesh functions were implemented in [source] section in order to directly define diﬀerential
energy spectrum in (/MeV) as well as discrete energy spectrum.
• Several algorithms were optimized to reduce the computational time, especially for xyz mesh tally withistdev = 2. Furthermore, use of memory for tally and ANGEL was improved. These improvements
were performed by Mr. Daichi Obinata of Fujitsu Systems East Limited, and were supported by Center for
Computational Science & e-Systems, Japan Atomic Energy Agency (JAEA).
• Minor revision and bug fix.
– Number of cells acceptable in [t-dchain] was increased.
– The references of PHITS and INCL were changed.
– 7-digit cell ID became acceptable.
– Maximum dmax for electron and positron was changed from 1 GeV to 10 GeV.
– Restart calculation became available even when PHITS did not stop properly.
– Lattice cell became acceptable in [t-dchain].
– Avoid the termination of PHITS when some strange error occurs in JAM.
– New multiplier function k=-120 was added to weight the density.
– Minor bug fix in SMM, user defined tally, range calculation, transform, electron lost particle, random
number generation for MPI, delta-ray production.
– Nuclear data for some nuclei was revised by following the revision of JENDL-4.0.
– Bug in reading proton data library was fixed.
From ver. 2.52, the following functions are implemented. (2012/12/27)• Electron, positron and photon transport algorithms were revised. In the new version, eﬀective stopping
powers of electrons and positions vary with their cut-oﬀ energies. The energies are conserved in an event
induced by photon-atomic interactions such as the photo-electric eﬀect.

1.1 Recent Improvements

11• A new tally [t-dchain] was implemented to generate input files of DCHAIN-SP, which can calculate thetime dependence of activation during and after irradiations. Please see Sec. 6.14 in detail.
• Macro bodies of Right Elliptical Cylinder (REC), Truncated Right-angle Cone (TRC), Ellipsoid (ELL), andWedge (WED) are implemented.
From ver. 2.50, the following functions are implemented. (2012/9/25)• The procedure for calculating statistical uncertainties was revised. The function to restart the PHITS calculation based the tally results obtained by past PHITS simulations was implemented in order to increase thehistory number when the number is not enough. Please see Sec. 4.2.2 in more detail. This improvement
was performed by Mr. Daichi Obinata of Fujitsu Systems East Limited, and was supported by Center for
Computational Science & e-Systems, Japan Atomic Energy Agency (JAEA).
• The shared memory parallel computing using OpenMP architecture became available in PHITS, thoughsome restrictions still remain (see Sec. 11.2). For this purpose, we drastically revised the source code of
PHITS, and old Fortran compilers such as f77 and g77 cannot be used for compiling PHITS anymore. See
Sec. 2.4 in detail. This work was supported by Next-Generation Integrated Simulation of Living Matter,
Strategic Programs for R&D of RIKEN, and RIKEN Special Postdoctoral Researchers (SPDR) Program.
For this improvement, we used K computer and RIKEN Integrated Cluster of Clusters (RICC).
• The cross section data for photo-nuclear reaction was revised based on JENDL Photonuclear Data File 2004(JENDL/PD-2004). It should be noted that the current version of PHITS can handle only giant resonancesamong the photo-nuclear reaction mechanisms. Therefore, the accuracy for calculating higher energy photonuclear reactions above 20 MeV is not good.
• The Statistical Multi-fragmentation Model (SMM) was implemented in the statistical decay of highlyexcited residual nuclei. Owing to this implementation, the accuracy of calculating the production crosssections of light and medium-heavy fragments in heavy ion collisions was improved.
• Intra-Nuclear Cascade of Liège (INCL) was implemented, and employed as the default model for simulating
nuclear reactions induced by neutrons, protons, pions, deuterons, tritons, 3 He, and 4 He particles at intermediate energies. This improvement was supported by Dr. Joseph Cugnon of University of Liège and Dr.
Davide Mancusi, Dr. Alain Boudard, Dr. Jean-Christophe David, and Dr. Sylvie Leray of CEA/Saclay undercollaboration between CEA/Saclay and JAEA.
• KUROTAMA model, which gives reaction cross sections of nucleon-nucleus and nucleus-nucleus, was implemented. This improvement was supported by Dr. Akihisa Kohama of RIKEN, Dr. Kei Iida of Kochi
University, and Dr. Kazuhiro Oyamatsu of Aichi Shukutoku University.
• Intra-Nuclear Cascade with Emission of Light Fragment (INC-ELF) was implemented. Uozumi researchgroup performed this development under collaboration between Kyushu University and JAEA.
• A user-defined tally named [t-userdefined] was introduced in order to deduce user specific quantities
from the PHITS simulation. Re-compile of PHITS is required to use this tally. See Sec. 6.18 in detail.
• The neutron Kerma factors for several nuclei such as 35 Cl were revised. The photo- and electro-atomic datalibraries were newly developed based on JENDL-4.0 and the Livermore Evaluated Electron Data Library(EEDL), respectively.
From ver. 2.30, the radiation damage model for calculating DPA (Displacement Per Atom) in PHITS was
improved using the screened Coulomb scattering. We also added the [multiplier] section to be used in the[t-track] section. (2011/8/18)
From ver. 2.28, you can use options of dumpall and dump for [t-cross], [t-time], and [t-product]
tallies also on the MPI parallel computing. When these options are used in parallel computing, PHITS makes(PE−1) files for writing the dump information from each node, where PE is the total number of used Processor
Elements. PHITS can also read the dump files in the parallel computing.
From ver. 2.26, we added the function to generate knocked-out electrons so-called δ-rays produced along the
trajectory of charged particle. Setting the threshold energy for each region in the [delta ray] section, you can
explicitly transport δ-rays above the threshold energy.

1 RECENT IMPROVEMENTS AND DEVELOPMENT MEMBERS

12

1.2 Development members
Koji Niita,
Research Organization for Information Science & Technology (RIST).
Tatsuhiko Sato, Yosuke Iwamoto, Shintaro Hashimoto, Tatsuhiko Ogawa, Takuya Furuta, Shinichiro Abe,
Takeshi Kai, Norihiro Matsuda, Hiroshi Nakashima, Tokio Fukahori, Keisuke Okumura, and Tetsuya Kai,
Japan Atomic Energy Agency (JAEA).
Hiroshi Iwase,High Energy Accelerator Research Organization (KEK).
Satoshi Chiba,
Tokyo Institute of Technology (TITech).
Nobuhiro Shigyo,
Kyushu University.
Lembit Sihver,
Vienna University of Technology, Austria.
The following members also contributed to the development of PHITS.
Hiroshi Takada, Shin-ichro Meigo, Makoto Teshigawara, Fujio Maekawa, Masahide Harada, Yujiro Ikeda,
Yukio Sakamoto, and Shusaku Noda,
Japan Atomic Energy Agency (JAEA).
Takashi Nakamura,Tohoku University.
Davide Mancusi,
Chalmers University, Sweden.

1.3 Reference of PHITS
Please refer the following document in context of using any version of PHITS.
• T. Sato, K. Niita, N. Matsuda, S. Hashimoto, Y. Iwamoto, S. Noda, T. Ogawa, H. Iwase, H. Nakashima, T.
Fukahori, K. Okumura, T. Kai, S. Chiba, T. Furuta and L. Sihver, Particle and Heavy Ion Transport Code
System PHITS, Version 2.52, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 50:9, 913-923 (2013).
This is an open access article, and you can download it fromhttp://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00223131.2013.814553
Other articles that describe the features of PHITS are:• H. Iwase, K. Niita, T.Nakamura, Development of general purpose particle and heavy ion transport Monte
Carlo code. J Nucl Sci Technol. 39, 1142-1151 (2002).
• K. Niita, T. Sato, H. Iwase, H. Nose, H. Nakashima and L. Sihver, Particle and Heavy Ion Transport Code
System; PHITS, Radiat. Meas. 41, 1080-1090 (2006).
• L. Sihver, D. Mancusi, T. Sato, K. Niita, H. Iwase, Y. Iwamoto, N. Matsuda, H. Nakashima, Y. Sakamoto,
Recent developments and benchmarking of the PHITS code, Adv. Space Res. 40, 1320-1331 (2007).
• L. Sihver, T. Sato, K. Gustafsson, D. Mancusi, H. Iwase, K. Niita, H. Nakashima, Y. Sakamoto, Y. Iwamoto
and N. Matsuda, An update about recent developments of the PHITS code, Adv. Space Res. 45, 892-899(2010).

1.3 Reference of PHITS

13• K. Niita, N. Matsuda, Y. Iwamoto, H. Iwase, T. Sato, H. Nakashima, Y. Sakamoto and L. Sihver, PHITS:
Particle and Heavy Ion Transport code System, Version 2.23, JAEA-Data/Code 2010-022 (2010).
• K. Niita, H. Iwase, T. Sato, Y. Iwamoto, N. Matsuda, Y. Sakamoto, H. Nakashima, D. Mancusi and L. Sihver,
Recent developments of the PHITS code, Prog. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 1, 1-6 (2011).

2 INSTALLATION, COMPILATION AND EXECUTION OF PHITS

14

2

Installation, compilation and execution of PHITSThe source code of PHITS is written in Fortran, and can be compiled and executed on various operating
system, such as Windows, Mac and Linux. For Windows and Mac, the executable file compiled by Intel Fortranwas included in the PHITS package. Thus, you can execute PHITS in Windows and Mac without compiling it. For
Linux, you must compile PHITS by yourself using make command coupled with an appropriate Fortran compiler.

2.1 Operating environment
PHITS can be executed on Windows (XP or later), Mac (OS X v10.6 or later), Linux, and Unix operating
systems. Recommended system requirements for PHITS are 2GB of RAM and 6GB (at least 4GB is required) ofavailable space on hard disk.
There is no software you have to pre-install before using PHITS. However, we recommend you to install a text
editor that can display line numbers, since line number is specified if you make a mistake in your PHITS input file.
Furthermore, installation of Ghostscript and GSview is required to display image files created by PHITS, which
are written in the EPS format. An example of free text editor for Windows is• Crimson Editor (http://www.crimsoneditor.com/).
For details of the installation of Ghostscript and GSview, see the following web pages.
• Ghostscript (http://www.ghostscript.com/)• GSview (http://pages.cs.wisc.edu/ ghost/gsview/index.htm)
You have to recompile the source code in order to extend memory usage of PHITS (see Sec. 2.9) or define an
original radiation source using usrsors.f (see Sec. 4.3.16). Our recommended Fortran compilers are Intel FortranCompiler 11.1 (or later) and gfortran 4.7 (or later. Note that ver. 4.9-5.4 for Windows cannot compile). If you use
other compilers, errors may occur in compiling or executing PHITS.
On Linux operating system, directory of cross section library files should be specified by datapath= in thefirst line of the cross section directory file “xsdir.jnd.”The directory file name can be specified by file(7) in[parameters].

2.2 Installation and execution on Windows
For Windows, you can install and execute PHITS in the following way.
(1) If you have installed a previous version of PHITS, rename the installed folder to “phits-old”or similar.
(2) Double click “setup-eng.vbs”.
(3) Define install folder (We recommend to select “c:\”).
(4) Right click “\phits\lecture\basic\lec01\lec01.inp”and select “send to”→ “phits”.
(5) Check whether “xz track all.eps”is created or not.
By adding “$OMP=N” (N is the number of CPU cores to be used) before the first section in a PHITS input file,the shared-memory parallel computing using OpenMP is executed. When N = 0, all cores in the computer areused. If N = 1 is set, the parallel computing is not used. From version 2.73, the installed executable file of the
OpenMP version is available only on 64-bit Windows systems.
(Note) If a space character is in the name of file and folder, installation and execution of PHITS is failed.
The installer “setup-eng.vbs”performs the following processes.
(1) Extract “phits.zip”into the specified installation folder.
(2) Add “\phits\bin\”in the environment variable “PATH”.

2.3 Installation and execution on Mac

15(3) Make shortcuts of three batch files, “phits.bat”and “angel.bat”in “\phits\bin”folder and “dchain.bat”in “\phits\dchainsp\bin”folder, in “sendto”folder.
(4) Revise the first line of the nuclear data list file “xsdir.jnd”in the “\phits\data”folder as datapath=‘the installation folder’+ ‘\phits\XS’.

2.3 Installation and execution on Mac
Installation(1) Double-click “phits installer” included in the “mac” folder of the PHITS package.
(2) Select “Automatic” in the select installation mode (See Fig.2.1). “Manual” should be selected only whenthe “Automatic” mode is failed on the host computer. In the failure case, please see the “README-eng.pdf”
file in the “mac” folder.

Figure 2.1: Selection of install mode.

(3) Specify the folder to install PHITS in. As the folder with the account name (ex: iwamoto) is recommended
to be selected. Please push the “select” (See Fig.2.2).
(4) This creates a “phits” folder, which includes all contents of PHITS, including the executable files, source
code, documents for lectures, and sample input files, in the specified folder. It may take several minutes.
Note #1: If wrong password is typed during the installation, the message of “installation is completed” isimmediately shown on desktop and the PHITS icon are appeared on the Dock. However, no file is copied in
the system, and PHITS cannot be executed. In that case, please go back to the procedure (1) and type thecorrect password.
Note #2: If the “phits” folder is moved to another folder, PHITS won’t work.
Note #3: If a “phits” folder already exists in the specified folder, the old “phits” folder is automaticallyrenamed from “phits” to “phits[today’s date].[current time].”
Note #4: If a space character is present in the name of the file or folder, PHITS will not install.

Execution
PHITS can be executed by dragging and dropping or through the use of Terminal.

16

2 INSTALLATION, COMPILATION AND EXECUTION OF PHITS

Figure 2.2: Window when a folder to install PHITS is specified.

How to use PHITS by drag and drop
Drag the icon of the PHITS input file and drop it on the blue PHITS icon on the Dock (See Fig.2.3). For
test calculation, click the Finder icon on the Dock and open the folder of “/phits/lecture/basic/lec01.” Then, drag“lec01.inp” and drop it on the PHITS icon. A new terminal window appears and the calculation condition is output
on it. The calculated results will be shown in the same folder as the input file. As histories of commands appear
when pressing the ↑ key in the terminal, it is useful to use the same input file when repeatedly executing PHITS.

Figure 2.3: Execution by drag and drop.
By adding “$OMP=N” (N is the number of CPU cores to be used) before the first section in a PHITS input file,the shared-memory parallel computing using OpenMP is executed. When N = 0, all cores in the computer areused. If N = 1 is set, the parallel computing is not used.
To execute ANGEL and DCHAIN-SP, drag the icons of the input file generated by the PHITS tally anddrop it onto the red ANGEL or the green DCHAIN icon on the Dock. The PHITS icon can also serve as
ANGEL/DCHAIN-SP.

How to use PHITS via Terminal
After the PHITS installation using “PHITS Installer”, PHITS can be used via the terminal with command
inputs. To execute terminal, select the following items:
Finder → Applications → Utilities → Terminal
To execute PHITS, type the following commands into the terminal after moving to the folder with the input fileusing the “cd” command:

2.3 Installation and execution on Mac

17

Figure 2.4: Window appearing when Terminal is selected.

phits.sh your_input
where “your input” shows the input file name (e.g., “lex01.inp”). As histories of commands appear when pressing
the ↑ key in the terminal, it is useful to use the same input file when repeatedly executing PHITS.
ANGEL and DCHAIN-SP can also be used via the terminal. To execute ANGEL, type the following command
into the Terminal:angel_mac.sh your_input
where “your input” is the input file name (tally output of PHITS. e.g., “track xz.out”).
To execute DCHAIN-SP, type the following command in the terminal:
dchain.sh your_input
where “your input” shows the name of the DCHAIN-SP input file (the file name is designated in the [t-dchain]
section of the PHITS input).

The case of failure for the PHITS installation
In this case, PHITS can be used via Terminal after some settings. When executing PHITS via the Terminal
for the first time, it is necessary to pass a PATH to the folder with the PHITS execution file. To do this, type thefollowing commands into the Terminal:
echo export PATH=/PATH-TO-PHITS/phits/bin:${PATH} >> .bash_profile
source .bash_profile
where “/PATH-TO-PHITS” should be changed to the name of the folder in which PHITS is installed (e.g.,/Users/iwamoto). If the name of the installed folder is not known, it can be found by typing the following command
into the Terminal.
find $HOME -name phitsXXX_mac.exe

18

2 INSTALLATION, COMPILATION AND EXECUTION OF PHITS

where XXX is the version of PHITS. (e.g., 252. XXX is in the name of the PHITS package such as “PHITSXXX”).
“PATH-TO-PATH” is equal to the result displayed on the terminal without “/phits/bin”. Note that it is unnecessary
to pass a PATH after executing PHITS the first time. PHITSver=252 at lines 8 in the file of “/phits/bin/phits.sh”
should be changed to the version of PHITS you install. Hereafter, you can execute PHITS via terminal as shown
the previous section of How to use PHITS via Terminal. Figure 2.5 shows the flow of PHITS execution via the
Terminal at initial setting.

Figure 2.5: Flow of PHITS execution via Terminal at initial setting.
To execute DCHAIN-SP, it is necessary to pass a PATH to the folder with the DCHAIN-SP execution file. The
method for passing the PATH for DCHAIN-SP is the same as that for PHITS and is as follows:echo export PATH=/PATH-TO-PHITS/phits/dchain-sp/bin:${PATH} >> .bash_profile
source .bash_profile
where “/PATH-TO-PHITS” should be changed to the name of the folder in which PHITS is installed (e.g.,/Users/iwamoto).

2.4 Compilation using “make”command for Windows, Mac, and LinuxThe PHITS code can be compiled using the “make” command. For this purpose, the “makefile” file in“\src” folder should be revised to be suitable for the host computer. For example, to compile using Intel Fortran Compiler on Linux, the ENVFLAGS written in “makefile” should be set to LinIfort. To execute PHITS
via parallel computing using MPI or OpenMP, it is necessary to set USEMPI or USEOMP, respectively, to true.
The name of the executable file is given as phits XXX.exe, where XXX is a parameter set to ENVFLAGS. For
example, when ENVFLAGS=LinIfort, the name is phits LinIfort.exe. When USEOMP is available, the name isphits LinIfort OMP.exe. The compiler options given in “makefile” are simply examples, and in may be necessary
to change them so that they are suitable for a user’s particular computer environment.
The attached “makefile” can be used for GNU make. If an error occurs as a result of using the “make”
command, the “gmake” command may be tried instead.
To use gfortran for Windows, the latest installer version can be downloaded from “Looking for the latest
version? Download mingw-w64-install.exe” on the following web site:• MinGW-w64 - for 32 and 64 bit Windows(https://sourceforge.net/projects/mingw-w64/files/?source=navbar)
Running the downloaded installer, select “x86 64” or “i686” for 64-bit or 32 bit PC, respectively, as “Architecture.” It is unnecessary to change other parameters during the installation process.
The followings are the procedure how to compile PHITS.
(1) Revise “makefile” in “\phits\src” folder to set ENVFLAGS=WinGfort. Note that neither OpenMP nor MPI
cannot be activated.

2.5 Compilation using Microsoft Visual Studio with Intel Fortran for Windows

19(2) Open a command prompt by clicking “mingw-w64.bat” in the gfortran install folder.
(3) Move to “\phits\src” folder, and type “mingw32-make” to compile PHITS.
The compiled PHITS by gfortran can be used as follows:(1) Copy “phits WinGfort.exe” to “\phits\bin.”(2) Open “phits.bat” in “\phits\bin”, and add
set PATH=C:\Program Files\mingw-64\...
written in the 2nd line of “mingw-w64.bat,” and set “PHITS EXE” to the PHITS executable file compiled
by gfortran, i.e. “phits WinGfort.exe.”(3) Run PHITS via Windows explorer using “sendto → phits” command.
(4) After finishing the PHITS calculation, some warnings such as “Note: The following floating-point exceptions are signaling: IEEE DENORMAL.” may be found. Those warnings can be ignored.
To make PHITS applicable to memory-shared computing, the source code of PHITS was dramatically revised
from version 2.50, with the status of most of the variables used in PHITS changed from “static” to “dynamic.”
Consequently, PHITS 2.50 or later cannot be compiled using old Fortran compilers such as f77 or g77. Thus, the
PHITS oﬃce recommends the use of Intel Fortran Compiler 11.1 (or later) or gfortran 4.7 (or later 11 ).

2.5 Compilation using Microsoft Visual Studio with Intel Fortran for Windows
In “\phits\bin”folder, a solution file (“bin.sln”) and a project file (“phits-intel.proj”) are included, which arerequired for compiling PHITS using Microsoft Visual Studio coupled with Intel Fortran. You can compile PHITS
using these files as follows.
(1) Double-click the “bin.sln”file. (This file may be automatically updated when you use a new version of Visual
Studio or Intel Fortran. You cannot open these files if you use an older version of Visual Studio (before 2005)
and/or Intel Fortran (before 11.1).
(2) Build “phits-intel.vfproj” in the release mode.
(3) Make an input file for PHITS in the “bin” folder.
(4) Execute the project in the release mode.
(5) Type ‘file=input file name’ in the console window.
(6) Check whether “xz track all.eps” is created or not.
If you want to compile PHITS in the memory-shared parallel mode, you have to change “a-angel.f” to “a-angelwinopenmp.f”in “Source files” of “phits-intel.vfproj”, and add ‘/Qopenmp’ in the additional option window (seeproject → property → Fortran → command line), before building “phits-intel.proj”.
If you want to use your compiled PHITS using the “sendto” command, please rewrite the environmental
variable “PHITS EXE” written in “phits.bat”, e.g.
set PHITS_EXE=C:\phits\bin\Release\phits-intel.exe
Although you can also use the “sendto” command renaming the compiled PHITS to the original file name, e.g.
phits282 win.exe, please don’t delete the original one because it will be required when PHITS is updated.
11 Note that ver. 4.9-5.4 for Windows cannot compile.

2 INSTALLATION, COMPILATION AND EXECUTION OF PHITS

20

2.6 Compilation of ANGELANGEL is a computer program for making graphs in the EPS (Enhanced PostScript) format using simple input
files. Namely, ANGEL converts a file written by ANGEL computer language, which consists the minimum orderto make a figure from numerical data, to that by PostScript one, which is a page description language created by
Adobe Systems.
ANGEL is included in the PHITS sources, in other words, ANGEL is installed automatically in the PHITS
code. But you will need a stand-alone ANGEL for oﬀ line plotting. You can compile the stand-alone ANGEL
easily using the “make.ang”file, which is included in the PHITS source files. After modify the “make.ang”, execute‘make -f make.ang’ to compile the stand-alone ANGEL. Please see ANGEL manual in more detail.

2.7 Executable file
PHITS code can be executed on the UNIX system by the following command,
Example 1: command line to execute PHITS
phits100 < input.dat > output.dat

where phits100 is the PHITS executable file, input.dat is the input file of the PHITS calculation, and output.dat
is the output file for summary and error messages.
You can use the same way on the Windows system unless a parameter infl is used. When you use other files
for the input data with this parameter, the following text should be written in the first line of input.dat.
Example 2: the first line of input.dat
file = input.dat

This method can be used on the other systems including the UNIX. See section 3.3 for the infl parameter.
If you run the PHITS code by the parallel computing, the method shown in Example 1 cannot be used even on
the UNIX system. Instead you can use the method shown in Example 1 on the parallel calculation. In addition,
PHITS is forced to read the input file named phits.in on the parallel computing.

2.8 Terminating the PHITS code
Once PHITS is executed, it creates a batch.out 12 file following every batch that contains elapse information.
In parallel calculation, batch.out also contains each PE status. The occurrence of a PE abort can be determinedby examining batch.out.
The first line of batch.out is written as follows:
1 <--- 1:continue, 0:stop
If the value “1” is changed to “0”, the calculation will be terminated, and a summary and results are provided forthe histories that are terminated. This is a useful function, as shown below.
The parameter itall can be used in conjunction with batch.out. If it is set in the [parameters] section as
itall = 1
PHITS will output the latest results (tally output) after each batch itall=0,1, with the results overwritten in
specified files in the tally sections. If parallel calculation is used, the results are updated for each batch × ( PE −1).
Using these functions enables termination of PHITS calculation at any time with the latest results checked.
When itall=1, it is also possible to monitor the latest results using the graphical plot automatically constructedby PHITS (See section 5.7.17).
From ver. 2.86, it is possible to change the batch.out file names by setting file(22) in the [parameters]
section. Changing the name of each input file enables multiple executions of PHITS in one directory. Note that it
12 Until ver. 2.85, the name of this file was batch.now.

2.9 Array sizes

21

is not possible to use this function if [t-dchain] is set in the input files because the same file name, “n.flux”, isused.
The value of rijk written in the batch.out file is the initial random number of the current batch. Thus, forexample, in cases of unsuccessful termination of PHITS it is possible to reproduce the calculation of the specified
batch using the value of rijk.

2.9 Array sizes
You should check and modify the array sizes described in the param.inc file. The “mdas” is the most importantvariable. It specifies the total size of arrays for geometry, tally output, nuclear data, and bank. You can find out thecurrent use in a input echo (corresponds “ output.dat” in previous example).
The bank size can be set in the parameter section. If the bank becomes full, odd arrays in mdas are used. The
default param.inc is shown below.
File 1: param.inc
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31
32:
33:

***************************************************************************’param.inc’***************************************************************************
parameter ( mdas
= 80000000 )parameter ( kvlmax =3000 )
parameter ( kvmmax = 1000000 )parameter ( itlmax =200 )parameter ( inevt =70 )parameter ( isrc=
200 )parameter ( latmax = 20000000 )parameter ( nbchmax=
10000 )
common /mdasa/ das( mdas )common /mdasb/ mmmax*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
*
*
*
mdas
: total memory * 8 = byte**
mmmax : maximum number of total array****kvlmax : maximum number of regions, cell and material**
kvmmax : maximum number of id for regions, cel and material****
itlmax : number of maximum tally entry**
inevt : number of collision type for summary**
isrc: number of multi-source**
latmax : maximum number of lattice in a cell + 1**
nbchmax: maximum number of batch assigned to parallel MPI node ****----------------------------------------------------------------------*

3 INPUT FILE

22

3

Input FilePHITS input consists of a number of sections that are listed in Tables 3.1 and 3.2. Each section begins froma [Section Name], and a maximum of four blanks can be placed between the line head and the declaration of[Section Name]; a configuration with (more than four blanks) [Section Name] will not be recognized as the
beginning of a section and the following code will be regarded as belonging to the previous section.

3.1 Sections
Table 3.1 and 3.2 shows the various sections used in PHITS.
Table 3.1: Sections (1)name[title][parameters][source][material][surface][cell][transform][temperature][mat time change][magnetic field][electro magnetic field][delta ray][track structure][super mirror][elastic option][data max]
[frag data][importance][weight window][ww bias][forced collisions][volume][multiplier][mat name color][reg name][counter][timer]description
Title
Various type of parameters
Source definition
Material definition
Surface definition
Cell definition
Definition of the coordinate transform
Cell temperature definition
Definition of time dependent material
Magnetic field definition
Electro-magnetic field definition
Definition of δ-ray production
Definition to use track-structure simulation mode.
Super mirror definition
Elastic option definition
Definition of maximum energy of dmax for each nucleus.
Definition of user defined cross sections
Region importance definition
Weight window definition
Definition of values to bias weight window parameters.
Forced collision definition
Region volume definition
Multiplier definition
Material name and color definition for graphical plot
Region name definition for graphical plot
Counter definition
Timer definition

3.2 Reading control

23

Table 3.2: Sections (2)name[t-track][t-cross][t-point][t-heat][t-deposit][t-deposit2][t-yield][t-product][t-dpa][t-let][t-sed][t-time][t-star][t-dchain][t-wwg][t-wwbg][t-volume][t-userdefined][t-gshow][t-rshow][t-3dshow][end]

description
Particle fluence in a given region.
Particle fluence crossing at a given surface.
Particle fluence at a given point.
Heat generation in a given region.
Deposit energy in a given region.
Deposit energies in two given regions.
Residual nuclei yield in a given region.
Produced particle in a given region.
Displacement Per Atom (DPA) in a given region.
LET distribution in a given region.
Microdosimetric quantity distribution in a given region.
Time information of particle in a given region.
Star density (reaction rate) in a given region.
Residual nuclide yields (in combination with DCHAIN-SP).
Output parameters for [weight window].
Output parameters for [ww bias].
Automatic calculation of region volume.7
Any quantities that user defined.
2D geometry visualization.
2D geometry visualization with physical quantities.
3D geometry visualization.
End of input file.

Note that PHITS does not read any input information written below the [end] section.

3.2 Reading control
Uppercase, lowercase, blank(⊔)
Discrimination between lowercase and uppercase characters is not performed in PHITS input except in filenames. Blanks at the line head and end are not taken into account except for the declaration of the [SectionName] as described before.
Tab
A tab is replaced by eight blanks.
Line connecting
The maximum number of characters that can be written in a line is 200. If “ \ ” is added at line end, thenext line is considered to be a continuation line. Multiple lines can be used to write input data using thismethod, but “ \ ” is not necessary in the [surface] and [cell] sections, in which lines are automaticallyconnected without the use of an additional symbol. Note that more than four blanks are required at the line
head of a connected line.
Line dividing
Short lines can be displayed in a line by dividing “ ; ” as follows:
idbg = 0; ibod = 1; naz = 0
However, this function is not available when the format is defined as in the mesh description.
Comment marks
The following comment marks can be used: #, %, !, $. A comment out is eﬀective from the comment
mark to the line end. Note that in the [surface] and [cell] sections, only $ is available as a comment
mark. If a “c” followed by a blank (⊔) is placed in the first five columns, it is considered to be a comment

3 INPUT FILE

24

line. Thus, if the natural isotope of carbon in the [material] section is defined as “C”, the definition line
may be treated as a comment line and be skipped13 ; in this case, carbon should be defined by 6000.
Blank lines
Blank lines and lines beginning from a comment mark are skipped.
Section reading skip
Adding “ off” after a section name, e.g., [Section Name] off, causes the section to be skipped (i.e., it
is not read). Note that infl: or set: written after this skip is also skipped.
Skipping within sections
It is possible to skip from any place in a section by putting qp: at the line head. Lines from qp: to the endof the section are skipped.
Skip allq: can be used as a terminator of an input file; this works the same way as using [end].

3.3 Inserting files
You can include other files in any place byinfl:{ f ile.name } [ n1 − n2 ]You should specify a name of a file to be inserted in { }, and the number of lines from n1 to n2 of that file in [ ].
If there is no [ ], PHITS includes all lines of the specified file. You can use the following expressions to specify
line numbers,[ n1 − ],[ −n2 ].
These expressions mean the specification of the range from the n1 th line to the end and from the initial line to then2 th line, respectively. The file insertion can be nested more than once. After reading the end of the including file,
the reading process returns to its parent file.
When you use the command-line interpreter (Command prompt) on the Windows system for executing PHITS,
you have to be careful. If infl is used, you should write the following text in the first line of the input file.
file = input.dat

Here, input.dat is the input file name. See section 2.7.

3.4 User-defined variables
User-defined variables can be set as follows:set:

c1[ 52.3 ] c2[ 2 * pi ] c3[ c1 * 1.e-8 ]The set: definition can be written anywhere. Note that a blank space cannot be set between set: and [ in theformat set:[i]. Defined user-variables can be used as numerical values in input file, and the variables can be
re-defined at any time, with the values retained until they are re-defined. In the third case of the above example(c3), another user-variable c1 is called in the definition; in this case, the value held by the variable c1 at that time is
13 From version 2.89, in the default setting, c cannot be used as comment marks in [material] section. When you use c as comment
marks in the section, set icommat=1 in [parameters] section. Note that the [parameters] section with icommat=1 should be written above(before) the [material] section including c.

3.5 Using mathematical expressions

25

used. Therefore, even if c1 is re-defined following the definition of c3, the value of c3 is not changed. By default,
pi is set to the value of π.
The set definition is ignored in sumtally subsection.

3.5 Using mathematical expressions
Mathematical expressions can be used in your input file. It is Fortran style. Available functions are shown in
Table 3.3.
Table 3.3: Intrinsic Function.

FLOAT
MOD
COS

INT
NINT
COSH

ABS
SIGN
SIN

Intrinsic
EXP
SQRT
SINH

Function
LOG
ACOS
TAN

LOG10
ASIN
TANH

MAX
ATAN

MIN
ATAN2

For example,
param = c1 * 3.5 * sin( 55 * pi / 180 )As above example as a single numerical value is expected after param =, you can put blanks in the expressions.
However it is not allowed that multiple numerical values are aligned in some sections. In such region, you canclose the expressions using { }, like { c1 * 2 / pi }.

3 INPUT FILE

26

3.6 Particle identification
Available particles in PHITS are identified as in Table 3.4. These particles can be specified by the symbol or
the kf-code. The particles which is not specified the symbol in Table 3.4, are specified by only kf-code.
The other particles identified as type 11 can be defined by the kf-code as shown in followings, and these
decay-channels and life-times are also shown in below.
By adopting the QMD code, nucleus can be treated in PHITS. The writing form of nuclide is as 208Pb, 56Fe.
The writing style Pb, Fe, etc., means all isotopes (This cannot be used as projectile). Nucleus can be described by
kf=Z * 1000000 + A for the kf-code.
In the previous version of PHITS, the photon was called “gamma” but it is called “photon” in the newer
version.

Table 3.4: List of the transport particles.
ityp
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

symbolprotonneutron
pion+
pion0
pion−
muon+
muon−
kaon+
kaon0
kaon−
other
electronpositronphotondeuterontriton3he
alphanucleusallkf-code
2212
2112
211
111
−211
−13
13
321
311
−321
below
11
−11
22
1000002
100000320000032000004
Z*1000000+A−

particle nameprotonneutron
π+
π0
π−
µ+
µ−
K+
K0
K−
other particlee−e+γ
deuterontriton3Heαnucleusall particles

ityp
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11

symbol
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−

kf-code+ − 12+ − 14
−2212
−2112
−311
+ − 221331+ − 3122+ − 3222+ − 3212+ − 3112+ − 3322+ − 3312+ − 3334

particle name
νe νe
νµ νµ
p
n
K0
ηη
η′
0 0
Λ Λ
Σ+ Σ+
Σ0 Σ0
Σ− Σ−
Ξ0 Ξ0
Ξ− Ξ−
Ω− Ω−

3.6 Particle identification

27

Table 3.5: Decay channel and life time

n
π0
π+
π−
µ+
µ−
K0
K+
K−
η

η′

Λ0
Σ+
Σ0
Σ−
Ξ0
Ξ−
Ω−

→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→
→

p
γ
µ+
µ−
e+
e−
π+
π0
γ
µ+
π+
µ−
π+
γ
π0
π+
π+
π+
π0
π+
γ
p
n
p
n
Λ0
n
Λ0
Λ0
Λ0
Ξ0
Ξ−

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

e−
γ
νµ
νµ
νe
νe
π−
π0
γ
νµ
π−
νµ
π−
γ
π0
π−
π−
π−
π0
π−
γ
π−
π0
π0
π+
γ
π−
π0
π−
K−
π−
π0

+

νe

+
+

νµ
νµ

+
+
+
+
+
+

π0
π0
γ
η
η
γ

blanking fraction
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
68.61%
31.39%
other63.51%
other63.51%
other
38.9%
31.9%
23.7%
other
44.1%
20.5%
30.1%
other
64.1%
other
51.57%
other
100%
100%
100%
100%
67.8%
23.6%
other

life time (sec)
8.867e+202.6029e−82.6029e−82.19703e−6
2.19703e−6
8.922e−11

1.2371e−8
1.2371e−8002.631e−10
7.99e−1101.479e−10
2.90e−10
1.639e−10
8.22e−11

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

28

4

Sections format

4.1 [ Title ] section
In the section, you can define a title of your calculation. Any numbers of title lines are allowed. Blank lines
are skipped in this section.

[ T i t l e ]This is a test calculation of PHITS.
Any number of title lines are allowed.
..........

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

29

4.2 [ Parameters ] section
The various parameters of PHITS can be defined in [Parameters] using the following format:[ P a r a m e t e r s ]para1 = number | file.namepara2 = number | file.name..........

The order of parameters can be changed. As each parameter has a default value, undefined parameters use thedefault values.
Parameters and default values will be shown in the tables shown below. (D= ) indicates the default value.

4.2.1 Calculation mode
Table 4.1: Parameters (1)Parameter
icntl

Value
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 3
= 5
= 6
= 7
= 8
= 9
= 10
= 11
= 12
= 13
= 14
= 15

Explanation
Basic control option.
Normal PHITS calculation.
Nuclear reaction calculation, (under development).
Output only input echo for checking memory usage, and library, and file links.
No reaction, no ionization. All regions are set to void for geometry check, and volume
and area calculations.
Source check. Source positions can be tallied by [t-product].
Execute [t-gshow] for graphical output.
Geometry output of xyz mesh tally with gshow option for graphical output.
Execute [t-rshow] for graphical output.
Geometry output of reg mesh tally with rshow option for graphical output.
Execute [t-3dshow] for graphical output.
Re-calculate using dumpall file. Dumpall file is specified by file(15).
Use of function to sum up tally results (Sumtally function).
Use of automatic calculation of region volume.
Execute [t-wwbg] to obtain [ww bias] parameters.

The nuclear reaction calculation function specified as icntl=1 is still under development.
By setting icntl=12, PHITS re-calculates the whole transport by reading the information from the dumpall
file, which is created by the dumpall=1 option. This re-calculation can be used to describe previously calculated
whole transport events; to perform re-calculation, the input file from the previous calculation must be used; maxcas
and maxbch cannot be changed, but are read from the file. This functionality is a very powerful tool for calculatingtallies that were not used in a previous calculation. However, it should be noted that calculation with dumpall=1
may create a huge dumpall file.
By setting icntl=13, two (or more) tally results can be summed: see Sec. 5.8 for further detail.
By setting icntl=14 with [t-volume], automatic calculations to obtain volumes of specified cells can be
performed. See Sec. 7 in detail.
By setting icntl=15 with [t-wwbg], automatic calculations to obtain parameters of [ww bias]. See Sec.
6.16 in detail.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

30

4.2.2 Number of history and Bank

Table 4.2: Parameters (2)Parameter
irskipValue(D=0)
irskip>0
irskip<0

rseed(D=0.0)rseed<0rseed=0
rseed>0(D=10)(D=10)(D=10000)(D=-1.0)(D=0)=-2

maxcasmaxbchmaxbnktimeout
istdev

=-1
=0
=1
=2

ireschk

(D=0)
=0
=1

Explanation
Random number control.
Begin calculation after skipping histories by number of irskip (for debug).
Begin calculation after skipping random numbers by number of irskip (for manual parallel computing).
Initial random number option.
Get an initial random number from starting time.
6647299061401 (default).
Use rseed as initial seed of random number.
Number of history per 1 batch. The upper limit is 2147483647.
Number of batch. The upper limit is 2147483647.
Size of bank array.
CPU time to cut-oﬀ PHITS calculation [s].
Control parameter for calculation of statistical uncertainties and restart mode.
Restart calculation mode is activated, but if there is no past tally result a new calculation is started with istdev=2.
Restart calculation mode is activated, but if there is no past tally result a new calculation is started with istdev=1.
istdev is automatically set to 1 for shared-memory parallel computing, and 2 forthe other cases.
A new calculation is begun. Statistical uncertainties are estimated from the variances of each batch result.
A new calculation is begun. Statistical uncertainties are estimated from the variances of each history result. This option cannot be selected in shared-memory
parallel mode.
Control parameter for tally consistency check.
Check consistency between new and old tally settings.
No check. This option is useful when setting a very complex tally whose settings
are not fully written in the tally output file.

In the distributed-memory parallel calculation, the number of batches should be an integer multiple of NPE − 1,
where NPE is the total number of Processing Element (PE); otherwise, PHITS will automatically convert maxbch
as it becomes to an integer multiple and adjust maxcas as the total number of histories becomes almost same withgiven total histories. In this case, some comments will be output at the end of an input echo.
A time limit of a PHITS calculation can be set by timeout. This function is available when timeout ispositive. When a CPU time exceeds timeout at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes its calculation. In the casethat a CPU time exceeds timeout in the middle of one batch, PHITS continues the calculation until the end of thebatch. In the distributed-memory parallel computing, PHITS compares timeout with the sum of all CPU time.
Note that PHITS cannot get a correct CPU time depending on computers. In this case, you cannot use the functionof timeout.
The procedure for calculating statistical uncertainties was revised from version 2.50: a function to restart
PHITS calculation based on the tally results obtained by past PHITS simulations has been implemented to increase
the total history number and then decrease the statistical uncertainties of the results. In this mode, the initial random
seed is also read from the past tally file.
To calculate statistical uncertainties, two modes can be selected - “batch variance mode” and “history variancemode” - which calculate standard deviation using the variances between tally results of each batch and history,

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

31

respectively. In both modes, standard deviation σ is calculated as
v
u
u
u
N
u
∑
u
u
t
(x w /w̄)2 − N X̄ 2
i

σ=

i

i=1

N(N − 1)

(1)where N is the total batch number (istdev=1) or the total history number (istdev=2), xi and wi are tally results
and the source weight of each sample, respectively, and X̄ and w̄ are the mean values of the tally results andsource weights of N samples, respectively. The ratio of σ to X̄ is written as relative error in the tally output file.
In shared-memory parallel computing mode, only the batch variance mode can be selected as it is impossible tocalculate tallied quantities history-by-history using shared-memory parallel computing. The standard deviations
calculated by the batch variance mode vary by combination of maxcas and maxbch, even for the same total history
number. In principle, a larger maxbch provides more reliable statistical uncertainties in batch variance mode but
may require a longer computational time. We recommend setting maxbch to more than 10 to obtain reliable
results. By contrast, in history variance mode, the standard deviation depends only on the total history number andis independent of the combination of maxcas and maxbch. Thus, it is recommended that history variance mode(istdev=2) be selected when memory-shared parallel computing is not in use. Note, however, that computationaltime occasionally becomes extremely long in history variance mode, especially in cases in which there are tallies
using many memories, e.g., xyz mesh tally with its very fine structure. In tallies for calculating the variance of
deposition energies by individual history, such as [t-deposit] with output=deposit and [t-deposit2], thestandard errors insteadof the standard deviations are output as relative errors. The relative standard errors can be√
estimated as 1/ K where K is the number of histories contributing to the tally result. This calculation procedure
is independent of the istdev parameter.
Relative errors are generally output in the “r.err” column, which is the rightmost column of tally results.
In the case of 2D-plots, such as tallies with axis=xy or rz, errors are output into another file, “* err”where“*” indicates the file name specified in the tally. For example, when file=tally.out, the name of the error fileis “tally err.out”. This error file has the same format of the conventional tally output file; hence, a graph for theerror in the 2D-plot can be obtained by ANGEL through a conversion process.
Note that the true value is not always within the error range because PHITS calculates the standard deviationor the standard error. The range means the 68% confidence interval. Furthermore, PHITS does not estimate
systematic uncertainties arising form the nuclear reaction model.
When istdev<0, the restart calculation mode is activated; however, if there is no past tally result, a new
calculation is started with istdev=|istdev|; in other words, the batch and history variance modes are selected
for istdev=-1 and -2, respectively. When restarting a calculation, the variance mode is automatically determinedfrom the past PHITS calculation. Although the same tally parameters written in the past tally results must be
written, new tallies can be added in the restart calculation. The procedure for restart calculation is as follows:(1) Check whether or not the file specified by resfile in each tally section exists. The default file name of the“resfile” is that given by file parameter.
(2) If there is no “resfile” for a tally, it is regarded to be new. If no “resfile” can be found for any tally, a new
calculation is begun with istdev=|istdev|.
(3) If “resfile” exists, PHITS reads information from the file on the variance mode istdev, total weight resc2,
total history number resc3, history number per batch maxcas, the next random seed rijklst, and theresults and relative errors of the past calculation.
(4) The tally parameters given in the current and past PHITS input files are then checked for consistency. If they
are not consistent each, PHITS stops the calculation and outputs an error message. It should be noted that
not all tally parameters are checked for consistency in this process.
(5) (In batch variance mode only) The consistency of istdev and maxcas among the “resfiles” is checked. Ifthey are consistent, the restart calculation is performed using these values. If an inconsistency is found, thecalculation is stopped.
(6) The initial random seed is changed to the value of rijklst obtained from the first “resfiles”. If rijklst
diﬀers by “resfile”, a warning message is output.
(7) Upon finishing the restart calculation, the tally results are output to the file specified by file=. If resfile
is not specified, the past tally results are overwritten.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

32

Important notice:
I. All past tally results should be calculated in the same variance mode: i.e., istdev should be the same in all“resfile”.
II. The maxcas written in the input file is not used in the restart calculation in batch variance mode.
III. Except for those given in the tally sections, the consistencies of input parameters are not checked. Hence,these must be set as identical by the operator in the restart calculation.

4.2.3 Cut-oﬀ energy and switching energy
Table 4.3: Parameters (3)Parameteremin(1)emin(2)emin(i)Value(D=1.0)(D=1.0)(D=1.0)emin(11)emin(i)(D=2.0)(D=1.e+9)emin(i)(D=1.0)

esmin
esmax
cmin(i)(D=0.001)(D=300000)(D=emin(i))

dmax(i)
etsminetsmaxi= 15 - 19
(D=emin(i))(D=1e-6)(D=1e-2)

Explanation
Proton cut-oﬀ energy [MeV].
Neutron cut-oﬀ energy [MeV].
(i = 3 - 10) Cut-oﬀ energy for pions, muons, and kaons [MeV]. (i; particle
id, see Table 3.4)
Cut-oﬀ energy for others (MeV).
(i= 12 - 14) Cut-oﬀ energy for electrons, positrons, and photons [MeV]. (i;particle id, see Table 3.4)(i= 15 - 19) Cut-oﬀ energy for deuterons, tritons, 3 He, 4 He, and nuclei[MeV/u]. emin for nuclei is defined in units of MeV per nucleon. (i; particle id, see Table 3.4)
Minimum energy for range calculation for the charged particles [MeV/u].
Maximum energy for range calculation for the charged particles [MeV/u].
Nuclear reaction cut-oﬀ energy for i-th particle [MeV]. Any nuclear reactions
under cmin(i) are not treated.
For these nuclei, energy unit is [MeV/u].
Maximum energy of library use for i-th particle [MeV].
Minimum energy of particles simulated by track structure mode [MeV].
Maximum energy of particles simulated by track structure mode [MeV].

Values given by these parameters are included in lower limits but not in upper limits. For example, a proton
right at the emin(1) energy is not cut-oﬀ.
PHITS uses libraries in the energy region emin < energy < dmax. If emin>dmax is set, no libraries are used.
The maximum energies for neutrons and photons are 20 MeV and 100 GeV, respectively. When EGS5 is not used,
the maximum energies for electrons and positrons are 10 GeV.
The range table of charged particles is set within esmin < energy < esmax. To use a significantly higher
energy, the user should set esmax.
The minimum cut-oﬀ energy for charged particles, emin, cannot be set lower than esmin. In such cases, emin
is automatically adjusted to esmin.
etsmin>1e-9 (1meV) can be set. But the setting below 1e-6 (1eV) is not recommend because computationaltime becomes extremely long.
etsmax>1e-3 (1keV) must be set. The setting this parameter below 0.1 (100keV) is recommend, otherwise
the computational time becomes extremely long.
For the track structure mode, emin(12) and emin(13) should be set to 1.0e-3, and EGS5 should be activated(negs=1).

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

33

Table 4.4: Parameters (4)Parameter
ejamnuValue(D=20.)

ejampi(D=20.)

eisobar(D=0.0)eqmdnu(D=20.)

eqmdminejamqmd
inclg(D=10.0)(D=3000.0)
(D=1)
=0
=1
=2
(D=1.0)(D=3000.0)
(D=0)
=0
=1
(D=1.0)(D=3500.0)
(D=0)
=0
=1
(D=0)
=0
=1

einclmineinclmaxincelfeielfmineielfmax
irqmd

Kerma

Explanation
Switching energy of nucleon-nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini (or QMD)
to JAM model [MeV].
Switching energy of pion-nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini to JAM model[MeV].
Maximum energy [MeV] of isobar calculation when isobar is defined(isobar=1).
Switching energy of nucleon-nucleus reaction calculation from Bertini to QMD
model [MeV/u].
Minimum energy of QMD calculation [MeV/u].
Switching energy from JQMD to JAMQMD [MeV/u].
Control parameter for use of INCL.
INCL is not used.
Use of INCL in a proton, neutron, pion, d, t,3 He, or 4 He induced reaction.
Use of INCL in a proton, neutron, or pion induced reaction.
Minimum energy of INCL calculation [MeV/u].
Maximum energy of INCL calculation [MeV/u].
Control parameter for use of INC-ELF.
INC-ELF is not used.
Use of INC-ELF in a proton or neutron induced reaction.
Minimum energy of INC-ELF calculation [MeV].
Maximum energy of INC-ELF calculation [MeV].
Control parameter for use of JQMD or JQMD-2.0.
Use of JQMD in nuclear reactions.
Use of JQMD-2.0 in nuclear reactions.
Option for Kerma mode.
This option is not used.
When neutron or proton nuclear data library of is used, PHITS produces nocharged particles except for protons.

Below eqmdmin, the nuclear reactions of d, t,3 He, 4 He, and nuclei are not treated by QMD. As the applicabilityof QMD is restricted in the low energy region and the range of nuclei is very low in the normal material, it is
not necessary to consider the low energy reactions of nuclei for the usual case. As a default, high energy heavy
ion collisions are treated by JAMQMD above 3.0 GeV/u. This switching energy can be changed by changing e
jamqmd. It is possible to calculate even nucleon-induced collisions in JAMQMD by changing eqmdnu, ejamnu,
and ejamqmd.
INCL (Intra-Nuclear Cascade of Liège) is a nuclear reaction model for nucleon (proton and neutron), pion, andlight-ion (d, t,3 He, or 4 He) induced reactions. From version 2.50, INCL is used by default for these reactions if
the nuclear reaction model is not explicitly specified. Before using INCL results in a publication, please refer to a
document 14 in the footnotes.
Intra-Nuclear Cascade with Emission of Light Fragment (INC-ELF) is a nuclear reaction model for nucleoninduced reactions. Before using results obtained by INC-ELF in a publication, please refer a document15 in thefootnotes.
JQMD and JQMD-2.0 are nuclear reaction models; in particular, they can be used to describe heavy-ion induced reactions. In PHITS Ver. 2.7 and later, JQMD-2.0 can be used as an alternative to the conventional JQMD.
JQMD-2.016 describes reactions - particularly peripheral collisions - more reasonably than JQMD. Users shouldnote that JQMD-2.0 may take more than twice the CPU time required by JQMD.

14 A. Boudard, J. Cugnon, J.-C. David, S. Leray, and D. Mancusi, Phys. Rev C87, 014606 (2013).
15 Y. Sawada, Y. Uozumi, S. Nogamine, T. Yamada, Y. Iwamoto, T. Sato, and K. Niita, Nucl. Instr. & Meth. B 291, 38-44 (2012).
16 T. Ogawa, T. Sato, S. Hashimoto, D. Satoh, S. Tsuda, and K. Niita, Phys. Rev C92, 024614 (2015).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

34(1MeV)(=emin)(3.0GeV)emin(i)dmax(i)einclmax

NucleonLibrary

INCL (inclg=1)

JAM(1MeV)(3.0GeV)emin(i)einclmax

Pion

JAM

INCL (inclg=1)(10MeV/u)(3.0GeV/u)

eqmdminejamqmd

Nucleus(d, t, 3He, α)Kaon, Hyperon

JQMD
INCL (inclg=1)

JAMQMD
JAM

Figure 4.1: Map of Nuclear Reaction Models.

Table 4.5: Parameters (5)Parameter
negs

Value
(D=-1)
=-1

= 0
= 1

nucdata

(D=1)
= 0
= 1

Explanation
Option for electron, positron, and photon transport.
Transport only photons based on the PHITS original algorithm. By selecting this option, emin(14) and dmax(14) are automatically set to 0.001 and 1000.0, respectively.
If these parameters are directly specified in the input file, the specified parameters overwrite the setting.
Ignore electron, positron, and photon transport.
Transport electrons, positrons, and photons based on the EGS5 algorithm. By setting this option, emin(12,13) and emin(14) are automatically set to 0.1 and 0.001,
respectively, while dmax(12-14) are set to 1000.0. If these parameters are directly
specified in the input file, the specified parameters overwrite the setting. file(1) orfile(20) must be specified in this option.
Option for automatic setting of emin(2) and dmax(2) for the usage of nuclear datalibrary.
No adjustment (nuclear data are not used).
Change the parameters suitable for JENDL-4.0, i.e.
emin(2)=1.0e-10 anddmax(2)=20.0. If these parameters are directly specified in the input file, the specified parameters overwrite the setting. file(1) or file(7) must be specified in thisoption.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

35

4.2.4 Cut-oﬀ time, cut-oﬀ weight, and weight window
Table 4.6: Parameters (6)Parametertmax(i)
wc1(i)
wc2(i)
swtm(i)wupn

Value(D=1.e+9)i = 1-20(D=-0.5)(D=wc1/2)(D=1.0)(D=5)

wsurvnmxspln(0.6*wupn)(D=5)

mwhere(D=0)

iwwbias

(D=0)
= 0
= 1

Explanation
Cut-oﬀ time for i-th particle [nsec].
(i; particle id, see Table 3.4).
Minimum weight for i-th particle.
Cut-oﬀ weight for i-th particle.
Minimum source weight for i-th particle.
Maximum value of weight window is given by the product of wupn × (minimum
value in [Weight Window] section). Here, wupn ≥ 2 should be set.
Survival weight value. Here, 1 < wsurvn < wupn should be set.
Maximum number of split and maximum multiple number of survival. Here,mxspln > 1 should be set.
Where the weight window takes place.
-1: at nuclear reaction, 0: both, 1: at region crossing.
Option for [ww bias].
Values defined in [ww bias] are not used.
Values defined in [ww bias] are used. The [weight window] parameters multiplied by inverse of the defined biases in [ww bias] are used.

The cut-oﬀ time for each particle should be specified as tmax(i) (in units of [nsec]). After arrival at the cut-oﬀ
time, the particle is killed; although this is not eﬀective in the context of high energy particle transport, it is usefulfor low energy particle transport calculation.
A particle’s weight is aﬀected by the importance, forced collisions, implicit captures, and weight windowfunctions. When the weight is lower than the user-defined weight cut oﬀ, a Russian roulette method is applied todetermine whether or not the particle is killed. This function is not available for particles defined in the weightwindow.
Under the Russian roulette method, when the weight wgt is lower than the product, wc2× R, of wc2 and theratio R of the importances at the source and current points (i.e., when wgt < wc2 × R), the particle survives with aprobability wgt /(wc1×R), which is a function of the particle’s own weight, WGT. If the particle survives, its weightis changed to wgt = wc1 × R. If wc1 and wc2 are negative, they are respectively set to |wc1| = swtm(i) and|wc2| = swtm(i).
Any particles or regions for which the user has not set importances are given default importances of 1.
In this case of iwwbias=1, the products of the multiplication are output in the input echo of [weight window],
and [ww bias] with off is output. If an input file without [ww bias] is used, all values of [ww bias] in the
input echo are set to 1.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

36

4.2.5 Model option (1)Table 4.7: Parameters (7)Parameter
ielas

ielms
inmed

nevap

ismm

igamma17

isobaripreeq

level

Value
(D=2)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=100)
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=3)
= 0
= 1
= 2
= 3
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=2)
= 0
= 1
= 2
= 3
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=3)
= 1
= 2
= 3

Explanation
Elastic scattering option.
Exclude elastic scatter.
Include neutron elastic scatter.
Include neutron and proton elastic scatter.
Number of angle group for elastic scattering.
Nucleon-nucleon cross section options for Bertini model.
Free (nmtclb25.dat).
Cugnon old (nmtclb95.dat).
Cugnon new (nmtclb30.dat).
Options for evaporation model.
Without evaporation model.
Using DRES model.
Using SDM model.
Using GEM model.
Control parameter of Statistical Multi-fragmentation Model (SMM).
SMM is not used.
SMM is used. When a JQMD calculation is performed, switching time from JQMD
to GEM changes from 100fm/c, which is the default value, to 75fm/c.
γ decay option for residual nuclei.
Without γ decay.
With γ decay.
With γ decay based on EBITEM model.
With γ decay and isomer production based on EBITEM model.
Options for isobar model.
Without isobar.
With isobar.
Options for pre-equilibrium model when nevap=1.
Without pre-equilibrium model.
With pre-equilibrium model.
Level density option when nevap=1.
8/A.
With Baba’s parameters.
With Ignatyuk’s parameters.

Note that inmed=1 is the default value, which includes in-medium eﬀect for nucleon-nucleon cross sections.
Using the Statistical Multi-fragmentation Model (SMM), PHITS improves the accuracy of calculating the
production cross sections of light and medium-heavy fragments for collisions of heavy ions such as Pb or Hg orfor incident energies over 100 MeV/u. It should be noted that the computational time becomes high when using
this model: see the references 18 19 for details.
Setting igamma=3 enables obtaining of information on isomer production using [t-yield] with axis=chartor dchain: reference 20 in the footnotes for details.

17 Prior to ver. 2.73, file(14)=trxcrd.dat is required for igamma=1-3.
18 T. Ogawa, T. Sato, S. Hashimoto, and K. Niita, Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research A 723 (2013) 36-46.
19 J.P. Bondorf, A.S. Botvina, A.S. Iljinov, I.N. Mishustin, and K. Sneppen, Physics Reports 257 (1995) 133-221.
20 T. Ogawa, S. Hashimoto, T. Sato, and K. Niita, Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research B 325 (2014) 35-42.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section37

4.2.6 Model option (2)Table 4.8: Parameters (8)Parameter
ieleh

Value
(D=0)
= 0
= 1

ipnint

(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2

pnimulimucapimuintimubrmimuppdemuminemumaxnpidk

imagnfielctf(D=1.0)
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=200.0)(D=1.0e+6)
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1

Explanation
Options for electron and positron transport.
No slowing down and no reaction in the energy region above dmax(12).
When the energy, e, is above dmax(12), the weight value, wgt, is changed to
wgt= e/dmax(12), and then the transport calculation is performed with the energy of dmax(12).
Options for photo-nuclear reaction. (Until ver. 2.30, this parameter was ipngdr.)
This reaction mechanism is not taken into account.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account, except for nuclear resonance fluorescence.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account, including nuclear resonance fluorescence.
(See notes below this table for polarization of incident photons.)
Multiplying factor to increase sampling probability of photo-nuclear reaction.
Options for capture reaction of negative-muons. Characteristic X-ray production
from muonic atoms and nuclear absorption is considered.
This reaction mechanism is not taken into account.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account.
Options for muon-induced nuclear reaction based on the virtual photon theory.
This reaction mechanism is not taken into account.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account.
Options for muon-induced bremsstrahlung.
This reaction mechanism is not taken into account.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account.
Options for muon-induced electron-positron pair production.
This reaction mechanism is not taken into account.
This reaction mechanism is taken into account.
Minimum energy of muon-induced nuclear reaction [MeV].
Maximum energy of muon-induced nuclear reaction [MeV].
Treatment of negative-charged decay particles below cut-oﬀ energy.
Sets to absorbed by force.
Sets to decayed.
Options for magnetic field.
Without Magnetic field.
With Magnetic field. Note that, to correctly describe the trajectory as a curve bytally, set itstep=1 and adjust the step length for the field by deltm.
Options for electromagnetic field.
Without electromagnetic field.
With electromagnetic field. Note that, to correctly describe the trajectory as a
curve by tally, set itstep=1 and adjust the step length for the field by deltm.

For the nuclear resonance fluorescence included by ipnint=2, polarization of incident photons can be specified
using sx,sy,sz in [source] when incident photons are polarized. The angular distribution of the scatteredphotons is determined with regard to the polarization.
Cross sections of the muon-induced nuclear reaction depend on emumin; if this is changed, the values of thecross sections also change in the whole energy range.
If a particle with a decay channel assumes a lower energy than cut-oﬀ, the particle decays completely. Negativecharged decay particles with npidk=0, are forced to take reactions for the purposes of forced absorption. If it is
not absorbed, the particle is decayed.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

38

4.2.7 Model option (3)Table 4.9: Parameters (9)Parameter
andit

icxsni

icrhi

icrdm

icxspi

iidfs
idwba

Value
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=2)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1

Explanation∆ angular distribution for Bertini.
50% isotropic, 50% forward.
All isotropic.
All forward.
Option for reaction, elastic, and total cross sections in nucleon-nucleus collisions.
Pearlstein-Niita’s formula.
KUROTAMA model.
Sato’s formula.
Option for total cross section for Nucleus-Nucleus collisions.
Shen formula.
NASA formula.
KUROTAMA model.
Option for total reaction cross section for deuteron-induced reactions.
Same as icrhi.
MWO formula.
Option for total reaction cross section for pion-induced reaction.
Geometrical formula.
Hashimoto’s formula.
Option for neutron-induced fission.
Neutron multiplicity ν and neutron energy spectrum are taken from a literature.
Option for DWBA spectra.
Without discrete DWBA spectra.
With discrete DWBA spectra.

The KUROTAMA model gives nucleon-nucleus and nucleus-nucleus reaction cross sections over a wide incident energy region. See the paper shown in the footnote 21 for details; in published results based the KUROTAMA
model, please reference this document.
The MWO formula reproduces reaction cross sections of deuteron-induced reactions for incident energies
below 1GeV and target nuclei heavier than or equal to carbon. See the paper shown in the footnote 22 for details;
in published results based the MWO model, please reference this document.
From version 2.86, Hashimoto’s formula is used as the default model of pion-induced reaction cross sections.
This is an empirical formula that reproduces cross section experimental data better than the old model specified by
icxspi=0.
If iidfs=1 is specified, the multiplicity ν and energy spectra of neutrons from neutron-induced fission takenfrom reference 23 are used instead of the nuclear library data for the following 18 nuclei:
U-238, Pu-238, Pu-240, Pu-242, Cm-242, Cm-244, Cf-252, Th-232, U-232, U-233, U-234, U-235, U-236, Np237, Pu-239, Pu-241, Am-241, and Bk-249.
Setting idwba=1 adds the discrete spectra calculated by the Distorted Wave Born Approximation (DWBA) tothe neutron and proton spectra obtained using other nuclear reaction models for the following reactions:7

Li(p, n)7 Be reactions at 30–400 MeV
Be(p, n)9 B reactions at 10–50 MeV
6,7
Li(d, n)7,8 Be and 6,7 Li(d, p)7,8 Li reactions at 10–50 MeV
9Be(d, n)10 B and 9 Be(d, p)10 Be reactions at 5–25 MeV
12,13C(d, n)13,14 and 12,13 C(d, p)13,14 C reactions at 10–50 MeV
921 K. Iida, A. Kohama, and K. Oyamatsu, J. Phys. Soc. Japan 76, 044201 (2007), and L. Sihver et al., Nucl. Instr. & Meth. B 334, 34-39(2014).
22 K. Minomo, K. Washiyama, and K. Ogata, J. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 54, 127-130 (2017).
23 J. M. Verbeke, C. Hagmnn, and D. Wright, “Simulation of Neutron and Gamma Ray Emission from Fission and Photofission” UCRLAR-228518 (2014).

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

39

4.2.8 Model option (4)Table 4.10: Parameters (10)Parameterndedx

mdbatima
dbcutoff
ih2o

irlet

Value
(D=3)
= 0
= 1
= 2
= 3
(D=500)(D=0.0)(D=-1)
< 0
> 0
(D=1)
= 0

nspredascat1
ascat2
nedisp

= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
= 10
(D=13.6)(D=0.038)
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 10

Explanation
Option for dE/dx of charged particle and nucleus.
SPAR24 for nucleus, NMTC for the others.
ATIMA25 for nucleus and proton, NMTC for the others.
SPAR for nucleus, proton, pion, and muon, NMTC for the others.
ATIMA for all charged particles.
Maximum database size of ATIMA.
Energy cut-oﬀ of ATIMA database [MeV/u].
Water (only for H2 O) ionization potential option for ATIMA.
Default: 75 eV.
Ionization potential for water [eV].
Option for dE/dx of charged particle and nuclei with the function of δ-ray generation.
Conventional method (subtract the energy of sampled δ-ray from the unrestricted
stopping power).
Restricted LET.
Option for Coulomb diﬀusion (angle straggling)26 .
Without Coulomb diﬀusion.
With Coulomb diﬀusion following the original NMTC model.
With Coulomb diﬀusion following Lynch’s formula based on the Moliere theory27 (recommended).
With Coulomb diﬀusion by ATIMA.
S 2 parameter in Lynch’s formula for nspred=2.
ϵ parameter in Lynch’s formula for nspred=2.
Energy straggling option for charged particle and nuclei.
Without energy straggling.
With Landau Vavilov energy straggling28 (recommended).
With energy straggling for ATIMA.

Note that the default option for ndedx was ndedx=0 until PHITS ver. 2.00 and ndedx=2 between ver. 2.01
and 2.85.
From version 2.85, the algorithm for calculating stopping power of ATIMA in PHITS was improved. In theolder algorithm, calculation of range and stopping power was always performed each time a new charged particle
was produced or a transporting particle entered a new material. The new algorithm creates a database for eachcombination of transporting particle and material when a new particle appears and refers to it the next time. Thus,
the number of calls of the high cost routine ATIMA is reduced. Based on this improvement, PHITS simulation
using a high-precision ATIMA is now possible in the almost the same calculation time as is needed by SPAR.
After ver. 2.97, the setting ndedx=3 can be used for nuclei with the mass number of 93 ≤ Z ≤ 97 (from Np toBk), 29 . In the extention, ionization potential and density correction parameter shown in the reference 30 are used
for the nuclei in calculation of the nuclear stopping power, and SPAR is used in the calculation of the electronic
stopping power.

24 T.M. Armstrong and K.C. Chandler, ORNL Report, ORNL-4869 (1973).
25 About ATIMA, see the web site: https://web-docs.gsi.de/ weick/atima/
26 When describing a scattering process on thin films less than 1cm, delt0 should be set to 1/10 of its thickness.

√

X/X0
pβ [1 + ϵ log10 (e) loge (X/X0 )]: Eq.(4) in G.R. Lynch and O.I. Dahl, Nucl. Instrum. Methods Phys. Res, B 58, 6-10 (1991).
28 About these models, see the web site: http://www.dnp.fmph.uniba.sk/cernlib/asdoc/geantold/H2GEANTPHYS332.html

27 σ = S

2

29 Before ver. 2.96, for nuclei with larger mass number than Z = 92 (U), ATIMA cannot be used. In this case, use SPAR by setting ndedx=2.

30 Table I of R.M.Sternheimer, Atomic data and nuclear data tables, 30, 261-271 (1984).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

40

4.2.9 Model option (5)Table 4.11: Parameters (11)Parameter
gravx
gravy
gravz
usrmgtusrelste-mode31

Value
(D=0)
(D=0)
(D=0)
(D=1)
= 1
= 2
(D=1)
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2

Explanation
x-component of gravity direction.
y-component of gravity direction.
z-component of gravity direction.
Option for user subroutine of time dependent magnetic field.
usrmgt1.f, which includes Wobbler magnet, is used.
usrmgt2.f, which includes Pulse magnet, is used.
Option for [elastic option].
usrelst1.f, for Bragg scattering, is used.
usrelst2.f, a sample program, is used.
Option for event generator mode.
Normal mode.
Event generator mode Ver.1.
Event generator mode Ver.2.

gravx, gravy, gravz represent the directions of gravity; the gravitational force acts on neutrons below 1
eV. For example, for gravx=1, gravy=0, gravz=0, the direction of the gravitational force is negative along thex-axis.
See Sec. 4.2.22 for further discussion of event generator mode.

4.2.10 Output options (1)Table 4.12: Parameters (12)Parameter
infout

Value
(D=7)

nrecover

= 0
= 1
= 2
= 3
= 4
= 5
= 6
= 7
= 8
(D=0)

Explanation
Option to specify output information in file(6). See notes below this table for thefollowing numbers.
I
I, II
I, III
I, IV
I, II, III
I, II, IV
I, III, IV
I, II, III, IV, VI
I, II, III, IV, V, VI
Number of output of warning messages when the recovery of lost particles succeeds.

The infout parameter controls output information in the summary file (file(6)). Using infout, the output
information can be selected by the user. infout information is divided into the following six categories:
I Basic information – LOGO(except for information on PHITS developers), calculation process, source, geometry error, random seed, and CPU summary.
II Input echo.
III Information on memory usage and batch.
31 Until ver. 2.73, file(14)=trxcrd.dat is required for e-mode=1,2.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

41

IV Information on transport particles.
V Detailed information – variance reduction, number of scattered particles for each region, information foreach material.
VI Information on PHITS developers.
The information is output in the following order:(1) LOGO (Category I – note that the only developer information is in category VI). Version of PHITS, developers, job title, and starting time.
(2) Input echo (Category II). Echo of input file.
(3) Information on used memory (Category III).
Amount of memory used for geometry, material, tally, bank, etc.
(4) Information on batch (Category III)
Number of histories by batch and CPU time.
(5) Information on calculation process (ncol) (Category I).
Number of geometry boundary crossings, reactions, termination by energy cut-oﬀ, etc.
(6) Information on variance reduction (Category V).
Particle weights changed by importance, weight window, and forced collision options.
(7) Number of scattered particles for each region (Category V).
(8) Number of scattered particles for each material (Category V).
(9) Number of transport, produced, stop, and leakage particles (Category IV).
(10) Number of source particles and their weights (Category I).
(11) Geometry error (Category I).
Number of lost particles and their types.
(12) Random seed (Category I).
Initial random seed and next initial random seed.
(13) CPU summary (Category I).
Total computation time and number of calls for each calculation process. The meanings of the items are as
follows (when icput=0, information on the computation time, except for “total cpu time”, is not output;
neither are “transport” or “set data” items):• total cpu time: total computation time.
• transport: time for particle transport.
• set data: time for setting input parameters.
• analysis: number of data processing events.
• nevap: number of evaporations.
• dexgam: number of de-excitations.
• nreac: number of atomic and nuclear reactions.
• dklos: number of particle decays.
• hydro: number of nucleon-nucleon scatterings.
• n-data: number of runs using neutron data library.
• h-data: number of runs using proton data library.
• p-data: number of runs using photon data library.
• e-data: number of runs using electron data library.
• p-egs5: number of photon interactions with EGS5.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

42• e-egs5: number of electron interactions with EGS5.
• photonucl: number of photo-nuclear reactions.
• muon: number of muon-induced nuclear reactions.
• elast: number of elastic scatterings.
• ncasc: number of runs using nuclear reaction model.
• bertini: number of runs using Bertini model.
• isobar: number of runs using isobar model.
• JAM: number of runs using JAM model.
• QMD: number of runs using JQMD or JQMD-2.0 models.
• JAMQMD: number of runs using JAMQMD model.
• INCL: number of runs using INCL model.
• INCELF: number of runs using INC-ELF model.
When infout=8, information on the calculations by each nuclear reaction model is output in detail.
• count: number of runs using the model with each incident particle.
• real: number of successes for model calculation.
• %: probability of model calculation.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

43

4.2.11 Output options (2)Table 4.13: Parameters (13)Parameter
incut

igcut

ipcut

inparaigparaipparaiMeVperu

Value
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
= 3
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 3
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 3
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 3
/wk/uname/
(D=0)
=0
=1

Explanation
Neutron output options below cut-oﬀ.
No output.
Output in the ncut file specified as file(12).
Output in file(12) with time information.
γ-ray and electron output options below cut-oﬀ.
No output.
Output γ-ray data in the gcut file specified as file(13).
Output γ-ray in file(13) with time information.
Output γ-ray, electron, and positron data in file(13).
Proton output options below cut-oﬀ.
No output.
Output in the pcut file specified as file(10).
Output in file(10) with time information.
ncut file name options in the parallel calculation.
/wk/uname/file-name of file(12).
/wk/uname/file-name of file(12)+(PE number).
File-name of file(12)+(PE number).
gcut file name options in the parallel calculation.
/wk/uname/file-name of file(13).
/wk/uname/file-name of file(13)+(PE number).
File-name of file(13)+(PE number).
pcut file name options.
/wk/uname/file-name of file(10).
/wk/uname/file-name of file(10)+(PE number).
File-name of file(10)+(PE number).
/wk/ is the default directory name.
uname is a user-name read in from the environment variable LOGNAME.
Option for unit of energy in output of tally.
Output as unit of MeV.
Output as MeV/u (MeV per nucleons). Note that the unit means MeV for particles
other than nuclei.

Note that the defaults of incut and igcut have been changed 0.
In parallel computing, files corresponding to each PE (Processor Element) are created for writing the output. If
inpara, igpara, or ippara are set = 0 or 1, a file is made in the directory named by /wk/uname/ on each of thenodes. If inpara, igpara, or ippara are set = 1 or 3, each PE number is put at the end of the filename. EachPE writes down its result on only the corresponding file.
When iMeVperu=1, the unit of nucleus energy is changed from [MeV] to [MeV/u] in outputs of [t-track],[t-cross], [t-point], [t-product], [t-time], [t-star]. For example, in the case of [t-track] with
unit=2, quantities in units of [1/cm2 /MeV/source] are converted to those in [1/cm2 /(MeV/u)/source].

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

44

4.2.12 Output option (3)Table 4.14: Parameters (14)Parameter
itall

itstep

imout

jmout

kmout

mataddnatural

Value
(D=0)
= -1
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
= 2

Explanation
Options for tally output after every batch.
No output.
Output only numerical data files.
Output both numerical data and image (*.eps) files32 .
Option for timing of tally for changing momentum, such as magnetic field.
Tally at reaction or surface cross (normal).
Tally at each step of the transport.
Option for specifying the output format of [material] section.
e.g., mat[12], 208Pb.33c.
e.g., mat[12], Pb-208.33c.
e.g., m12, 82208.33c (MCNP type).
Option for specifying the output format of material density in [material].
No conversion.
Conversion into particle density.
Conversion into mass ratio (%).
Option of nuclear data information.
No display.
Writing in input echo.33
Treatment of varying densities in a given material.
Use of same material number.
Use of new material number.
Option for distribution according to natural isotope ratio, when elements without mass
number are defined in [material].
Not distributed.
Distributed. Distributed isotopes are not output in file(6).
Distributed. Distributed isotopes are output in file(6).

Normally, the tallies are called at the reaction point or the surface crossing; thus, the particle track in, forexample, the magnetic field is shown as a straight line between collisions or between one collision and a surface
crossing. To describe the trajectory correctly as a curve, set itstep=1 and adjust the step length for the field bydeltm.
When defining two (or more) cells of diﬀering densities with the same material number, all cells except for the
first are given other material numbers by matadd=1 (the default setting). If matadd=0 is set, the cells have thesame material number. Note that this setting is invalid in the [mat name Color], in which other given material
numbers, which are output as a warning message in the first part of file(6) (D=phits.out), are output.

32 Note that vtk files are output with both itall=0,1.
33 From Ver. 2.86, the dmax of each nucleus is also output.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

45

4.2.13 Output option (4)Table 4.15: Parameters (15)Parameter
iggcm

ivout
ipout

icput

ipara

nwsorsdumpall

idpara

Value
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
(D=1)
(D=0 for GG)
= 0
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= -1
(D=3)
= 0
= 1
= 3
/wk/uname/

Explanation
Option of GG warnings.
No echo.
In input echo.
Volume display options in the input echo.
In [volume].
Importance display options in the input echo.
In [importance]. (this function is only available when all particles are set tothe same importance value.)
CPU time count options.
Without count.
With count.
Parameter display options.
Only described parameters.
All parameters.
Write down the information on nwsors source particles in file(6).
dumpall option.
No dump.
Write down all information on file(15) as binary data.
Write down all information on file(15) as ASCII data.
dumpall file name option in the parallel calculation.
/wk/uname/file-name of file(15).
/wk/uname/file-name of file(15)+(PE number).
File-name of file(15)+(PE number).
/wk/ is the default directory name.
uname is a user-name read in from the environment variable LOGNAME.

To save calculation time, CPU time counting is not available by default; to obtain the CPU time for eachprocess, set icput=1.
Setting ipara=1 enables confirmation of all parameters in the PHITS code.
Setting icntl=12 causes PHITS to recalculate the whole transport by reading the information from the dumpall
file, which is created if the dumpall option is used. The recalculation can describe whole transport events thatwere previously calculated. The same input file as was used in the previous calculation is required; maxcas andmaxbch cannot be changed, but are read from the file. This functionality is very powerful for calculating tallies thatwere not used in a previous calculation; however, calculation with the dumpall option may create a huge dumpall
file. This option is only available for GG geometry.
In parallel computing, files corresponding to each PE (Processor Element) are created for writing and reading
dumped data. If idpara is set = 0 or 1, a file named by /wk/uname/ is made in the directory on each of the nodes.
If idpara is set = 1 or 3, each IP number is placed at the end of the filename. Each PE writes down its result only
on the corresponding file and reads it from the same file during recalculation.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

46

4.2.14 Output option (5)Table 4.16: Parameters (16)Parameter
ivoxelntetsurf

Value
(D=0)
=0
=1
=2
(D=0)
=0
=1
(D=0)
=0
=1
=2
(D=100)ntetelem(D=200)

itetvol

itetraExplanation
Read and write voxel data in binary.
Not using file(18).
Read from voxel data in binary file(18).
Write down voxel data in binary on file(18).
Option to compute volume of tetrahedron geometry for LAT=3.
The volume will not be computed.
The volume will be automatically computed and used in tallies, etc.
Read and write tetrahedron geometry data in binary.
Not using the data file.
Read from tetrahedron geometry data in binary Tetra.bin (fixed name).
Write down tetrahedron geometry data in binary Tetra.bin (fixed name).
Number of outer surfaces of tetrahedron geometry allowed for each sub-space of thecontainer box.
Number of elements of tetrahedron geometry allowed for each sub-space of the container box.

The ivoxel parameter can be used to enable time shortening. When performing PHITS calculation withivoxel=2, voxel data are output in file(18) in binary and the calculation is stopped (until ver. 2.30, calculation
was continued). From the next calculation with ivoxel=1, a data output process is omitted and the calculation
time is shortened.
When the tetrahedron geometry is treated with LAT=3, the volume of the universes appearing in tetrahedrongeometry can be automatically computed using the option itetvol=1. However, the volume is computed bysimply summing up the volumes of individual tetrahedrons, which might produce incorrect values in cases inwhich tetrahedron geometry is clipped out through the use of the universe and fill nest structure. The computed
value is given priority over values specified in the volume section, etc., by setting the option itetvol=1.
When tetrahedron geometry (LAT=3) is used in PHITS calculation, necessary information for transport calculation is generated by reading the tetrahedron geometry file prior to the actual transport calculation. This process will
become computationally heavy as the number of elements in the tetrahedron geometry increases. In this case, theitetra parameter can be used to reduce the computational time. Performing PHITS calculation with itetra=2
causes the processed tetrahedron geometry data to be recorded in a binary file (Tetra.bin) and then stops thecalculation. From the next calculation with itetra=1, the necessary information is read from the Tetra.bin fileand the data generation process is omitted to reduce the calculation time.
For PHITS calculation with tetrahedron geometry (LAT=3), two algorithms sub-dividing the box containing
the tetrahedron geometry are introduced to reduce the computational time of transport calculation by limiting thenumber of elements belonging to each sub-space. One algorithm finds a surface of the tetrahedron geometry whena particle enters the geometry. The container box is sub-divided so that the number of outer surfaces at eachsub-space is less than ntetsurf. The other algorithm finds an element of tetrahedron geometry when a particle
is initiated inside the geometry. The box containing all tetrahedron elements is subdivided so that the number of
elements belonging to each sub-space is less than ntetelem.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

47

4.2.15 About geometrical errors
Table 4.17: Parameters (17)Parameter
nlost
igerr
igchk

Value
(D=10)
(D=0)
(D=0)

deltb

(D=1.e-9)

deltm
deltc

(D=20.12345)(D=2.012345)

delt0(D=0.1)

deltg
deltt
idelt

(D=1.012345)(D=1.0)(D=1)

Explanation
Acceptable value against lost particle (per 1 PE).
Number of recoveries for region error.
=0: no region check.
=1: check region setting flight mesh to deltb after region-crossing.
Flight mesh [cm] after region-crossing with igchk=1. (this is also the distance from the region boundary where the particle is created by importance andforced collision.)
Maximum flight mesh [cm]. Linked with idelt.
Maximum flight mesh [cm] for charged particles with nedisp=1,10. Linked
with idelt.
Minimum flight mesh [cm] with nspred=1,2,10. Note that, when describinga scattering process on thin films less than 1 cm, delt0 should be set to 1/10
of its thickness.
Maximum flight mesh [cm] on magnetic field.
Maximum flight time [msec] on time-dependent magnetic field.
Option for minimum flight mesh:=0: Use values of deltm and deltc as flight mesh maxima.
=1: Maximum flight mesh is deltm and deltc divided by the density in theregion.

From ver. 2.80, idelt=1 is the default setting of PHITS. In this case, the quotients of deltm and deltc
divided by the region’s density are used as the flight mesh maxima. This setting is useful in the time shortening ofparticle transport calculation in air over several hundred meters.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

48

4.2.16 Input-output file name
Table 4.18: Parameters (18)Parameterfile(1)Value(D=c:/phits)

file(4)file(6)(D=marspf.in)(D=phits.out)

file(7)
file(11)file(12)file(13)
file(10)file(15)
file(18)
file(20)
file(21)file(22)
file(23)
file(24)
file(25)(D=c:/phits/data/xsdir.jnd)(D=nuclcal.out)(D=fort.12)(D=fort.13)(D=fort.10)(D=dumpall.dat)(D=voxel.bin)(D=c:/phits/XS/egs/)(D=c:/phits/dchain-sp/data/)(D=batch.out)(D=pegs5)(D=c:/phits/data)(D=c:/phits/XS/tra)Explanation
PHITS installation folder name. When setting this parameter properly, the name of other input files i.e. file(7,20, 21, 24, and 25) does not have to be specified,unless the folder structure of PHITS have not beenchanged. If these parameters are directly specified in the
input file, the specified parameters overwrite the setting.
MARS-PF input file name when icntl=4.
Summary output file name. If not specified, standard output.
Cross section directory file name.
Nuclear reaction output file name.
Cut-oﬀ neutron output file name.
Cut-oﬀ γ-ray output file name.
Cut-oﬀ proton output file name.
dump file name for dumpall=1 option.
File name when using ivoxel=1, 2.
Directory containing the library data for EGS5.
Directory containing the library data for DCHAIN-SP.
Name of file to output information on current batch.
Output file name for PEGS5.
Directory containing RIsource.dat (DECDC database).
Directory containing cross section database used for
track-structure simulation.

file(7) must be written with the full pathname. From ver. 2.74, the file(14) parameter does not have to be
specified in the PHITS input file even when setting igamma≥1.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

49

4.2.17 Others
Table 4.19: Parameters (19)Parameterinucr

idam(i)rdam(i)

icommat

Value
(D=1)
= 1
= 2
= 3
= 4
= 5
= 6
integer
real*8i = 1-100
(D=0)
= 0
= 1

Explanation
Nuclear reaction options.
Double diﬀerential cross section calculation.
Total, elastic, non-elastic cross section output.
Non-elastic cross section calculation.
Angular distribution of elastic scattering.
pp, np, πp cross section output.
pp, np, πp cross section calculation.
User-defined integer variable.
User-defined real variable.
These values can be used in the PHITS code bycommon /userp/ idam(100), rdam(100)Option for comment marks in [material] section.
c cannot be used as comment marks.
c can be used as comment marks.

The nuclear reaction calculation mode corresponding to icntl=1 is currently under development.
From version 2.89, in the default setting, c cannot be used as comment marks in [material] section. Whenyou use c as comment marks in the section, set icommat=1. Note that the [parameters] section with icommat=1
should be written above (before) the [material] section including c.

4.2.18 Physical parameters for low energy neutrons
The following parameters are used for neutrons of less than 20 MeV.
Table 4.20: Parameters (20)
Parameter
emcnf

Value
(D=0.0)

iunr
dnb

(D=0)
(D=-1)
=-1
= 0
> 0
(D=1)
=0
(D=0)
= 0
= 1

nonu
isaba

Explanation
Threshold energy for neutron capture [MeV]: implicit capture is considered above thisenergy; analog capture is considered below this energy.
Fixed 0 at present.
Number of delayed neutron by fission.
Natural sampling.
No delayed neutrons.
Number of neutrons.
Normal fission producing neutrons.
Turn oﬀ fission: fission is treated as simple capture.
Option for S (α, β).
No interpolation.
Perform interpolation of the data of S (α, β).

isaba=1 should be specified when performing a calculation with thin targets in which particle scattering rarely
occurs.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

50

4.2.19 Physical parameters for photon and electron transport based on
the original model
Table 4.21: Parameters (21)Parameter
emcpf
ides

Value
(D=100)
(D=1)
= 0
= 1

nocoh

(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
> 0
(D=1)
= 0
> 0
(D=1)
= 0
> 0
(D=0)
= 0
> 0
(D=1)
= 0
> 0

iphot

ibad

istrg

bnum

xnum

enum

numb

rnok

Explanation
Maximum energy in the detailed photon model [MeV].
Electron creation options by photon.
Create electron or brems.photon.
Do not create electron.
Note that ides automatically becomes 0 when emin(12) or emin(13) is defined in
the input file (after ver. 2.96).
Photon coherent scattering options.
With coherent scattering.
Without coherent scattering.
Photon creation options by electron.
Create photon.
Do not create photon.
Angular distribution option for brems.
Full brems. tabular angular distribution.
Simple brems. angular distribution approximation.
Straggling.
Sampled straggling for electron energy loss.
Expected value straggling for electron energy loss.
Brems. photon.
Do not create brems. photon.
Number of analog brems. photons.
X-ray photon.
Not create X-ray photon.
Number of analog X-ray photons.
Secondary electron.
Do not create secondary electron.
Number of analog secondary electrons.
Brems. process.
Nominal brems. production.
Produce brems. on each substep.
Knock-on electron.
Do not create knock-on electron.
Number of knock-on electrons.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

51

4.2.20 Parameters for EGS5
Table 4.22: Parameters (22)Parameter
ipegs

imsegs

Value
(D=0)

= -1
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=1)
= 0

= 1

iegsout

iegsrand

(D=0)
= 0
= 1
= 2
(D=-1)< 0= 0> 0

Explanation
Option for controlling PEGS5. Too change the input file of PEGS5 (pegs5.inp),
the operator must change this parameter. The parameter is not valid when negs, 1.
Note that, to retain PEGS5-related files after executing PHITS, iegsout automatically
becomes 1 (or greater) when ipegs is set ≤ 1.
Output PEGS5.inp: Yes, Execute PEGS5: Yes, Execute PHITS: No.
Output PEGS5.inp: Yes, Execute PEGS5: Yes, Execute PHITS: Yes.
Output PEGS5.inp: No, Execute PEGS5: Yes, Execute PHITS: Yes.
Output PEGS5.inp: No, Execute PEGS5: No, Execute PHITS: Yes.
Option for treating multiple scatterings in EGS5.
Original EGS5 method. Under this option, the starting scattering strength is used only
when the electron is generated as a source particle. After several steps, the maximum
scattering strength is used.
Original PHITS-EGS5 method. Use starting scattering strength whenever an electron
enters a new material. This option enables simulation of the motion of an electronin thin foil without changing the chard parameter; the computational time becomesslightly longer.
Option for controlling EGS5 output files.
Delete all EGS5 output files when PHITS calculation is finished. Some files remain
when the user self-terminates the PHITS calculation.
Keep egs5.inp, pegs5.dat and pegs5.msfit and delete the others.
Keep all EGS5 output files. See EGS5 manual34 for details on each file.
Option for random number used in EGS5. Setting parameter to 0 or to a positive value
hides the MPI parallelization and the restart-calculation function.
Use random number generated by PHITS.
Use random number generated by EGS5 with the default initial random seed
(314159265).
Use random number generated by EGS5 with the initial random seed = iegsrand.

When using EGS5, the default values of the minimum and maximum energies for electron, positron, andphoton transports are changed to emin(12,13) = 0.1, emin(14) = 0.001, and dmax(12-14)=1,000.0,
respectively. These values can also be changed by explicitly setting the related parameters. Note that the default
values of several EGS5 parameters diﬀer from those employed in the original EGS5 code.
From ver. 2.76, photo-nuclear reactions can be considered in using EGS5. Thus, input files with negs=1 andipnint=1 produce results that diﬀer from those calculated by the previous version of PHITS.

34 H. Hirayama et al., SLAC-R-730 (2005) and KEK Report 2005-8 (2005).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

52

Table 4.23: Parameters (23)Parameter
iedgfliunrst

Value
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)

chard

= 1
= 2
= 3
= 4
= 5
= 6
= 7
(D=0.1)

iaugeriraylrlpolarepstfl

(D=0)
= 0
= 1

Explanation
Option for K and L-edge fluorescent photons.
Do not explicitly treat K and L-edge fluorescent photons.
Explicitly treat K and L-edge fluorescent photons.
Option for K and L-edge Auger electrons.
Do not explicitly treat K and L-edge Auger electrons.
Explicitly treat K and L-edge Auger electrons.
Option for coherent (Rayleigh) scattering.
Do not consider coherent scattering.
Consider coherent scattering.
Option for linearly polarized photon scattering (NOT valid at this moment).
Do not consider linearly polarized photon scattering.
Consider linearly polarized photon scattering.
Option for output-stopping powers by PEGS5. When this parameter is changed,
ipegs must be set to = −1; otherwise incorrect results will be obtained from the
PHITS simulation.
Unrestricted collision only.
Unrestricted collision and radiative.
Unrestricted collision, restricted radiative.
Restricted collision, unrestricted radiative.
Unrestricted radiative only.
Restricted radiative only.
Restricted collision only.
Array of “characteristic dimensions”, or representative size (in cm) of each material.
This parameter controls the electron step-size in each material. The value must be
decreased when simulating electron scattering in thin foil by setting imsegs=0. Whena negative value is set for this parameter, the actual chard values used in EGS5 areadjusted to their absolute values divided by the material density in g/cm3 . This option
is useful for simulating electrons in huge objects (of km order).
Option for using density correction factors contained in EPSTAR.
Do not use EPSTAR for density correction.
Use EPSTAR for density correction. If this option is selected, a text file named
epstar.dat must be created in the same folder containing the PHITS input file. The
data contained in XS/density corrections must be copied and paste pasted in theorder of materials specified in the [material] section. This can be directly changed
for each material by editing pegs5.inp.

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

53

Table 4.24: Parameters (24)
Parameter
incohr

Value
(D=1)
= 0
= 1

iprofr

(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
= 0
= 1
(D=0)
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
(D=1)
= 0
= 1
= 2

impacrieisplneisplibrdstiprdstiphteriboundiaprimExplanation
Option for incoherent scattering function.
Do not use incoherent scattering function for Compton scattering.
Use incoherent scattering function for Compton scattering (ibound automatically becomes 1).
Option for Doppler broadening of Compton scattering energies.
Do not consider Doppler broadening.
Consider Doppler broadening (incohr and ibound automatically become 1).
Option for electron-impact ionization (EII).
Do not consider EII.
Consider EII.
Option for splitting of X-rays generated by electron-impact ionization.
No splitting.
Splitting.
Number of electron-impact ionization X-rays for splitting when ieispl=1.
Option for determining of bremsstrahlung polar angle.
Angle given by m/E.
Sampling.
Option for determining of polar angles of pair electrons.
Angle given by m/k.
Sampling.
Option for determining angular distributions of photoelectrons.
Emission in direction of incident photon.
Sampling.
Option for Compton cross section.
Use free Compton cross section.
Use bound total Compton cross section.
Option for correcting bremsstrahlung cross section.
Use Motz et al. empirical.
Normalize integrated cross section to ICRU-37 radiative stopping power.
No correction.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

54

4.2.21 Dumpall option
By icntl=12, PHITS re-calculates whole transport by reading the information from dumpall file, which is created if you use the dumpall option. The re-calculation can describe whole transport events which were calculated
before. One needs the same input file as used in the previous calculation. maxcas and maxbch cannot be changed,
but are read from the file. It is very powerful when you want to calculate diﬀerent tallies which are not used in
the previous calculation. However, please be careful that the calculation with the dumpall option may create huge
dumpall file. This option is only available for GG geometry.
The dumped data written in binary can be not used on the other computer. The data sequence and meaning are
given in the following.
(1) NCOL
NCOL is an intrinsic variable in the program and denotes identification of process.
NCOL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

start of calculation
end of calculation
end of a batchsourcedetection of geometry error
recovery of geometry error
termination by geometry error
termination by weight cut-oﬀ
termination by time cut-oﬀ
geometry boundary crossing
termination by energy cut-oﬀ
termination by escape or leakage(n,x) reaction(n,n’x) reaction
sequential transport only for tally

When NCOL=1, 2, 3, the output is finished. The followings are for NCOL≥4.
(2) NOCAS, NOBCH, RCASC, RSOUIN
These four data are written only for NCOL=4 and their meaning are,
NOCAS
NOBCH
RCASC
RSOUIN::::current history number in this batchcurrent batch number
real number of NOCAS+maxcas*(NOBCH-1)
sum of the weight of source particle(3) NO, MAT, ITYP, KTYP, JTYP, MTYP, RTYP, OLDWT
These mean
NO
MAT
ITYP
KTYP
JTYP
MTYP
RTYP
OLDWT

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

cascade id in this history
material id
particle typeparticle kf-code
charge number of the particle
baryon number of the particle
rest mass of the particle (MeV)
weight of the particle at (x,y,z)(a) QSThis data is written only for ITYP=12, 13, namely electron and positron. QS is dE/dx for electrons.
QS:

dE/dx of electron at (x,y,z)4.2 [ Parameters ] section

55(4) IBLZ1, IBLZ2, ILEV1, ILEV2
These mean
IBLZ1
IBLZ2
ILEV1
ILEV2

:
:
:
:

cell id at (x,y,z)cell id after crossing
level structure id of the cell at (x,y,z)level structure id of the cell after crossing(a) ILAT1
This is a variable of level structure of cell. The next data are written only for ILEV1>0 as
write(io) ( ( ILAT1(i,j), i=1,5 ), j=1,ILEV1 )(b) ILAT2This is a variable of level structure of cell. The next data are written only for ILEV2>0 as
write(io) ( ( ILAT2(i,j), i=1,5 ), j=1,ILEV2 )(5) COSTH, UANG(1), UANG(2), UANG(3), NSURF
These variables mean as follows. These had come to be output from ver. 2.30.
COSTH
UANG(1,2,3)
NSURF

:
:
:

cosine of an angle of incidence in a surface crossing
x,y,z component of a normal vector of its surface, respectively
internal number of the surface
Note that this is diﬀerent from the surface number defined in the [surface] section(6) NAME, NCNT(1), NCNT(2), NCNT(3)These mean
NAME
NCNT(1,2,3)::

collision number of the particle
values of counter 1, 2, and 3(7) WT, U, V, W
These mean
WTU, V, W::

weight of the particle at (xc,yc,zc)
unit vector of momentum of the particle(8) E, T, X, Y, Z
These meanE
T
X, Y, Z:::

energy of the particle at (x,y,z) (MeV)time of the particle at (x,y,z) (nsec)
position coordinate of the preceding event point (cm)(9) EC, TC, XC, YC, ZC
These meanEC
TC
XC, YC, ZC:::

energy of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (MeV)time of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (nsec)
position coordinate of the particle (cm)(10) SPX, SPY, SPZ
These mean
SPX, SPY, SPZ:

unit vector of spin direction of the particle

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

56(11) NZSTThis is charge state of the particle.

(12) NCLSTSThis variable is written only for NCOL=13, 14, collision case, and means the number of produced particle
and nucleus. The next data are written for NCLSTS>0 case.
(a) MATHZ, MATHN, JCOLL, KCOLL
These mean
MATHZ
MATHN
JCOLL
KCOLL

:
:
:
:

Z number of the mother nucleus
N number of the mother nucleus
reaction type id1
reaction type id2

JCOLL and KCOLL indicate the following meaning.
JCOLL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
KCOLL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

nothing happen
Hydrogen collisions
Particle Decays
Elastic collisions
High Energy Nuclear collisions
Heavy Ion reactions
Neutron reactions by data
Photon reactions by data
Electron reactions by data
Proton reactions by data
Neutron event modedelta ray production
Photon reactions by EGS5
Electron reactions by EGS5
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

normalhigh energy fission
high energy absorption
low energy n elastic
low energy n non-elastic
low energy n fission
low energy n absorption(b) ICLUSTS, JCLUSTS, QCLUSTS, JCOUNT
These variables have a array and denote the information on the produced particle and nucleus.
do i = 1, NCLSTS
write(io) ICLUSTS(i)write(io) ( JCLUSTS(j,i), j=0,7)
write(io) ( QCLUSTS(j,i), j=0,12)
write(io) ( JCOUNT(j,i), j=1,3)
end doThese mean

4.2 [ Parameters ] section

ICLUSTS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

57

kind of particle
nucleus
protonneutronpion
photonkaon
muon
others

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

JCLUSTS(i)
i=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
=5
=6
=7
QCLUSTS(i)
i=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
=5
=6
=7
=8
=9
= 10
= 11
= 12

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

angular momentum
proton number
neutron number
itypstatus of the particle 0: real, <0 : deadcharge number
baryon number
kf code
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

impact parameterpx (GeV/c)py (GeV/c)pz (GeV/c)√etot = p2 + m2 (GeV)
rest mass (GeV)
excitation energy (MeV)
kinetic energy (MeV)
weighttime (nsec)
x coordinate (cm)y coordinate (cm)z coordinate (cm)58

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

4.2.22 Event Generator ModeFor Event Generator mode, 35 36 37 one should define dmax(2) appropriately, since we need the informationfrom the data base as mentioned above. In the special statistical decay model, we use the detail information on
the level structure near the ground state for particle and photon emission. For this, we need igamma=1-3. We
have developed the special statistical decay model based on GEM. Then one should need to specify nevap=3. In
this mode, the eﬀect of thermal motion of materials is not considered. It means that we always assume T=0 in thismode. These parameters are automatically set if you specify e-mode=1 or 2 (unless explicitly specified, igamma=2
is selected). For consistency reason, the combination igamma=1 and e-mode=1 is also supported.
Event generator mode Ver.2 is the improved version of the legacy version (i.e. event generator mode Ver.1).
In reactions emitting multiple neutrons, previous event generator mode samples the first ejectile neutron from thecross-section data and emission of the subsequent particles is simulated by the statistical decay model. While,ver.2 samples all the ejectile neutrons from the cross-section data and the statistical decay model is used merely tosimulate prompt gamma-ray production. As for capture reactions, previous event generator mode assumes that thetarget nucleus absorbs incident neutron and particle emission is simulated by the statistical decay model. In thiscase, ejectile particle species are fully determined by the statistical decay model. While ver.2 selects the ejectile
particle species depending on the reaction channel (i.e. in (n, α) reaction, emission of only one alpha particle andgamma-rays are allowed).
By this mode, we can obtain the following new observables, which cannot be detected without this mode. First,
the deposition energy distribution in [t-heat] tally is available for low energy regime below dmax(2). Second,in [t-yield] and [t-product], we can tally the yield and product quantities below dmax(2). Third, the heatfrom neutrons is usually obtained from Kerma factors in the data base region. In this mode, the heat from neutronsis zero, but the heat is calculated from energy loss of all charged particles and nucleus. Fourth, DPA values isobtained even for the energy below dmax(2) without DPA data base.

35 Y. Iwamoto et al., International Conference on Nuclear Data for Science and Technology 2007, DOI: 10.1051/ndata:07417.
36 K. Niita et al., International Conference on Nuclear Data for Science and Technology 2007, DOI: 10.1051/ndata:07398.
37 Y. Iwamoto et al., Prog. Nucl. Sci. Technol. 2, 931-935 (2011).

4.3 [ Source ] section

59

4.3 [ Source ] section
The source information can be set in this section. The source type is specified by the number s-type = N as
in Table 4.25.
The energy of the source particle can be given by e0 for mono-energy or e-type for energy spectrum 38 .
Table 4.25: Source typesource types-type = 1, (4)s-type = 2, (5)s-type = 3, (6)s-type = 7, (8)s-type = 9, (10)s-type = 11s-type = 12
s-type = 13, (14)s-type = 15, (16)s-type = 17s-type = 18, (19)s-type = 20, (21)s-type = 22, (23)s-type = 100

explanation
Cylinder (or circle, pencil).
Rectangular solid (or rectangle).
Gaussian (x, y, z independent).
Generic parabola (x, y, z independent).
Sphere or spherical shell.
Uniform distribution in a phase space vertical with beam direction.
Reading the data from decay-turtle output.
Gaussian (xyx plane).
Generic parabola (xy plane).
Reading dump file.
Cone.
Triangle prism.
xyz-mesh distribution.
User definition source.
Edit the usrsors.f and compile PHITS.

Numbers in the brackets in Table 4.25 were used until ver. 2.94. If both e0 and e-type are defined fromver. 2.95, the energy is decided according to the previous procedure of s-type. For example, e0 is used whens-type=1, and the definition of e-type is used when s-type=4.

38 Until ver. 2.94, s-type had to be used depending on the definition of the energy, e.g., s-type=1 with e0 defined the cylinder source ofthe mono-energy, or s-type=4 with e-type defined that of the energy spectrum.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

60

4.3.1

<Source> : Multi-source

Using this multi-source function, plural sources specified by s-type can be defined. Each source begins with<source> = number, which defines the relative weights of the multi-sources. totfact = defines the global
normalization. Note that <source> should not be written in the line following the line in which reg parameter iswritten.
Table 4.26: Multi-source
parameter<source> =totfact =iscorr =explanation
Defines a multi-source; the relative weight is defined by this number.
(D=1) Global normalization factor.
If this is given by a positive number, the source particle is generated according to this ratio;
if negative, the same particle is generated in each multi-source section with weights adjusted
according to the ratio.
(D=0) Multi-source correlation option.
0: Normal multi-source.
1: Correlated multi-source. In this case, sources from each multi-source group are generated
as an event. This option is useful for estimating detector response by nuclear reactions producing several secondary particles. Note that the locations of all sources generated in an eventare not the same, unlike the case of iscorr = 2,3.
2: Correlated multi-source. In this case, the locations of all sources generated in an event
are the same. This mode is useful for simulating a nuclear reaction occurring at an arbitrary
location.
3: Correlated multi-source. In this case, the locations of all sources generated in an event are
the same, and the direction of the second source is opposite to that of the first. This mode isuseful for simulating a particle decaying into two particles at an arbitrary location.
The multiplicity of each source must be specified as an integer value representing its<source> parameter, and the sum of the multiplicities must be specified as the totfact
parameter. For example, to simulate (X, 1p2n) reaction as an event, set <source>=1 and 2 forproton and neutron sources, respectively, and totfact=3.

4.3 [ Source ] section

61

4.3.2 Common parameters
Common parameters for each source type are shown below. The order of the parameters in the source section isfree. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), it can be omitted. The energies of d, t, α, and nuclei are specified
by [MeV/nucleon].
Table 4.27: Common source parameters (1)parameter
proj =
sx =
sy =
sz =
reg =

ntmax =
trcl =
wgt =factor =izst =

explanation
Projectile: see Table3.4 for specification.
(D=0) x-component of spin.
(D=0) y-component of spin.
(D=0) z-component of spin.
(D=all) The source region can be restricted within overlaps between regions defined by eachs-type and those specified by this parameter. The format is reg = { 1 - 5 } 10 34. The
lattice and universe frame can be used as reg = ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). See section ontally region specification for more detail.
(D=1000) Maximum re-try number when reg is specified.
(D=none) Transform number, or definition of transform.
(D=1.0) Weight of source particle.
(D=1.0) Normalization factor of source particle. PHITS multiplies all results of tally by factor.
When using multi-source, totfact should be used instead of factor; when not using multisource, totfact * factor is an actual normalization factor.
(D=charge of particle specified with proj=) Charge state of source particle.
This has an eﬀect only on motion in the magnetic and electric fields defined in [magnetic
field] and [electro magnetic field] sections, respectively.
The charge number defined with izst doesn’t change while the particle moves. Note that particles
produced from nuclear reactions are not aﬀected by the value of izst; the charge of the produced
particle is given as its atomic number.

The projectile direction is specified by three parameters: dir,phi, and dom. The relation between these is shown in Fig. 4.2, inzwhich the direction is noted as a thick arrow. dir is the directioncosθ=dir ψ=dom
cosine relative to the z axis. phi is the azimuthal angle from thex axis and is given in degrees; if not set by the user, the value ofthe azimuthal cosine is selected randomly. Using the parameter dom
θspreads the direction determined by dir and phi by the solid angle
2π(1 − cos ψ), where ψ = dom (in degrees). In the PHITS calculation,
the angle is selected randomly within the solid angle.
By setting dir=all, the direction of the source beam becomesisotropic. To use a specific angular distribution, a subsection in theydistribution based on numerical data or an analytic function starting x
from a-type is required.
φ=phi
In s-type=9, the definition of dir diﬀers. In s-type=11 and
12, dir can only bet set = −1 or 1.
Figure 4.2: Source direction and parameTo transform coordinates, the trcl parameter, which specifies
ters dir, phi, dom.
the transform number or the definition of the transformation itself,
can be used. The relation of wgt and factor is reciprocal.
If its spin is not defined or zero, a neutron enters a magnetic field without spin. In this case, the initial spinof the neutron is determined at the entrance of the magnetic field by the direction of the magnetic field and thepolarization factor. If the spin is defined in this section, the neutron enters the magnetic field with the defined spin
direction irrespective of the direction of the magnetic field and polarization.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

62

Table 4.28: Common source parameters (2)parameter
ispfs = 0, 1, 2

explanation(D=0) Neutron sources from spontaneous fission.
If ispfs=1 or 2 is specified in the [source] section and the following 18 nuclei arechosen as proj, neutrons can be defined using spontaneous fission as a source. These
nuclei are assumed to be spontaneous fission nuclei:
U-238, Pu-238, Pu-240, Pu-242, Cm-242, Cm-244, Cf-252, Th-232, U-232, U-233, U234, U-235, U-236, Np-237, Pu-239, Pu-241, Am-241, Bk-249.
ispfs=1: Tally result is normalized by the number of neutrons produced by spontaneous
fission.
ispfs=2: Tally result is normalized by the number of spontaneous fissions.
In the case of ispfs = 1,2, e0 and e-type, dir, and a-type are neglected.

When ispfs=1,2 is specified, the multiplicity and energy spectrum of neutrons are taken from the reference 39 .
The PHITS development team is grateful to Dr. Liem Peng Hong of NAIS, Co., Inc. for his support in developing
this function to generate neutron sources.
In the next example, setting proj=240Pu and ispfs=1 selects neutrons from the spontaneous fission of Pu-240
as source particles. In this case, the value of e0 is invalid.
[ S o u r c e ]s-type =1
proj =
240Pu
e0 =
1.0
z0 =
0
z1 =
0
r0 =
0.0
dir =
1.0000
ispfs = 1

39 J. M. Verbeke, C. Hagmnn, and D. Wright, “Simulation of Neutron and Gamma Ray Emission from Fission and Photofission”, UCRL-

AR-228518 (2014).

4.3 [ Source ] section

63

4.3.3 Cylinder distribution source
Parameters for cylinder source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default
value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.29: Parameters for cylinder sources-type = 1
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
z1 =
r0 =
r1 =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Cylinder or circle source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of center position of cylinder source[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of center position of cylinder source[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum z of cylinder source[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum z of cylinder source[cm], (when z1=z0, circle plane source).
(D=0.0) Radius of cylinder source, (when r0=0.0, pencil source)[cm].
(D=0.0) Inner radius for inner void of cylinder.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3.4 Rectangular solid distribution source
Parameters for rectangular solid source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has adefault value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.30: Parameters for rectangular solid sources-type = 2
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Rectangular solid and rectangle source.
(D=0.0) Minimum x coordinate[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum x coordinate[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum y coordinate[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum y coordinate[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum z coordinate[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum z coordinate[cm], when (z1=z0), rectangle source.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

64

4.3.5 Gaussian distribution source (x,y,z independent)
This Gauss distribution is consist of independent Gaussian in each x, y, z direction. Parameters for Gaussian
source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parametercan be omissible.
Table 4.31: Parameters for Gaussian sources-type = 3
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Gaussian source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of Gaussian center[cm].
(D=0.0) FWHM in x direction[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of Gaussian center[cm].
(D=0.0) FWHM in y direction[cm].
(D=0.0) z coordinate of Gaussian center[cm].
(D=0.0) FWHM in z direction[cm].
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3.6 Generic parabola distribution source (x,y,z independent)
This generic parabola distribution consists of independent parabola in each x, y, z direction. Parameters forgeneric parabola source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value(D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.32: parameters for generic parabola distributions-type = 7
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
rn =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Generic parabola source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of X-parabola center[cm].
(D=0.0) X-parabola width[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of Y-parabola center[cm].
(D=0.0) Y-parabola width[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum z of parabola[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum z of parabola[cm].
(D=2) Order of generic parabola.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3 [ Source ] section

65

4.3.7 Gaussian distribution source (x-y plane)
This source is a Gaussian distribution in x-y plane. Parameters for Gaussian source are shown below. The
order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.33: Parameters for Gaussian sources-type = 13
x0 =
y0 =
r1 =
z0 =
z1 =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Gaussian source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of Gaussian center[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of Gaussian center[cm].
(D=0.0) FWHM in xy plane[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum z coordinate[cm].
(D=z0) Maximum z coordinate[cm].
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3.8 Generic parabola distribution source (x-y plane)
This source is a generic parabola distribution in x-y plane. Parameters for generic parabola source are shown
below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.34: Parameters for generic parabola distributions-type = 15
x0 =
y0 =
r1 =
z0 =
z1 =
rn =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Generic parabola source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of X-parabola center[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of Y-parabola center[cm].
(D=0.0) Parabola width in xy plane[cm].
(D=0.0) Minimum z of parabola[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum z of parabola[cm].
(D=2) order of generic parabola.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

66

4.3.9 Sphere and spherical shell distribution source
Parameters for sphere and spherical shell sources are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If aparameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omitted.
Table 4.35: Parameters for sphere and spherical shell sources-type = 9
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
r1 =
r2 =
dir =

e0 =
e-type =Sphere and spherical shell source.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of sphere center[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of sphere center[cm].
(D=0.0) z coordinate of sphere center[cm].
(D=0.0) Inside radius[cm]. If r1=0, sphere source.
(D=0.0) Outside radius[cm].
(D=1.0) Direction.
dir = 1.0 : Outgoing from the center with normal line direction.
dir = -1.0 : Inverse direction with dir=1.0.
dir = all : Isotropic.
dir = -all : Inverse direction against dir=1.0, and with cosine distribution. This is usedfor volume and area calculation with cos2 bias.
dir=iso : Uniform distribution on a circle of radius r2 on a spherical shell of radius r1 withthe direction orthogonal to a circle of radius r2 toward the sphere. In the case of r1=r2, theresult is nearly identical to that of dir = -all, but the eﬀect of weight is not included. Thus,
this condition can be used to obtain the variance of deposition energies on the [t-deposit]
tally with output=deposit.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

When using the source type s-type=9 for volume and area calculation, set dir=-all, r1=r2; dir=iso
gives the same result.
Inner radius, r1, should be smaller or equal to outer radius, r2, except for dir=iso, where r1 should be equalto (or larger than) r2.

r2
r1

Figure 4.3: Schematic of the source in the case of dir=iso.

4.3 [ Source ] section

67

4.3.10 s-type = 11This is a uniform distribution source in a phase space which is vertical with beam direction. Parameters forthis source type are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), theparameter can be omissible.
Table 4.36: Parameters for s-type = 11s-type = 11
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
rx =
ry =
wem =
dir =
e0 =

Uniform distribution in a phase space vertical with beam direction.
(D=0.0) x coordinate of beam center[cm].
(D=0.0) Ratio of (maximum radius)/(minimum radius) for x direction[cm/mrad].
(D=0.0) y coordinate of beam center[cm].
(D=0.0) Ratio of (maximum radius)/(minimum radius) for y direction[cm/mrad].
(D=0.0) Minimum z[cm].
(D=0.0) Maximum z[cm].
(D=0.0) Gradient of ellipse in a phase space on x direction[rad].
(D=0.0) Gradient of ellipse in a phase space on y direction[rad].
(D=0.0) Emittance (π cm × mrad).
(D=1) Direct cosine. (1 or −1 only).
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3.11 s-type = 12
In this source type, decay-turtle output is read as source. Parameters for this source type are shown below. The
order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
The input file is rewinded and re-used from the first particle again, if all of source in decay-turtle is read before
the calculation finishes.
Table 4.37: Parameters for s-type = 12
s-type = 12
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
dir =
file =

Decay-turtle reading.
(D=0.0) x coordinate oﬀset of beam[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate oﬀset of beam[cm].
(D=0.0) z coordinate oﬀset of beam[cm].
(D=1) Direct cosine. (1 or −1 only).
Decay-turtle filename (with full pathname).

The format of decay-turtle is double precision, and ascii, and each record is asxp, xq, yp, yq, e0, wt0, pz0

Table 4.38: Decay-turtle data
variable
xp, ypxq, yqe0
wt0
pz0

explanation
Incoming position of beam particle[cm].
Angle against vertical face with beam direction[mrad].
Momentum of beam particle[GeV/c].
Weight of beam particle.
Polarizing of beam particle (be not in use).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

68

4.3.12 Cone shape
Parameters for cone shape source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default
value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.39: parameters for cone shapes-type = 18
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
x1 =
y1 =
z1 =
r0 =
r1 =
r2 =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Cone shape.
(D=0.0) x coordinate oﬀset of top of cone[cm].
(D=0.0) y coordinate oﬀset of top of cone[cm].
(D=0.0) z coordinate oﬀset of top of cone[cm].
(D=0.0) x-component of vector from top to center of bottom circle[cm].
(D=0.0) y-component of vector from top to center of bottom circle[cm].
(D=0.0) z-component of vector from top to center of bottom circle[cm].
(D=0.0) distance between top and upper end of source locations on axis of cone[cm].
(D=0.0) Distance between top and lower end of source locations on axis of cone[cm].
(D=0.0) Angle between generatrix and axis of cone[degree].
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

4.3 [ Source ] section

69

4.3.13 Triangle prism shape
Parameters for triangle prism shape source are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameterhas a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.40: parameters for triangle prism shapes-type = 20
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
x1 =
y1 =
z1 =
x2 =
y2 =
z2 =
x3 =
y3 =
z3 =
exa =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =Triangle prism shape.
(D=0.0) x-coordinate of origin apex of triangle[cm].
(D=0.0) y-coordinate of origin apex of triangle[cm].
(D=0.0) z-coordinate of origin apex of triangle[cm].
(D=0.0) x vector from the origin to the first apex[cm].
(D=0.0) y vector from the origin to the first apex[cm].
(D=0.0) z vector from the origin to the first apex[cm].
(D=0.0) x vector from the origin to the second apex[cm].
(D=0.0) y vector from the origin to the second apex[cm].
(D=0.0) z vector from the origin to the second apex[cm].
(D=0.0) x vector from the origin to the third apex[cm].
(D=0.0) y vector from the origin to the third apex[cm].
(D=0.0) z vector from the origin to the third apex[cm].
(D=0.0) Attenuation coeﬃcient. exa>0; exp (−ax), exa=0; uniform.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

Figure 4.4: Coordinates of triangle prism4 SECTIONS FORMAT

70

4.3.14 xyz-mesh distribution source
When you specify s-type=22, you can set a complex spatial distribution of sources. In stype=22, monoenergetic particles can be generated. The spatial distribution can be defined by x,y,z-type subsections and dataof relative intensities Ii jk , (i = 1, · · · , n x ; j = 1, · · · , ny ; k = 1, · · · , nz ). The data should be written below thesubsections. The direction of the sources can be specified by dir, phi, and dom. Note that you cannot change
the direction in each xyz-bin. Parameters for xyz-mesh distribution source are shown in Table 4.41. The order ofparameters is free except for the data of the relative intensities. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), theparameter can be omissible.
Table 4.41: parameters for xyz-mesh distribution sources-type = 22
mesh = xyz
x-type =y-type =z-type =

dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =xyz-mesh distribution source.
Geometry mesh. Only xyz can be set.
Mesh type for x-axis. x-type subsection is needed below this option.
Mesh type for y-axis. y-type subsection is needed below this option.
Mesh type for z-axis. z-type subsection is needed below this option.
Put data of relative intensities Ii jk below x, y, z-type subsections. The change of thedata element should be in the order of x, y, z. Note that the change in x, y, z axes should be
ascending order if nx, ny, nz are positive, and it should be descending order if nx, ny,
nz are negative.
(D=1.0) Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].

When all of nx,ny,nz are positive, the order of the relative intensities Ii jk is given as
I111 , I211 , · · · , Inx 11 , I121 , I221 , · · · , Inx ny 1 , I112 , I212 , · · · , Inx ny nz ,(2)

where n x =|nx|, ny =|ny|, nz =|nz|. When nx and ny are positive and nz is negative, the order is given as
I11nz , I21nz , · · · , Inx 1nz , I12nz , I22nz , · · · , Inx ny nz , I11nz −1 , I21nz −1 , · · · , Inx ny 1 .
In the latter case, you have to first put the data with k = nz =|nz|.
An example using s-type=22 is shown below.
Example 3: Example of xyz-mesh distribution source
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:

[ S o u r c e ]s-type = 22
proj = neutrone0 = 1.0
dir = allmesh = xyz
x-type = 2
nx = 3xmin = -10
xmax = 10
y-type = 2
ny = -3ymin = -10
ymax = 10z-type = 2
nz = -2
zmin = -10(3)

4.3 [ Source ] section

18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

71

zmax = 10
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
1 0 3
0 5 0
7 0 9

In this case, the source region is [-10cm≤ x, y, z ≤10cm], and the ranges in x, y, and z-axes are divided by 3, 3, and 2bins, respectively. Because ny and nz are negative, the relative intensities Ii jk should be written in descending orderfor j and k. Therefore, in the 19th-21st lines of the example, Ii jk with k = 2, i.e. in the region of [0cm≤ z ≤10cm],
are given as  I132 I232 I332   1 2 3  I122 I222 I322  =  4 5 6  ,
(4)

 

I112 I212 I312
7 8 9
and Ii jk with k = 1, i.e. in the region of [−10cm≤ z ≤0cm], are given in the 23rd -25th lines as I131 I121
I111

I231
I221
I211

 
I331   1
 
I321  =  0
 
7
I311

0
5
0


3 

0  .

9(5)

Figure 4.5 shows the sources distribution of the example, which are obtained by [t-product] with output=source.
The left and right panels are results in the regions of [0cm≤ z ≤10cm] and [−10cm≤ z ≤0cm], respectively. In
the left panel, the regions of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, · · · correspond to I132 , I232 , I332 , I122 , I222 , I322 , · · · , respectively. As
the region number increases, the intensity in each region gradually increases. In the right panel, the sources don’t
generate in the regions of 2, 4, 6, and 8, which correspond to the elements of 0 in the right side of Eq. 5.

20

20

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10−4

−10

0

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10−4

−10
11

−20
−20

1

Number [1/source]02y [cm]

10
1

Number [1/source]y [cm]

10

11

−10

0
x [cm]

10

20

−20
−20

−10

0
x [cm]

10

20

Figure 4.5: Results of example 3 in the region of [0cm≤ z ≤10cm] (left panel) and [−10cm≤ z ≤0cm] (rightpanel).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

72

4.3.15 Reading dump file
When you set type = 17, you can use information on particles recorded in a file as sources. The “dump ”filecan be obtained by using the dump option in the [t-cross], [t-product], and [t-time] tallies. There are
two ways to treat the dump data, which can be switched by the idmpmode parameter. Each particle data recorded in
the dump file was treated as an independent history with idmpmode=0. On the other hand, using history information
recorded in the dump file, the correlations between particles at the time of data dump are taken into account in thestatistical processing with idmpmode=1. For the continuous calculation using dump file, we recommend to use
idmpmode=1 by taking account of the history information at the previous step. 40
Parameters for the type = 17 are shown below. The order of parameters is free. If a parameter has a default
value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.42: Parameters for dump file source (1)s-type = 17
file =
dump =(next line)(omissible)
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
sx =
sy =
sz =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =wgt =Reading dump file.
Dump filename (with full pathname).
Number of dump data. If it is negative, data is written by Ascii.
Identification of dump data.
If below parameters are specified, these values have priority over the dump data. If the dump
data does not include the following data, one should specify the parameters.
Minimum x coordinate[cm].
Maximum x coordinate[cm].
Minimum y coordinate[cm].
Maximum y coordinate[cm].
Minimum z coordinate[cm].
Maximum z coordinate[cm].
(D=0) x-component of spin.
(D=0) y-component of spin.
(D=0) z-component of spin.
Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(D=1.0) Weight of source particle.

40 The option idmpmode=1 and re-used calculation using the option dmpmulti were introduced by referring to the presentation “Estimationof uncertainty in multi-step Monte Carlo calculation”(N50) by Dr. Y. Namito et al. at the 2015 annual meeting of AESJ (Hitachi, Japan).

4.3 [ Source ] section

73

Table 4.43: Parameters for dump file source (2)(omitted)factor =t-type =reg =ntmax =
trcl =
idmpmode =dmpmulti =The following parameters can also be specified.
(D=1.0) normalization of source particle.
(D=0) time distribution.
(D=all) specify the region.
(D=1000) maximum re-try number when reg is specified.
(D=none) transform number, or definition of transform.
Control parameter to select dump source mode.
(D=0) In case history information (nocas and nobach) is not included in the dump data.
(D=1) In case history information (nocas and nobach) is included in the dump data.
=0: Each particle data recorded in the dump file is treated as an independent history.
=1: Particle data in the dump file are processed by taking account of particle correlations in theprevious step.
Control parameter for reuse of dump file.
(D=0.0) With idmpmode=0.
(D=1.0) With idmpmode=1.
=0.0: The dump file is rewinded and re-used until finishing total histories specified by(maxcas*maxbch). However, this mode cannot be used with idmpmode=1.
>0.0: The dump file is re-used in the number of times specified by this parameter.
The digits after the decimal point are reflected to the probability in the Russian roulette to adopt
another reproduction of the particle data.

The history number (nocas) and the batch number (nobch) must be contained in the dump data to use idmpmode=1.
Using the dump option of PHITS tally, a dump file named “*** dmp” is created as well as the normal tally filewith the file name “***” specified by “file=***”. Both files are required to use idmpmode=1 and needed to beplaced in the same folder. The total number of histories of the previous step is adopted from the values of maxcas
and maxbch written in this tally file and the history numbers, maxcas and maxbch, given in the PHITS input file
are neglected. The normalization factor totfact is ignored with idmpmode=1. To use the normalization factor,
totfact should be applied to the previous step for creating the dump file, and then, it will be reflected in theweights of particles recorded in the dump file. The option idmpmode=1 is incompatible with multi-source.
The option dmpmulti controls the number of re-use of the dump file. In the case of dmpmulti=2.0, the dump
file will be reused twice. Namely, information for each particle recorded in the dump file is reproduced twice andthey are treated as two particles having a half weight with a diﬀerent random number. The digits after the decimal
point indicate the probability to create another reproduction of the particle. The reproduction is stochasticallydetermined by the Russian roulette for each particle. For example, in case of dmpmulti=2.3, the particle data
are reproduced twice with the probability 70% and three times with the probability 30%. As a special mode withdmpmulti=0.0, the dump file is rewinded and re-used until finishing total histories specified by (maxcas*maxbch)
written in the PHITS input file. This mode is valid only with idmpmode=0.
Basically, the restart calculation (istdev<0) is not applicable for the dump source calculation. It is only
allowed with dmpmulti=0.0, but then it should be noticed that the calculation may give biased results unlessthe dump file contains large enough particle data. Therefore, re-calculation taking larger dmpmulti factor ismore recommended to achieve better statistics. If the particle data contained in the dump file are not statisticallysuﬃcient, statistical errors may not become small as aimed even though taking a large dmpmulti factor. In thiscase, re-calculation from the previous step to create suﬃcient dump data is required.
By the parameter of “dump =”, the number of the dump data in one record is specified. If this number is given
by positive number, the data is read as binary data. If negative, the data is read as asci data. In next line, the data
sequence of one record is described. The relation between the physical quantities and id number is the followings,
Table 4.44: id number of dump data (1)physical quantities
id number

kf
1

x
2

y
3

z
4

u
5

v
6

w
7

e
8

wt
9

time
10

c1
11

c2
12

c3
13

sx
14

sy
15

sz
16

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

74

Table 4.45: id number of dump data (2)physical quantities
id number

name
17

nocas
18

nobch
19

no
20

Here kf means the kf-code of the particles (see Table 3.4), x, y, z are coordinates[cm]., u, v, w denote the unit
vectors of the direction of the particle, e is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon for nucleus), wt is the weight, timeis the initial time (ns), c1, c2, c3 are the values of counters, and sx, sy, sz are the unit vectors of the direction ofspin, respectively. name is a collision number of the particle, nocas is a history number of a batch, nobch is abatch number, no is a cascade id in the history. These are assumed as real*8 for the binary data, n(1p1e24.15) data
format for the ascii data.
For an example, one record has 9 data as
kf

e

wt

x

y

z

u

v

w

6

7

To read this data, we write the parameters as
dump = 9
1 8 9

2

3

4

5

4.3 [ Source ] section75

4.3.16 User definition source
If you edit usrsors.f, you can use your original source function by s-type=100. If the following parameters areset, these values have the priority. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.46: Parameters can be specified in s-type=100
s-type = 100
x0 =
x1 =
y0 =
y1 =
z0 =
z1 =
sx =
sy =
sz =
dir =

phi =
dom =
e0 =
e-type =wgt =factor =t-type =reg =ntmax =
trcl =

User definition source.
If below parameters are specified, these values have priority over the user defined data.
Minimum x coordinate[cm].
Maximum x coordinate[cm].
Minimum y coordinate[cm].
Maximum y coordinate[cm].
Minimum z coordinate[cm].
Maximum z coordinate[cm].
(D=0) x-component of spin.
(D=0) y-component of spin.
(D=0) z-component of spin.
Direction cosine of projectile against z axis.
If you set all, it is isotropic.
If you set data, a-type subsection is necessary.
(D=none; random) Azimuthal angle[degree].
(D=0.0) Solid angle[degree].
= −1 ; cos2 bias distribution.
(For mono-energy) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(For energy spectrum) Projectile energy[MeV/u].
(D=1.0) Weight of source particle.
(D=1.0) Normalization of source particle.
(D=0) Time distribution.
(D=all) Specify the region.
(D=1000) Maximum re-try number when reg is specified.
(D=none) Transform number, or definition of transform.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

76

We show a sample program of usrsors.f as following. In the first comment part, there is a list of the variables
which is necessary to define the source. Next there is a list of kf-code which specifies the source particle. In thelast part of the comment, the random number functions, one is a uniform random number, the other is a Gaussian
random number, are shown. The first part of the program is an example of the initialization, which describes theopen and close the data file. The remaining part shows a list of the variables which user should define in thissubroutine.
File 2: usrsors.f
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:

************************************************************************
subroutine usrsors(x,y,z,u,v,w,e,wt,time,name,kf,nc1,nc2,nc3,&sx,sy,sz)*
sample subroutine for user defined source.
**
variables :**x, y, z : position of the source.
**u, v, w : unit vector of the particle direction.
**e: kinetic energy of particle (MeV).
**wt: weight of particle.
**
time: initial time of particle. (ns)**name: usually = 1, for Coulmb spread.
**kf: kf code of the particle.
**
nc1: initial value of counter 1**
nc2: initial value of counter 2**
nc3: initial value of counter 3**
sx,sy,sz : spin components**----------------------------------------------------------------------**
kf code table**kf-code: ityp : description**
2212 :
1 : proton**
2112 :
2 : neutron
*
*
211 :
3 : pion (+)
*
*
111 :
4 : pion (0)**-211 :
5 : pion (-)
*
*
-13 :
6 : muon (+)**
13 :7 : muon (-)
*
*
321 :
8 : kaon (+)
*
*
311 :
9 : kaon (0)**-321 : 10 : kaon (-)**
kf-code of the other transport particles
*
*
12 :
nu_e
*
*
14 :
nu_mu
*
*
221 :
eta
*
*
331 :
eta’
*
*
-311 :
k0bar**-2112 :
nbar**
-2212 :
pbar**
3122 :
Lanbda0**3222 :
Sigma+**
3212 :
Sigma0**3112 :
Sigma**
3322 :
Xi0**
3312 :
Xi**
3334 :
Omega**----------------------------------------------------------------------**
available function for random number**
unirn(dummy) : uniform random number from 0 to 1**
gaurn(dummy) : gaussian random number**
for exp( - x**2 / 2 / sig**2 ) : sig = 1.0 *************************************************************************
implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)*----------------------------------------------------------------------parameter ( pi = 3.141592653589793d0 )4.3 [ Source ] section

54:
55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:

77

data ifirst / 0 /save ifirstcharacter filenm*50*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
example of initialization*----------------------------------------------------------------------if( ifirst .eq. 0 ) thencfilenm = ’input.dat’cinquire( file = filenm, exist = exex )cif( exex .eqv. .false. ) thencwrite(*,*) ’file does not exist => ’, filenmccall parastop( 887 )cend ifcopen(71, file = file(i), status = ’old’ )cclose(71)
ifirst = 1

end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
example for 3 GeV proton with z-direction*----------------------------------------------------------------------x = 0.0
y = 0.0
z = 0.0
u = 0.0v = 0.0
w = 1.0
e = 3000.0
wt = 1.0
time = 0.0
name = 1
kf = 2212
nc1 = 0nc2 = 0nc3 = 0sx = 0.d0
sy = 0.d0
sz = 0.d0*----------------------------------------------------------------------return
end

78

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

4.3.17 Definitions for energy distribution
The energy-distributed source can be defined by e-type subsection instead of by e0. Note that e0 have tobe deleted or set to invalid by comment marks when the e-type subsection is given. For d, t, α, and nuclei, thisenergy is expressed in units of [MeV/nucleon].
For e-type = 1,4,11,14, the source intensity in each energy bin should be given as an energy-integrated
value. For e-type = 21,24,31,34, the source intensity in each energy bin should be given as the energy differential value expressed in [particles/MeV]. For e-type = 2,3,5,6,7,12,14,15,16, the energy diﬀerential
spectrum can be defined using various functions. For e-type = 8,9,18,19, the source intensity can be defined
discretely. For e-type = 22,23,32,33, both the continuous and discrete distributions of the source intensity canbe defined. For e-type = 28,29, the RI-source function can be used. For e-type = 20, results of tallies can beused as energy distribution of the source particle.
Input formats and parameters in each e-type will be explained below. If a parameter has a default value(D=***), the parameter can be omitted.

4.3 [ Source ] section

79

Continuous energy distribution with integral value
Table 4.47: Parameters for source energy distribution (1)parametere-type = 1, (11)ne =e-type = 4, (14)ne =p-type = 0, 1

explanation
Any energy distribution can be specified by providing the data set of energy bins e(i)and the integrated values of the particle generation probabilities w(i) by hand. The
number of particles generated in a bin is proportional to w(i), and the specified energy
distribution is statistically described. For case 11, the energy is given by the wave
length (Å).
Number of energy groups.
If this is a positive number, source particles are generated so that the energy diﬀerential
fluxes in units of [1/MeV] become constant in each bin. If negative, the fluxes in unitsof [1/Lethargy] become constant for each bin. Data must be provided in the following
line using the format(e(i), w(i), i=1, ne), e(ne+1).
The integrated numbers of particles generated in each energy bin is proportional tow(i).
The same energy distribution as in the case of e-type = 1, (11) can be specified,
except with the energy bins e(i) and weights of the source particle w(i) entered byhand. The number of source particles generated in each bin is the same for all energybins, but integrated values of the weights of source particles are adjusted to be proportional to w(i). The number of source particles generated in each bin can also bechanged by specifying p(i). For case 14, the energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy groups.
If this is a positive number, source particles are generated so that the energy diﬀerential
fluxes in units of [1/MeV] become constant in each bin. If negative, the fluxes in unitsof [1/Lethargy] become constant for each bin. Data must be provided in the following
line using the format(e(i), w(i), i=1, ne), e(ne+1).
In the default (p-type = 0), equal numbers of particles are generated in each cell. The
integrated number of source particles generated in each bin is proportional to p(i).
(D = 0) generation option.
For 0, p(i) = 1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
For 1, p(i) must be given from the next line using the format(p(i),i=1,ne).

An alternative option for neutron optics has been developed to specify the energy as a wavelength: if e-type
is set to = 11, 12, 14, the wavelength (Å) is used as the energy unit. In the other cases, the expression e0 =8.180425e-8/13**2 is used, which corresponds to the energy of a neutron with a 13Å wavelength.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

80

In the case of e-type = 1, the format is as follows.

e-type = 1
ne = n
e(1)
w(1)
e(2)
w(2)
e(3)
w(3)
....
...
e(n-1) w(n-1)
e(n)
w(n)
e(n+1)In this case, the energy distribution is given ase(1)-e(2)w(1)e(2)-e(3)w(2)e(3)-e(4)w(3).......
...
e(n-1)-e(n) w(n-1)e(n)-e(n+1) w(n)As an example, use the following code to set the strengths of three energy bins between 0-2 MeV, 2-4 MeV, and
4-6 MeV as 0.2, 0.6, and 0.2, respectively:

e-type = 1
ne = 3
0
0.2
2
0.6
4
0.2
6

4.3 [ Source ] section

81

Continuous energy distribution with diﬀerential value
Table 4.48: Parameters for source energy distribution (2)parametere-type = 21, (31)ne =e-type = 24, (34)ne =p-type = 0, 1

explanation
You can specify any energy distribution by giving data set of energy bins e(i)and diﬀerential probabilities of the particle generation dφ/dE(i) by hand.
The integrated number of the particle generation in the bin is proportional todφ/dE(i)*{e(i+1)-e(i)}, and the specified energy distribution
is statistically described.
For 31 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy group.
If it is given by positive number, source particles are generated so that theenergy diﬀerential fluxes in the unit of [1/MeV] become constant in eachbin. On the other hand, if ne is negative, the fluxes in the unit of [1/Lethargy]
become constant in each bin.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(e(i),dφ/dE(i),i=1,ne), e(ne+1).
The integrated number of the particle generation in the each energy bin
is proportional to dφ/dE(i)*{e(i+1)-e(i)}.
You can specify the same energy distribution as is the case ofe-type = 21, (31). Unlike e-type = 21, (31), the distribution
is described by giving data set of energy bins e(i) and weightsof the source particle w(i) by hand. The number of source
particles generated in each bin is the same for all energy bin,but integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted
to be proportional to w(i)*{e(i+1)-e(i)}.
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin
by specifing p(i).
For 34 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy group.
If it is given by positive number, source particles are generated so that theenergy diﬀerential fluxes in the unit of [1/MeV] become constant in eachbin. On the other hand, if ne is negative, the fluxes in the unit of [1/Lethargy]
become constant in each bin.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(e(i),w(i),i=1,ne), e(ne+1).
In default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin
is proportional to p(i).
(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (p(i),i=1,ne)4 SECTIONS FORMAT

82

Discrete energy distribution
Table 4.49: Parameters for source energy distribution (3)parametere-type = 8, (18)ne =e-type = 9, (19)ne =p-type = 0, 1

explanation
You can specify any energy distribution by giving data set of energy points e(i)and probabilities of the particle generation w(i) by hand.
The number of the particle generation at the point is proportional to w(i), andthe specified energy distribution is statistically described.
For 18 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy points.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(e(i),w(i),i=1,ne).
The number of the particle generation at the each energy point is proportionalto w(i).
You can specify the same energy distribution as is the case ofe-type = 8, (18). Unlike e-type = 8, (18), the distribution
is described by giving data set of energy points e(i) and weightsof the source particle w(i) by hand. The number of source
particles generated in each point is the same for all energy point,
but integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted
to be proportional to w(i).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each pointby specifing p(i).
For 19 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy points.
Data must be given from the next line by the format below.
In default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated at each point.
(e(i),w(i),i=1,ne)
The number of source particles generated in each pointis proportional to p(i).
(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (p(i),i=1,ne)4.3 [ Source ] section

83

Energy distribution by free format
Table 4.50: Parameters for source energy distribution (4)parametere-type = 22, (32)ne =e-type = 23, (33)ne =p-type = 0, 1

explanation
Any energy distribution can be specified by providing the data set of the minimumemin(i) and maximum emax(i) of energy bins, and the integrated values of theparticle probabilities w(i) by hand. To define the same discrete distribution as
e-type=18, (28), set the maximum to the same value as the minimum. The
number of particles generated in a bin is proportional to w(i), and the specified
energy distribution is statistically described. For case 32, the energy is given by thewave length (Å).
Number of energy groups. If this is a positive number, source particles are generated
so that the energy diﬀerential fluxes in units of [1/MeV] become constant in each bin.
If negative, the fluxes in units of [1/Lethargy] become constant for each bin. Data
must be provided in the following line using the format:(emin(i),emax(i),w(i),i=1,|ne|).
The integrated numbers of particles generated in each energy bin is proportionalto w(i).
The same energy distribution as in the case of e-type = 22, (32) can be specified,
except with the weights of the source particle w(i) entered by hand. The number ofsource particles generated in each bin is the same for all energy bins, but integrated
values of the weights of source particles are adjusted to be proportional to w(i). The
number of source particles generated in each bin can also be changed by specifyingp(i). For case 33, the energy is given by wave length (Å).
Number of energy groups. If this is a positive number, source particles are generated
so that the energy diﬀerential fluxes in units of [1/MeV] become constant in each bin.
If negative, the fluxes in units of [1/Lethargy] become constant for each bin. Data
must be provided in the following line using the format:(emin(i),emax(i),w(i),i=1,|ne|).
In the default (p-type = 0), equal numbers of particles are generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin is proportional top(i).
(D=0) generation option
For 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following data.
For 1, p(i) must be given from the next line using the format (p(i),i=1,ne).

An alternative option for neutron optics has been developed to specify the energy as a wavelength: if e-type isset to = 32, 33, the wavelength (Å) is used as the energy unit. In the other cases, the expression e0 = 8.180425e8/13**2 is used, which corresponds to the energy of a neutron with a 13Åwavelength.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

84

In the case of e-type = 22, the format is as follows:

e-type = 22
ne = nemin(1) emax(1)w(1)
emin(2) emax(2)w(2)
emin(3) emax(3)
w(3)
....
...
emin(n-1) emax(n-1) w(n-1)
emin(n) emax(n)w(n)

As an example, use the following code to set the strengths of three energy bins between 0-2 MeV, 2-4 MeV,
and 4-6 MeV as 0.2, 0.6, and 0.2, respectively, and the discrete one of mono-energy of 5.6 MeV as 0.4:

e-type = 22
ne = 4
0
2
0.2
2
4
0.6
4
6
0.2
5.6 5.6 0.4

4.3 [ Source ] section

85

Gaussian energy distribution
Table 4.51: Parameters for source energy distribution (5)parametere-type = 2, (12)
eg0 =
eg1 =
eg2 =
eg3 =
e-type = 3
nm =

et0 =
et1 =
et2 =
e-type = 7

nm =

et0 =
et1 =
et2 =
p-type = 0, 1

explanationDiﬀerential spectrum dφ/dE(i) is given by Gaussian distribution.
For 12 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
center of Gaussian distribution (MeV)
FWHM of Gaussian distribution (MeV)
minimum cut oﬀ for Gaussian distribution (MeV)
maximum cut oﬀ for Gaussian distribution (MeV)Diﬀerential spectrum dφ/dE(i) is given by Maxwellian distribution:f (x) = x exp(−x/T )(D=-200) number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
temperature parameter T (MeV)
minimum cut oﬀ for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)
maximum cut oﬀ for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)
You can specify the same energy distribution as is the case ofe-type = 3. Unlike e-type = 3, the number of source particles
generated in each bin is the same for all energy bin, but integrated valuesof the weight of source particles are adjusted to be proportional
to f (x) = x1.5 exp(−x/T ).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin
by specifing p(i).
(D=-200) Number of energy group.
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
In default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin
is proportional to p(i).
temperature parameter T (MeV)
minimum cut oﬀ for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)
maximum cut oﬀ for Maxwellian distribution (MeV)(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (p(i),i=1,ne)4 SECTIONS FORMAT

86

Energy distribution defined by analytical functions
Table 4.52: Parameters for source energy distribution (6)parametere-type = 5, (15)f(x) =

nm =

eg1 =
eg2 =
e-type = 6, (16)f(x) =

nm =

eg1 =
eg2 =
p-type = 0, 1

explanationDiﬀerential spectrum dφ/dE(i) is given by f(x).
For 15 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Any analytical function of x, Fortran style.
x denotes energy (MeV/u). One can use intrinsic functions and constants C.
e.g. f(x) = exp(-c1*x**2)
number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
Integrated number of source particles generated in each cell is proportional to f(x)minimum cut oﬀ for energy distribution (MeV)
maximum cut oﬀ for energy distribution (MeV)
You can specify the same energy distribution as is the case ofe-type = 5, (15). Unlike e-type = 5, (15), the number of source
particle generated in each bin is the same for all energy bin, but
integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted to be
proportional to f (x).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin
by specifing p(i).
For 16 case, energy is given by wave length (Å).
Any analytical function of x, Fortran style.
x denotes energy (MeV/u). One can use intrinsic functions and constants C.
e.g. f(x) = exp(-c1*x**2)
number of energy group
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
In default (p-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin
is proportional to p(i).
minimum cut oﬀ for energy distribution (MeV)
maximum cut oﬀ for energy distribution (MeV)(D=0) generation option
for 0, p(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, p(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (p(i),i=1,nm)

4.3 [ Source ] section

87

Energy distribution of RI source
Table 4.53: Parameters for source energy distribution (7)parametere-type= 28,29

ni=dtime=

explanation
The α, β (including Auger electrons), and γ-rays of radioisotope (RI) decay are generated
by simply specifying the activity (in Bq) and names of the RIs. The DECDC41 nuclear
decay database (equivalent to ICRP107) is used to obtain the energy spectra.
To use this function, the directory containing the DECDC data file RIsource.dat mustbe specified by setting file(24) (D=c:\phits\data\) in the [parameters] section.
When e-type= 28, the spectra are expressed by changing the probabilities of generating
particle energy spectra obtained from DECDC.
When e-type= 29, the spectra are expressed by changing the weights of the source
particles while maintaining constant probabilities for all source energy.
Number of RIs. RI names and activity must be given in the next line using the format
as (RI(i),A(i),i=1,ni).
RI(i) can be defined using one of two-formats, e.g., as 137Cs or Cs-137.
A(i) is specified in units of Bq.
(D=−10.0) Option for time evolution [s]dtime>0 (in s): The energy spectrum is determined based on the decays of specified RIs
including contributions from their daughter nuclides at the time at which dtime has passed;
this changes the activity of each RI from its specified value. For example, setting 100 Bq
for an RI with a half-life of 1 min and dtime = 60 results in an RI activity of 50 Bq in
the PHITS calculation.
dtime=0: No time evolution is considered.
dtime<0: The energy spectrum is determined based on the decays of the specified RIs
including the contributions from their daughter nuclides at the time at which thehalf-life×|dtime| has passed. Unlike the case of dtime>0, the activities of the respective
RI are unchanged from their specified values. For example, setting 100 Bq for an RI witha half-life of 1 min and dtime=−1.0 results in an unchanged RI activity of 100 Bq in the
PHITS calculation. When no information on the time necessary to attain radioactive
equilibrium is present, a large negative value, e.g., dtime=−10.0, must be set. It is notpossible to specify both parent and daughter nuclides simultaneously for dtime<0.

To use this function with multi-sources, set <source> = 1.0 and totfact as follows: when all sources aredefined by e-type = 28,29, set totfact as the number of <source>; when the multi-sources include sources
defined by e-type,28,29, set each <source> as the absolute intensity of each RI and set totfact as the sumof all values of <source>. If the totfact is given as a negative value, the same particle is generated in each
multi-source section with weights adjusted according to the ratio of the activities.

41 A. Endo, Y. Yamaguchi and K.F. Eckerman, Nuclear decay data for dosimetry calculation - Revised data of ICRP Publication 38, JAERI

1347 (2005).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

88

Table 4.54: Parameters for source energy distribution (8)parameter
actlow=

norm=

iaugers=

explanation(continued in the cases of e-type= 28,29)(D=1.0e-10) Option for lower limit of the activity [Bq].
If the activity following the passage of the specified time is smaller than actlow, the decayof the corresponding RI is not included in the sources.
(D=0) Option for normalization of tally results.
0: Tally results are normalized in units of [/s]. In this case, the source intensity is determinedby the specified activity (if dtime>0, its decrease owing to decay is also taken into account).
1: Tally results are normalized in units of [/source]. This is equivalent to the general
normalization of PHITS.
(D=0) Option for Auger electron production. (only for proj=electron)
0: Including Auger electrons (β-rays + Auger electrons).
1: Not including Auger electrons (only β-rays).
2: Only Auger electrons.

The following is an example using e-type = 28,29:[ S o u r c e ]totfact = 2.0<source> = 1.0
s-type =1
proj = photon
dir =
all
r0 =
0.
z0 =
0.
z1 =
0.
e-type =28
ni =1
Cs-137 100.
dtime = -10.0
actlow =1.0<source> = 1.0
s-type =1
proj = photon
dir =
all
r0 =
0.
z0 =
0.
z1 =
0.
e-type =28
ni =1
Cs-134 100.
dtime = -10.0
actlow =1.0

In this case, Cs-137 and Cs-134 after reaching radioactive equilibrium at 100 Bq are both defined as photon
sources. Furthermore, setting actlow = 1 ensures that activity smaller than 1 Bq is ignored.
Furthermore, for example, to consider both γ and β-rays by decay of Cs-137, make a multi-sources having
two <source> sections with proj=photon and proj=electron. Because both the production rates of the γ and
β-rays are the same, their ratios can be specified as 1.0 (<source>=1.0). In this case, totfact should be 2.0,
which is the sum of the <source> sections.

4.3 [ Source ] section

89

Energy distribution of result of tally
Table 4.55: Parameters for source energy distribution (9)parametere-type= 20

file=

explanation
You can use results of tallies as an energy distribution by specifying file. Only results of[t-track], [t-cross], [t-point], [t-product], [t-time], and [t-star]tallies with axis=eng can be used. A file name (***.out), which was specified in the tally
section as an output file name, should be set in file.
There are two kinds of tally results, energy diﬀerential and integrated values, in accordancewith unit given in the tally section. The energy distribution of the source particle isexpressed on the basis of the kind. Note that time (nsec) and angular (sr) derivatives are nottaken into account. The distribution of the source is normalized to the integrated value ofthe tally result.
Output file name of tallies.

The first result specified by part in the tally section is used as the distribution of the source particle. Note thatparticles of its kind are not generated. You have to set the parameter proj to specify the kind of the source particle.
An example using e-type = 20 is as follows. You can use this function by setting only e-type=20 and file.
[ S o u r c e ]s-type =1
proj = neutron
dir =
1.0
r0 =
0.
z0 =
0.
z1 =
0.
e-type =20
file = cross.out# axial source with energy spectrum# kind of incident particle# z-direction of beam [cosine]# radius [cm]# minimum position of z-axis [cm]# maximum position of z-axis [cm]# energy distribution given by tally output# file name of tally output

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

90

4.3.18 Definition for angular distribution
If you set dir = data, angular distribution parameters are required as shown below. If a parameter has adefault value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.56: Parameters for source angular distribution (1)parametera-type = 1, (11)na =a-type = 4, (14)na =q-type = 0, 1

explanation
You can specify any angular distribution by giving data set of angle bins a(i)and integrated values of the particle generation probability w(i) by hand.
The number of the particle generation in the bin is proportional to w(i), andthe specified angular distribution is statistically described.
For 1 case, angle is given by cosine, for 11 case, given by degree
Number of angular group.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(a(i),w(i),i=1,na), a(na+1).
You can specify the same angular distribution as is the case ofa-type = 1, (11). Unlike a-type = 1, (11), the distribution
is described by giving data set of angle bins a(i) and weightsof the source particle w(i) by hand. The number of source
particles generated in each bin is the same for all angle bin,but integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted
to be proportional to w(i).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin
by specifing q(i).
For 4 case, angle is given by cosine, for 14 case, given by degree.
Number of angular group.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(a(i),w(i),i=1,na), a(na+1).
In default (q-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin
is proportional to q(i).
(D=0) generation option
for 0, q(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, q(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (q(i),i=1,na)

4.3 [ Source ] section

91

Table 4.57: Parameters for source angular distribution (2)parametera-type = 5, (15)g(x) =

nn =
ag1 =
ag2 =
a-type = 6, (16)g(x) =
nn =

ag1 =
ag2 =
q-type = 0, 1

explanation
Angular distribution dφ/dΩ(i) is given by g(x).
For 5 case, angle is given by cosine, for 15 case, given by degree.
Any analytical function of x, Fortran style.
x denotes angle. One can use intrinsic functions and constants C.
e.g. g(x) = exp(-c1*x**2)
Number of angular group.
minimum cut oﬀ for angular distribution
maximum cut oﬀ for angular distribution
You can specify the same angular distribution as is the case ofa-type = 5, (16). Unlike a-type = 5, (16), the number of source
particle generated in each bin is the same for all angle bin, but
integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted to be
proportional to g(x).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin
by specifing q(i).
for 6 case, angle is given by cosine, for 16 case, given by degree
any analytical function of x, Fortran style
one can use intrinsic functions and constants C.
Number of angular group.
In default (q-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each bin
is proportional to q(i).
minimum cut oﬀ for angular distribution
maximum cut oﬀ for angular distribution(D=0) generation option
for 0, q(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, q(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (q(i),i=1,nn)

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

92

4.3.19 Definition for time distribution
For t-type= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, you can define the time distribution function for the time spectrum of
the source particles. If a parameter has a default value (D=***), the parameter can be omissible.
Table 4.58: Parameters for time distribution (1)parametert-type = 0, 1, 2

t0 =
tw =
tn =
td =
tc =
t-type = 3

ntt =t-type = 4ntt =o-type = 0, 1

explanation(D=0) time distribution
0: no time-distribution, t=0.0
1: rectangle distribution
2: Gaussian distribution(D=0.0) center of time when t-type = 1 (ns)width of time distribution (ns). When t-type=1, it means full width.
When t-type=2, it means FWHM of Gaussian distribution.
number of time distribution
interval of time distribution (ns)
(D=10×tw) cut oﬀ time when Gaussian distribution t-type=2 (ns)
You can specify any time distribution by giving data set of time bine t(i) andintegrated values of the particle generation probability w(i), and specified time
distribution is statistically described.
Number of time group.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(t(i),w(i),i=1,ntt), t(ntt+1)
The integrated number of the particle generation in the each time bin is proportionalto w(i).
You can specify the same time distribution as in the case of t-type=1. Unlike
t-type=1, the distribution is described by giving data set of time bins t(i) andweights of the source particle w(i) by hand. The number of source particles
generated in each bin is the same for all time bin, but integrated values of the weightof source particles are adjusted to be proportional to w(i).
You can also change the number of source particles generated in each bin by
specifying o(i).
Number of time group.
Data must be given from the next line by the format as(t(i),w(i),i=1,ntt), t(ntt+1)
In default (o-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in each cell.
The integrated number of source particles generated in each time bin is
proportional to o(i).
(D=0) generation option
for 0, o(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, o(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (o(i),i=1,ntt)4.3 [ Source ] section

93

Table 4.59: Parameters for time distribution (2)parametert-type = 5
h(x)
ll

tg1
tg2
t-type = 6

h(x)
ll

tg1
tg2
o-type = 0, 1

explanationDiﬀerential spectrum (dφ/dt) is given by h(t).
Any analytical function of x(ns), Fortran style.
One can use intrinsic function and constants C.
Number of time group
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
Integrated number of source particles generated in each cell is proportional to h(x).
Minimum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)Maximum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)
You can specify the same time distribution as in the case of t-type=5. Unlike t-type=5,
the number of source particle generated in each bin is the same for all time bin, but
integrated values of the weight of source particles are adjusted to be proportional to h(x).
You can also change the number of particles generated in each bin by specifying o(x).
Any analytical function of x(ns), Fortran style.
One can use intrinsic function and constants C.
Number of time group
If it is given by positive number, linear interpolation is assumed in a bin.
If negative, logarithmic interpolation is assumed in a bin.
In default (o-type=0), equal number of particle is generated in eachcell. The integrated number of source particles generated in each timebin is proportional to o(i).
Minimum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)Maximum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)(D=0) generation option
for 0, o(i)=1 for all i is assumed without the following datafor 1, o(i) must be given from the next line by the format as (o(i),i=1,ntt)

When you set t-type=100, you can use an original distribution by defining its function in subroutine tdis01
of sors.f, which a source file of PHITS.
Table 4.60: Parameters for time distribution (3)parametert-type = 100
tg1
tg2

explanation
User define time distribution. User can write any type of time distribution
in the source program of sors.f
Minimum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)Maximum cut oﬀ for time distribution (ns)

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

94

4.3.20 Example of multi-source
We introduce an example of multi-source, which includes energy distribution and angular distribution describedby analytic functions. The list of third multi-source is shown below.
Example 4: Example of multi-source
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:

[ S o u r c e ]totfact = 3<source> = 9.72
s-type = 1
proj = protonz0 = 2z1 = 29r0 = 5r1 = 4
dir = 0.0
e-type = 6
eg1 = 1.e-6
eg2 = 1.e-3
nm = -200
set: c10[1.e-4]
f(x) = x**(1.5)*exp(-x/c10)<source> = 1
s-type = 1
proj = photonz0 = 1z1 = 2r0 = 5dir = -1e-type = 5
eg1 = 1.e-3
eg2 = 5.e-1
nm = 200
set: c10[1.e-1]
set: c20[1.e-1/2.35482]
f(x) = exp(-(x-c10)**2/2/c20**2)<source> = 1
s-type = 1
proj = neutronz0 = 29z1 = 30
r0 = 5e-type = 6
eg1 = 1.e-2
eg2 = 1.e+3
nm = -200
set: c10[92.469]
set: c20[5.644e+10]f(x) = c10/c20*exp(-sqrt(x*(x+1876))/c10)*(x+938)/sqrt(x*(x+1876))
dir = dataa-type = 5
ag1 = 0ag2 = 1nn = 200g(x) = exp(-(x-1)**2/0.3**2)

4.3 [ Source ] section

95

In this example, there are three source subsections started from <source>. In the first source subsection, we
define a cylinder source from z=2cm to z=29cm with 5cm radius, and we set r1=4. This r1=4 means that theregion inside the cylinder with radius 4cm is not included. In the next source, it is also a cylinder source fromz=1cm to z=2cm with 5cm radius without r1. This is a normal thin cylinder. The last one is also a thin cylinderfrom z=29cm to z=30cm with 5cm radius. The numbers defined after each <source> denote the relative weightof the multi-source. In this example, the relative weight is determined by the relative volume ratio of each source.
This means that the source particles are generated uniformly in each source volume. The coordinate distributionof the generated source particles is shown in Fig. 4.6 using [t-product] tally with output=source, and icntl=6.

x [cm]

4
2
10−3

0
−2
−4

Number [1/cm3/source]

6

−6
0

10

20

30

z [cm]

6

6

z=1.5cm

10−3

0
−2
−4

2
y [cm]y [cm]

2

10−3

0
−2
−4

−6

−6
−6

−4

−2

0
x [cm]

2

4

6

−6

−4

−2

0
x [cm]

Figure 4.6: Multi-source, coordinate distribution

2

4

6

Number [1/cm3/source]4
Number [1/cm3/source]

4

z=15cm4 SECTIONS FORMAT

96

The source particles of the multi-source are proton, photon and neutron. In each subsection, the energy distribution of the source particle is defined as Maxwellian, Gaussian, and user defined analytical function by using
the expression of those function with Fortran style. The first Maxwellian distribution is just equivalent to theexpression by e-type=7 ase-type = 7
et0 = 1.e-4
et1 = 1.e-6
et2 = 1.e-3

The second Gaussian distribution is also equivalent to the expression by e-type=2 ase-type = 2
eg0 = 1.e-1
eg1 = 1.e-1
eg2 = 1.e-4
eg3 = 5.e-1

These energy distributions are shown below by using [t-product] tally with output=source, and icntl=6. The
result of each particle is shown in Fig. 4.7 with diﬀerent colors.

10−1

Number [1/source]

10−2
10−3

protonphoton10−4neutron

10−5
10−6
10−6 10−5 10−4 10−3 10−2 10−1 100 101 102 103
Energy [MeV]
Figure 4.7: Multi-source, energy distribution

4.3 [ Source ] section

97

The first source has an angular distribution defined by dir=0, which means 90 degrees direction with respect toz-axis, the second one has dir=-1, 180 degrees direction, and the third one has an angular distribution defined bya-type description in which we used an analytic function for an angular distribution. The angular distribution of
the third one is shown in Fig. 4.8 by using [t-cross] tally.

Angular distribution

0.00150.00100.00050.0000
0.0

0.2

0.4

0.6
cos(θ)

0.8

Figure 4.8: Multi-source, angular distribution

1.0

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

98

4.3.21 Duct source option
For the simulation of neutrons through the long beam-line from the moderator of spallation neutron source or
the reactor to the detector room, we have prepared the following duct source options to reduce the variance of thecalculations. The beam current transported through the beam-line decreases proportional to the inverse square of
the distance from the moderator. This means that the current crossing the wall of the beam-line, which is called as”wall current”, at 100 m point is six order of magnitude smaller than that at 1 m point from the source if we assume
isotropic distribution of the source direction. To reduce this variance, we have introduced a special options of thesource function in which the wall current of the simulation particles is equalized at any point of the beam-line bychanging the importance weight of the particles to simulate a real situation of the current inside the beam-line.
We set the duct source options for s-type = 1, 2, circle and rectangle source, by dom = -10. The parameters for the duct source options are summarized in Table 4.61.
Table 4.61: Parameters for duct source options
parameter
dom = -10
dl0 =
dl1 =
dl2 =
dpf =
drd =
dxw =
dyw =

explanation
specify the duct source
starting z position of the beam-line from z0[cm].
starting z position of the duct source from z0[cm].
ending z position of the duct source from z0[cm].
portion of pass through particles at dl2
radius of circle beam line for s-type = 1[cm].
x size of rectangle beam line for s-type = 2[cm].
y size of rectangle beam line for s-type = 2[cm].

We assume circle or rectangle beam-line for s-type = 1 or 2, respectively. z1 = z0 and dir = 1 are also
assumed, the latter means the direction of the beam-line. If you want to change the direction of the beam-line,
you should use the transformation trcl = number of transformation. The source particles are generated within
the circle or rectangle region at z0 defined by r0 or x0, x1, y0, y1, for s-type = 1 or 2, respectively. The
direction of the particle is determined by the wall position where it reaches within dl1 and dl2 so as to equalize
the wall current at any point within this region changing the importance of the particle. Overall normalization
factor is defined as a number of the source particles which pass the entrance of beam-line at dl0 originated within
the same region at the source position z0 as that at dl0. We normally set the number to be unit for one history if
all duct wall position from dl0 to dl2 can see the source region at z0. If the source region at z0 is larger than thearea of the beam-line at dl0, the source particle from the outer region at z0 is not counted as the normalization
number at dl0. This means that the extra region at z0 increases the current in the beam-line without changing
the normalization factor. In the above argument, we assume isotropic angular distribution of the source particles
within the small solid angle which covers the whole beam-lin.

z0

dl0

dl1

dl2

True
dyw
dxw
False

Figure 4.9: Schematic image of the duct source.

We show some example of the duct source option in the following. In the first example, we use the rectangle
source and beam-line, the same size of the source and beam-line dimensions. Here we show the input for the ductsource option,

4.3 [ Source ] section

99

Example 5: duct source option, example (1)
1
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

[ S o u r c e ]set: c1[200]$dl0set: c2[500]$dl1
set: c3[5000]$dl2
set: c4[5.0]$x*2 at z0
set: c5[5.0]$y*2 at z0
set: c10[5.0]$dxw
set: c20[5.0]$dyw
set: c30[0.001] $dpf
s-type = 2
proj= neutrone0= 20.0x0= -c4/2
x1= c4/2y0= -c5/2
y1= c5/2
z0
= 0.0
z1
= 0.0
dir
= 1.0
phi
= 0.0
dom = -10
dl0 = c1
dl1 = c2dl2 = c3
dxw = c10
dyw = c20
dpf = c30

In the first part of above source section, we define some constants which are necessary for the duct source option,
dl0, dl1, dl2, size of source, dxw, dyw, dpf. In the second part, we define the position and xy region of thesource, direction of the beam-line and the energy of source particle. In the third part, we define the duct source
options. We calculated particle transport in the beam-line from 5 m up to 50 m by this duct source and the current,
wall current by using the cross tally. The results are shown in Fig. 4.10 compared with an ideal case in which thecurrent and the wall current are proportional to 1/L2 and 1/L3 , respectively. The cross marker in the figure indicatesthe position of dl0 and show that the current at this point is unit. The results of the duct source option agree very
well with the analytical results.

101

Current [n/source]

1 / L2100

1 / L3Current, PHITS

10−1

Wall Current, PHITS

10−2
10−3
10−4
10−5
10−6
0

1000

2000

3000
z [cm]

4000

5000

Figure 4.10: Duct source option, example 1
In the next example, we changed only the size of the source from the previous example.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

100

Example 6: duct source option, example (2)
1
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:

[ S o u r c e ]set: c1[200]$dl0set: c2[500]$dl1
set: c3[5000]$dl2
set: c4[10.0]$x*2 at z0
set: c5[10.0]$y*2 at z0
set: c10[5.0]$dxw
set: c20[5.0]$dyw
set: c30[0.001] $dpf
s-type = 2
proj= neutrone0= 20.0x0= -c4/2
x1= c4/2y0= -c5/2
y1= c5/2
z0
= 0.0
z1
= 0.0
dir
= 1.0
phi
= 0.0
dom = -10
dl0 = c1
dl1 = c2dl2 = c3
dxw = c10
dyw = c20
dpf = c30

Figure 4.11 shows how the extra region of the source increases the current and the wall current. By this function,
you can automatically treat the margin area of the moderator to the size of the cross-section of beam-line.

101

1 / L210

1 / L3Current, PHITS

10−1

Wall Current, PHITS

Current [n/source]

0

10−2
10−3
10−4
10−5
10−6
0

1000

2000

3000
z [cm]

4000

5000

Figure 4.11: Duct source option, example 2

4.4 [ Material ] section

101

4.4 [ Material ] section
4.4.1 Formats
Materials, which are used to define 3-dimensional geometry, are defined in this section. The defined materials
are refered to some sections such as [cell] section.
The [material] section is defined by material number, elements (or nuclides), and their composition ratios.
Following a material number, element symbols and their ratios should be alternately written to define a compoundor mixture. The format is as follows:[ M a t e r i a l ]MAT[n]
element

ratio

element

ratio

...

...

Two formats to specify material numbers can be used as follows: MAT[n] and Mn, where n is a material number.
Use any number from 1 to 99999. Note that a blank space cannot be set between MAT and [ in the format MAT[n].
The following comment marks can be used: #, %, !, $. Although version 2.88 or before, c can be also used
as comment marks, after version 2.89, it is not permitted in the default setting. When you use c as comment marksin this section, set icommat=1 in [parameters] section. Note that the [parameters] section with icommat=1
should be written above (before) the [material] section including c. File including and variable definition canbe used in this section.

4.4.2 Element (nuclide) definition
The element in the above format can be specified using element symbols. To define nuclide (isotope), add its
mass number to the symbol as follows: 208Pb, Pb-208, or 82208. For instance, hydrogen is defined as 1H,
H-1, or 1001. The natural abundance of isotopes can be defined using only an element symbol or a no-massstyle as, e.g., Pb, 82000. Note that the natural isotope ratio format cannot be used for an isotope not included in
the nuclear data library JENDL-4.0.
To use nuclear data libraries other than JENDL-4.0, copy all addresses of the new library and then paste it at
the end of the address file file(7) (D=xsdir). When setting the new library of low-energy neutrons (below
20MeV) other than JENDL-4.0, specify the “library id” in each material number by NLIB parameter, which isshown in Table 4.62. The “library id” consists of the library number (double-digit) and data class (character a-z).
For example, 50c for the low-energy neutron data library of JENDL-4.0. The libraries of photons, electrons, andprotons can be also specified by PLIB, ELIB, HLIB, respectively. The library id can be specified by nuclide
instead of by material number following the element definition and a period as, e.g., 208Pb.50c, Pb-208.50c,
or 82208.50c. In PHITS, only one type of the library should be used for each incident particle, and the id shouldbe specified by the NLIB, PLIB, ELIB, HLIB parameters. Only for neutrons, the second library can be used;in this case, after specifying the library id by NLIB, define the nuclide by the expression of 208Pb.50c. If thelibrary id is not specified by the user, PHITS searches the address file file(7) (D = xsdir) from the top line
for the library number id corresponding to the nuclide and uses the corresponding data library. Information on thedata library used in a PHITS calculation is written in the summary output file file(6) (D=phits.out) when
kmout=1 is set in the [parameters] section.
When using EGS5, restrict the number of elements (not nuclides) in one material number to 20.

4.4.3 Composition ratio definition
The composition ratios of the defined elements are given in ratio in the above format. Two ways are available
for the ratio definition: if ratio takes a positive value, it means atomic ratio; for negative value, it does mass ratio.
For instance, water (H2 O) can be defined as follows:
MAT[1] H 2
orO 1

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

102

MAT[1] H -2/18

O -16/18

In the latter case, the mass ratios of hydrogen and oxygen are given as about 2/18 and 16/18, respectively, because
the molecular mass of the water is about 18.
The material densities used in transport calculations are given in the [cell] section. Note that material densities must be defined in the [material] section instead of composition ratios when using letmat parameterin [t-deposit], [t-deposit2], [t-let], [t-sed] sections. In this case, if it takes a positive value, theparticle density is [1024 atoms/cm3 ], and for negative value, it is given as a mass density [g/cm3 ].

4.4.4 Material parameters
For regions in which nuclear data are used, the material parameters for each material can be set using the format
keyword=value. The parameters can be set anywhere in the material subsection. The full set of material parameters
is listed in Table 4.62.
Table 4.62: Material parametersparameter
GAS

ESTEP
NLIB
PLIB
ELIB
HLIB
COND

value
D = 0
= 0
= 1
= n
= id
= id
= id
= id
< 0
= 0
> 0

4.4.5

explanation
Density eﬀect correction to electron stopping power
Appropriate for materials in the condensed (solid or liquid) state used
Appropriate for material in the gaseous state
Make sub step number n for electron transport:
ignored when n is smaller than the built-in default value
Change default neutron library number id
Change default photon library number id
Change default electron library number id
Change default proton library number id
Conductor settings
Non-conductor(default) Non-conductor if there exists at least 1 non-conductor; otherwise, conductor.
Conductor if there exists at least 1 conductor.

S (α, β) settings

In the transport of low-energy neutrons, the S (α, β) library may be required. This library can be set as follows:
MTn materialID
where n is the material number and materialID is the ID number, such as lwtr.20t, written in “xsdir”. See\XS\tsl\tsl-table for detailed information for these data.

4.4 [ Material ] section

103

4.4.6 Examples
Some examples are shown below.
Example 7: material example (1)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:

[ M a t e r i a l ]MAT[ 1 ]
1H
1.0000000E-04
208Pb
1.7238000E-02
204Pb
4.6801000E-04
206Pb
7.9430000E-03
207Pb
7.2838000E-03
MAT[ 2 ]1H
1.0000000E-09
14N
4.6801000E-05
16O
7.9430000E-06

By default, the order is element, then ratio; these can be specified in reverse by putting den and nuc as,
Example 8: material example (2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:

[ M a t e r i a l ]dennuc
MAT[ 1 ]1.0000000E-04
1H
1.7238000E-02
208Pb
4.6801000E-04
204Pb
7.9430000E-03
206Pb
7.2838000E-03
207Pb
MAT[ 2 ]1.0000000E-09
1H
4.6801000E-05
14N
7.9430000E-06
16O<------

Example 9: material example (3)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

[ M a t e r i a l ]m1
80196.49c 5.9595d-5
80198.49c 3.9611d-3
80199.49c 6.7025d-3
80200.49c 9.1776d-3
80201.49c 5.2364d-3
80202.49c 1.1863d-2
80204.49c 2.2795d-3
c...Be...
m3
4009.37c 1.2362E-1
mt3
be.01
c
...h2o (25C)...
m4
1001.37c 6.6658d-2
8016.37c 3.3329d-2
mt4
lwtr.01c...b4c (natural boron; 25%-density)...
m5
6012.37c 6.8118d-3
5011.37c 2.1825d-2c...liquid-h2 (20K)...
m6
1001.49c 3.1371d-2
1011.49c 1.0457d-2
mt6
orthoh.00
parah.00

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

104

4.5 [ Surface ] section
4.5.1 Formats
In this section, surfaces can be set to define cells in the [cell] section. You can set several surfaces such asplanes, sphere surfaces, cylindrical surfaces, and so on by giving parameters in equations of the shapes. Only C
and $ can be used as a comment mark. File including and variable definition can be used in this section. If you
want to use continuation lines, it is enough to put more than 4 blanks at the line head instead of the line sequential
mark at the end of line.
The [surface] section is defined in order by the data: surface number, coordinate transform number, surface
symbol, and surface definition. These are explained in Table 4.63. The format is shown below.

[ S u r f a c e ]surface number

transform number

surface symbol

surface definition

As a surface symbol, you can specify surfaces expressed by equations in Table 4.64 or macro body in Table
4.64. You can use mathematical expressions and user defined variables in the surface definition. You can also use
reflective and white boundary conditions by writing “*” and “+”, respectively, before the surface number. For
example, “*10” indicates that surface 10 is a reflective boundary. The reflective boundary condition is useful todevelop an infinite repeated structure.

Table 4.63: Surface Definition Format
item
surface number
transform number
surface symbol
surface definition

explanation
You can use any number from 1 to 999999.
Specify the number n of TRn defined in [transform] section.
Not specify it when you don’t use coordinate transform.
Specify a surface symbol in Tables 4.64 and 4.65.
Speciry parameters of 1 ∼ 15 inputs, which depend on thesurface symbol.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

105

Table 4.64: Surfaces Expressed by Equations
Surface Symbol

Type

Explanation

Equation

Parameters

P
PX
PY
PZ
P

plane

Ax + By + Cz − D = 0
x−D=0
y−D=0
z−D=0

SO
S
SX
SY
SZ
C/X
C/Y
C/Z
CX
CY
CZ
K/X
K/Y
K/Z
KX
KY
KZ

spheremulti-purpose
vertical with X-axis
vertical with Y-axis
vertical with Z-axis
defined by
3 coordinatesorigin is center
multi-purpose
center on X-axis
center on Y-axis
center on Z-axis
parallel with X-axis
parallel with Y-axis
parallel with Z-axison X-axis
on Y-axis
on Z-axis
parallel with X-axis
parallel with Y-axis
parallel with Z-axison X-axis
on Y-axis
on Z-axis

A, B, C, D
D
DD
x1 , y1 , z1 , x2 , y2 , z2 ,x3 , y3 , z3R
x0 , y0 , z0 , R
x0 , Ry0 , Rz0 , Ry0 , z0 , R
x0 , z0 , R
x0 , y0 , R
R
R
R
x0 , y0 , z0 , |t|2 , k
x0 , y0 , z0 , |t|2 , k
x0 , y0 , z0 , |t|2 , k
x0 , |t|2 , k
y0 , |t|2 , k
z0 , |t|2 , k
k is ±1 or unspecified
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, x0 , y0 , z0

SQ

GQ

TX
TY
TZ

plane

cylindercone

ellipse,hyperboloid,
paraboloid
cylinder,cone,
ellipse,hyperboloid,
paraboloid
ellipse torus
torus

x2 + y2 + z2 − R2 = 0(x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2 + (z − z0 )2 − R2 = 0(x − x0 )2 + y2 + z2 − R2 = 0
x2 + (y − y0 )2 + z2 − R2 = 0
x2 + y2 + (z − z0 )2 − R2 = 0(y − y0 )2 + (z − z0 )2 − R2 = 0(x − x0 )2 + (z − z0 )2 − R2 = 0(x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2 − R2 = 0
y 2 + z2 − R2 = 0
x 2 + z2 − R2 = 0
x2 + y2 − R2 = 0√22√(y − y0 ) + (z − z0 ) ∓ |t| (x − x0 ) = 022√(x − x0 ) + (z − z0 ) ∓ |t| (y − y0 ) = 0
2(x − √x0 ) + (y − y0 )2 ∓ |t| (z − z0 ) = 0
22√y + z ∓ |t| (x − x0 ) = 022√x + z ∓ |t| (y − y0 ) = 0
2x + y2 ∓ |t| (z − z0 ) = 0

parallel with
X-, Y-,or Z- axis
non parallel with
X-, Y- andZ-axisA(x − x0 )2 + B(y − y0 )2 + C(z − z0 )2+2D(x − x0 ) + 2E(y − y0 ) + 2F(z − z0 )+G = 0Ax2 + By2 + Cz2 + Dxy + Eyz+Fzx + Gx + Hy + Jz + K = 0

parallel with
X-, Y-, orZ-axis(x − x0 )2 /B2 +2( (y − y0 ) + (z − z0 )2 − A)2 /C 2 − 1 = 0(y − y0 )2 /B2 +√2( (x − x0 ) + (z − z0 )2 − A)2 /C 2 − 1 = 0(z − z0 )2 /B2 +√( (x − x0 )2 + (y − y0 )2 − A)2 /C 2 − 1 = 0√

A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, J, K

x0 , y0 , z0 , A, B, C
x0 , y0 , z0 , A, B, C
x0 , y0 , z0 , A, B, C

When you use surfaces, which are defined in [surface] section, in [cell] section, inside of the shape should
be basically specified as “negative sense”, and its outside should be done as “positive sense”. Note that in the caseof unclosed shapes such as planes, you have to distinguish which side of the plane is “positive” or “negative” bycalculating a value of f (x, y, z) at a point (x0 , y0 , z0 ), where f (x, y, z) is an equation of the unclosed shape. If
f (x0 , y0 , z0 ) > 0, the side including the point is “positive”, and if f (x0 , y0 , z0 ) < 0, the side is “negative”. For
example, in the case of PY with D = 5, the side including the origin (0, 0, 0) is “negative” because f (0, 0, 0) =−5 < 0.
You can define a plane by setting x, y, z-coordinates of 3 points with the symbol P. In this case, a region
including the origin is of negative sense.
The cone defined by x0 , y0 , or z0 has two sheets as the center being the coordinate of the top along the directionof each axis. If you set to be 1 for k, the upper sheet is used, and the lower sheet is used in the case of −1. Whenk is not specified, both sheets are used. It should be noted that you have to use a plane passing the top when you
define a region in [cell] section using only one side of the cones; you have to use three surface, a plane passing
the top, a side sheet of the cone, and an underside of the cone, in the definition.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

106

When you use TX,TY,TZ to define ellipse torus or torus, you cannot transform their coordinates by setting[transform] section.
Table 4.65: Macro Body
SymbolType

BOX

Optional BOX(all angles are 90◦ )RPP

Rectangular solid(Each surface is verticalwith x, y, z axes)
Sphere(the same with general sphere S)

SPH

RCC

Cylinder

RHP
or
HEX

Optional hexagonal prism
Prism

REC

Right elliptical cylinder

TRC

Truncated right-angle cone

ELL

Ellipsoid of revolution(Spheroid)

WED

Wedge

Parameters

Explanation

x0 , y0 , z0 ,A x , Ay , Az ,Bx , By , Bz ,C x , Cy , Cz
xmin , xmax ,ymin , ymax ,zmin , zmax
x0 , y0 , z0 ,Rx0 , y0 , z0 ,H x , Hy , Hz ,R
x0 , y0 , z0 ,H x , Hy , Hz ,A x , Ay , Az ,Bx , By , Bz ,C x , Cy , Cz
x0 y0 z0 ,H x , Hy , Hz ,A x , Ay , Az ,Bx , By , Bz
x0 , y0 , z0 ,H x , Hy , Hz ,R1 ,R2
If R > 0,x1 , y1 , z1 ,x2 , y2 , z2 ,R

Base point coordinate
Vector from base point to first surface.
Vector from base point to second surface.
Vector from base point to third surface.
Minimum and Maximum of x.
Minimum and Maximum of y.
Minimum and Maximum of z.
Center coordinate.
Radius.
Center coordinate of bottom face.
Height vector from center of bottom face to that of top face.
Radius.
Base point coordinate.
Height vector from base point.
Vector from base point to first surface.
Vector from base point to second surface.
Vector from base point to third surface.
Center coordinate of bottom face.
Height vector from center of bottom face (H).
Major axis vector of ellipse orthogonal to H (A).
Minor axis vector of ellipse orthogonal to H and A (B).
Center coordinate of bottom face of cone.
Height vector from center of bottom.
Radius of bottom face.
Radius of top face.

If R < 0,In this case, ellipsoid is made by rotating on major axis.
You can set to be major axis < minor axis.
Center coordinate of ellipsoid.
Major axis vector.
Radius of minor axis.
Coordinate of top.
Vector to first side of triangle ( A).
Vector to socond side of triangle (B).
Height vector (H).

x0 , y0 , z0 ,A x , Ay , Az ,R
x0 , y0 , z0 ,A x , Ay , Az ,Bx , By , Bz ,H x , Hy , Hz

Coordinate of first focus.
Coordinate of second focus.
Radius of major axis.

You cannot set R2 to 0 in definition of TRC. If you want to define a usual cone, i.e. not truncated cone, using
TRC, you should set R2 to a small value.
The bottom of the wedge defined by WED must be a right triangle. When you make a arbitrary triangle, youhave to combine right triangles various sizes.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

107

4.5.2 Examples
This section shows examples of the surface definition listed in Table 4.64 and 4.65.
Example 10: Example of Plane (1)1:2:[surface]
1
PY

5

z

PX,PY,PZ define planes perpendicular to x, y, z axes, respectively.
In this example, a plane of surface number 1, which is y = 5 andperpendicular to y axis, is defined by setting the symbol to be PY andthe parameter to be D = 5. The surface number 1 corresponds to aplane denoted by dashed line in Fig.4.12.

5

x

y

y=5
Figure 4.12: The plane of y = 5 defined in
Example 10.

Example 11: Example of Plane (2)
1:
2:
3:

[surface]
1
P
2
P

2 2 1
5 0 0

10
0 5 0

0 0 10You can define arbitrary planes by specifying P as the symbol.
In this case, there are two kinds of the description to define theplane. One is to give the four parameters A, B, C, D in an equation
Ax + By + Cz − D = 0, and the other is to set x, y, z-coordinates of
3 points, (x1 , y1 , z1 ), (x2 , y2 , z2 ), (x3 , y3 , z3 ). You can use the former
kind when you know a normal vector (s, t, u) of the plane and x, y, zcoordinates of a point, (x0 , y0 , z0 ), on the plane. An equation of theplane satisfying these conditions is given ass(x − x0 ) + t(y − y0 ) + u(z − z0 ) = 0.

(6)

z
10

5
x

y

5
2x+2y+z-10=0

Because we havesx + ty + uz − (sx0 + ty0 + uz0 ) = 0,

Figure 4.13: The plane defined in Exam(7) ple 11.

we can define an arbitrary plane by setting A = s, B = t, C = u, D = sx0 + ty0 + uz0 . The surface number 1
shown in Example 11 is defined as a plane having the normal vector (2, 2, 1) and passing the coordinate (5, 0, 0).
This surface corresponds to a plane denoted by dashed line in Fig.4.13. In the latter kind, you specify x, y, zcoordinates of 3 points. The surface number 2 in Example 11 is defined as a plane passing the 3 coordinates(5, 0, 0), (0, 5, 0), (0, 0, 10). This surface is the same as that of the surface 1.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

108

Example 12: Example of Sphere Surface
1:
2:
3:
4:

[surface]
1
SO
2
SZ
3
S

5
10 3
10 10 03z
When you define sphere surfaces, you specify
Surface Number 2
the symbols SO,SX,SY,SZ,S. You can use SO
to define a sphere surface centered at the origin
10with specifying its radius R as a parameter. In
Surface Number 1
10
the 2nd line of Example 12, a sphere surfaceycentered at the origin with a radius of 5 cm isSurface Number 3
defined as the surface number 1. The symbols
10
SX,SY,SZ can be used to define sphere surfaces
centered on x, y, z axes, respectively. You havex
to specify two parameters, a coordinate valueon the axis and a radius of the sphere. In the 3rdline of Example 12, a sphere surface centered at Figure 4.14: The three sphere surfaces defined in Example 12.
the coordinate (0, 0, 10), which is a point on the z axis, with a radius of 3 cm is defined as the surface number 2.
When you define a sphere surface centered at an arbitrary coordinate (x0 , y0 , z0 ), you can use the symbol S. In
this case, you have to specify four parameters, the coordinate values x0 , y0 , z0 , and the radius R. In the 4th line of
Example 12, a sphere surface centered at the coordinate (10, 10, 0) with a radius of 3 cm is defined as the surface
number 3. The three sphere surfaces defined in Example 12 are shown in Fig.4.14.

Example 13: Example of Cylinder Surface
1:
2:
3:

[surface]
1
CY
2
C/Y

5
15 0

3

z
When you define a cylinder surface having a central axis of x, y, z
Surface Number 1
axes, you specify the symbol CX,CY,CZ, respectively. In this case,
you have to specify its radius R as a parameter. In the 2nd line of
Example 13, a cylinder surface having a central axis of the y axis with
R=5
a radius of 5cm is defined. This surface corresponds to the surfaceof the cylinder shown in the right-upper side of Fig.4.15. You can
R=3 y
use the symbols C/X,C/Y,C/Z, when you define cylinder surfacesxhaving a central axis parallel to x, y, z axes, respectively. In this case,
you have to specify two coordinate values and a radius of the cylinder.
Surface Number 2
In the 3rd line of Example 13, a cylinder surface having a central axis
parallel to the y axis is defined. The two coordinate values x0 = Figure 4.15: The two cylinder surfaces de15, z0 = 0 are specified as the 1st and 2nd parameters, respectively, fined in Example 13.
and the radius is given as the 3rd parameter. This surface corresponds
to the surface of the cylinder in the left-lower side of Fig.4.15.
If you define a cylinder surface having a central axis NOT parallel to x, y, z axes, you can use the symbol GQ.
However, it is easier to use CX,CY,CZ,C/X,C/Y,C/Z with a coordinate transformation by [transform] section
than to use GQ.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

109

Example 14: Example of Cone Surface
1:
2:
3:

[surface]
1
KZ
2
K/Z

0 1
0 20 0

1/3

1

You can define cone surfaces having a central axis of x, y, z axes by specifying the symbols KX,KY,KZ, respectively.
As parameters, you have to give a coordinate value, an angle parameter |t|2 , and a sheet parameter k (omissible).
An example specifying KZ is shown in the 2ndzline of Example 14, The first parameter is the zcoordinate of the vertex of the cone, z0 = 0, and the
45oSurface Number 2
second one is |t|2 = 1. The equation of KZ is
30o√
Surface Number 1
x2 + y2 ∓ |t| (z − z0 ) = 0.
(8)
After substituting each parameters, we obtain theequations shown below.
√
x2 + y2 − z = 0, (z > 0)(9)√x2 + y2 + z = 0, (z < 0)
(10)

20
x

y

Figure 4.16: The cone surface defined in Example 14.

In this case, a surface of the surface number 1 is defined as the cone surface having a central axis of the z axis withthe vertex at (0, 0, 0). This surface corresponds to the cone shown in the left side of Fig.4.16. The cone in the regionof z > 0 is represented by Eq. (9), and that in z < 0 is by Eq. (10). The surfaces in z > 0 and z < 0 can be specified
by k = 1 and k = −1, respectively. Note that k is not specified in the 2nd line of the example. In this case, both
two surfaces are defined. The parameter |t|2 has a relation of |t|2 = tan2 θ, where θ is the angle between the central
axis and the generating line. In the case of the surface number 1, tan θ = 1, therefore, θ = 45◦ . When you define
cone surfaces having a central axis parallel to x, y, z axes and a vertex of the coordinate (x0 , y0 , z0 ), you specify thesymbols K/X,K/Y,K/Z. In the 3rd line of Example 14, an example specifying K/Z is shown. The coordinate of thevertex is (0, 20, 0).√This cone has a central axis parallel to the z axis. The angle θ is = 30◦ , because of |t|2 = 1/3,
namely tan θ = 1/ 3. In this case, only one cone surface in the region of z > 0 is defined by specifying k = 1.

Example 15: Example of Ellipsoid Surface
1:
2:[surface]
1SQ

1/9**2 1/6**2 1/3**2

0 0 0

-1

0 0 0

z

When you define an ellipsoid surface as shown in Fig.4.17, you specify thesymbol SQ. An equation of ellipsoid surfaces is given asx2 y2 z2++
=1
a2 b2 c2

a=9

(11)

x

c=3
b=6
y

where a, b, c are lengths of the semi-principal axes along x, y, z axes, respectively. Therefore, you can define an ellipsoid surface by specifying fromthe 1st to the 7th parameters of SQ as A = 1/a2 , B = 1/b2 , C = 1/c2 , Figure 4.17: The ellipsoid surface
D = E = F = 0, and G = −1. In Example 15, an ellipsoid surface with defined in Example 15.
the lengths of a = 9, b = 6, c = 3 cm is defined. If you want to define a
spheroid surface, you have to specify so that the two lengths along the two axes other than the rotational axis havethe same value. For example, in the case that the x axis is the rotational axis, you have to set b = c, namely B = C.
The 8,9,10th parameters of SQ correspond to the coordinate of the center (x0 , y0 , z0 ), respectively. In Example 15,
the center of the ellipsoid is the origin (0, 0, 0). Note that if you set D, E, F to non-zero value, you define quadricsurfaces other than ellipsoid surfaces.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

110

Example 16: Example of Hyperboloid Surface
1:
2:
3:

[surface]
1
SQ
2
SQ

1/6**2 1/3**2 -1/5**2 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0-1/6**2 -1/3**2 1/5**2 0 0 0 -1 0 20 0

By specifying the symbol SQ, you can define hyperboloid surfaces as shown in the center and right side of Fig.4.18.
The surface in the center is called hyperboloid of one sheet, and those in the right side are hyperboloid of two sheets.
Equations of the hyperboloid of one and two sheets are given as, respectively,
x2 y2 z2
z=0+−
= 1, (12)z
a2 b2 c2
2
2
2
y
z
x
− 2 − 2 + 2 = 1. (13)
b=3
a
b
c

y
Here, the central axis is the z axis.
a=6
If a = b, the shape is called a hy(0,20,0)
perboloid of revolution. The surfacexxnumber 1 defined in the 2nd line ofy
Example 16 corresponds to the hyperboloid of one sheet shown in thecenter of Fig.4.18. In the 2nd line,
Figure 4.18: The hyperboloid surface defined in Example 16.
from the 1st to the 7th parameters of
SQ are given as A = 1/62 , B = 1/32 , C = −1/52 , D = E = F = 0, and G = −1. The central axis is the z axis. Thisaxis passes through the origin because from the 8th to the 10th parameters are set as x0 = 0, y0 = 0, z0 = 0. Theintersection line of this hyperboloid with a plane vertical to the z axis is an ellipse. The figure in the left side of
Fig.4.18 shows the intersection line of the surface number 1 with the plane z = 0. This ellipse has the major andminor radii of a = 6 cm and b = 3 cm, respectively. The surface defined in the 3rd line of Example 16 corresponds
to the hyperboloid of two sheets shown in the right side of Fig.4.18. In this case, the signs of a, b, c of the surface
number 1 are reversed, and D = E = F = 0 and G = −1 are specified to define the hyperboloid of two sheets.
Note that the central axis passes through the coordinate (0, 20, 0) by setting (x0 , y0 , z0 ) = (0, 20, 0) as the 8,9,10th
parameters. When a surface of a hyperboloid of two sheets is used to define a cell in [cell] section, a region of
the coordinate (x0 , y0 , z0 ) is “negative sense”, and the other region is “positive sense”. Therefore, the inside of thetwo sheets shown in the right side of Fig.4.18 should be specified as “positive”.

Example 17: Example of Paraboloid Surface
1:
2:[surface]
1SQ

1 1/2**2 0

0 0 -100 0 0

When you define a paraboloid surface as shown in Fig.4.19, you specify the symbol SQ as described in Example 17.
An equation of azparaboloid surface
y=0
x=0
with the central axiszzof the z axis isgiven as2z=x2z= 41 y 22xyz = 2 + 2 . (14)
a
b

x

x

y
y

Therefore, you candefine such surface
Figure 4.19: The paraboloid surface defined in Example 17.
by specifying A =1/a2 , B = 1/b2 , C = 0, D = E = 0, F = −1, and G = 0 as from the 1st to the 7th parameters of SQ. In the example,
the paraboloid with a = 1, b = 2 is defined. The intersection line of this paraboloid with a plane including the zaxis is a parabola. The intersection lines of the paraboloid with y = 0 and x = 0 are shown in the left and rightpanels of Fig.4.19, respectively. The coordinate of the vertex can be specified by 8,9,10th parameters. In this case,x0 = 0, y0 = 0, z0 = 0 are set.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

111

Example 18: Example of GQ
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

[surface]
set: c1[30]set: c2[cos(c1/180*pi)]
set: c3[sin(c1/180*pi)]
1GQc2**2 1/2**2 c3**2

0 0 -2*c2*c3-c3 0 -c20z
You can define arbitrary surfaces expressed by quadratic equations of x, y, z
by specifying the symbol GQ. Although there are the similar surfaces suchas CX,KX,SQ, which are also expressed by quadratic equations, GQ can represent quadratic surfaces having a central axis NOT parallel to x, y, z axes.
Note that it is easier to use CX,KX,SQ with a coordinate transformation by[transform] section than to use GQ. Example 18 represents a paraboloidysurface obtained by rotating the surface of Example 17 an angle of 30◦
x
around the y axis. The result is shown in Fig.4.20. The parameters of thisexample were obtained by calculating the following equations. When a coordinate (x′ , y′ , z′ ) is defined by rotating a coordinate (x, y, z) an angle of θ Figure 4.20: The paraboloid suraround y axis, the relation between the two coordinates is given as,
face defined in Example 18.
  ′   x   cos θ 0 sin θ   x  
 ′  
01
0   y  .
(15)
 y  =  z− sin θ 0 cos θz′
From this relation, we can obtain  
 x   cos θ y  =  0  
sin θ
z


 

0 − sin θ   x′   x′ cos θ − z′ sin θ   ′  
y′
1
0
 .
  y  = ′′′x sin θ + z cos θz
0 cos θ(16)

After substitution of this result in Eq. (14), we obtain the following equation of x′ , y′ , z′ .
x′ sin θ + z′ cos θ=x′ sin θ + z′ cos θ=x′ sin θ + z′ cos θ=0 =(x′ cos θ − z′ sin θ)2 y′ 2
+ 2,
a2
b
2
′2
2
′2
x cos θ + z sin θ − 2x′ z′ cos θ sin θ y′ 2
+ 2,
a2
b
cos2 θ ′ 2 sin2 θ ′ 2 2 cos θ sin θ ′ ′ y′ 2
x + 2 z −xz + 2,a2
aa2
bcos2 θ ′ 2 1 ′ 2 sin2 θ ′ 2 2 cos θ sin θ ′ ′x + 2y + 2 z −x z − x′ sin θ − z′ cos θ
a2
b
a
a2

(17)

After comparing this result with the equation of GQ in Table 4.64 and specifying their parameters, we can define aparaboloid surface rotated θ around y axis. In this example, θ = 30◦ is given as a constant c1. Constants c2,c3 arealso defined as sin θ, cos θ, respectively.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT112

Example 19: Example of Torus Surface
1:
2:[surface]
1
TZ

0 0 0

10 3 5

A torus surface as shown in the center of Fig.4.21 can be obtained by rotating an ellipse around a rotational
axis outside the ellipse. In PHITS, you can define torus surfaces having the rotational axis of the x, y, z axes byspecifying the symbols TX,TY,TZ, respectively. An equation of a torus surface with the rotational axis of the z axis
is given as,(√

x2 + y2 − R

)2

a2

+

z2
= 1.
b2

(18)

In this case, the ellipse has the major and minor radii of a and b, respectively, and a distance between the centerof the ellipse and the rotational axis is given by R. The torus surface in Example 19 has the center of the origin
by setting all the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd parameters of TZ to 0. The 4,5,6th parameters are given as A = R = 10cm,
B = b = 3cm, and C = a = 5cm, respectively. The intersection line of the torus with the plane z = 0 is shown in
the left panel of Fig.4.21. The distance between the z axis and the center of the ellipse is 10 cm, and the width of
the ring is 5 · 2 = 10 cm. The intersection line of the torus with y = 0 is shown in the right panel of Fig.4.21. Notethat only the region of x > 0 is shown. The major and minor radii of the ellipse are 5 and 3 cm, respectively.

z=0

y

y=0

z

z
a=5

x

R=10

x
b=3

a=5

R=10

y

x

Figure 4.21: The torus surface defined in Example 19.

Example 20: Example of BOX
1:
2:[surface]
1
BOX

5 5 0

9 0 0

0 6 0

0 0 3

By specifying the symbol BOX, you can define surfaces ofan arbitrary rectangular solid. As parameters of BOX, youhave to give a coordinate of the base point P(x0 , y0 , z0 ),and each components of three vectors A(A x , Ay , Az ),B(Bx , By , Bz ), and C(C x , Cy , Cz ). Figure 4.22 shows the relation between the basepoint and the three vectors. In Example 20, the coordinate of the basepoint is (5, 5, 0), andthe three vectors are given as A = (9, 0, 0), B = (0, 6, 0),
and C = (0, 0, 3). When you use BOX, vectors A, B, C
don’t have to be parallel to x, y, z axes, however, the vectors should be vertical to each other.

z
C(Cx,Cy,C z)=(0,0,3)P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(5,5,0)x
A(Ax ,Ay ,Az )=(9,0,0)y
B(Bx ,By ,Bz )=(0,6,0)Figure 4.22: The rectangular surface defined in Example 20.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

113

Example 21: Example of RPP
1:
2:[surface]
1
RPP

5 14

5 11

0 3

When you define surfaces of a rectangular solid surrounded bythree sets of two planes parallel to xy, yz, zx planes, you can use
the symbol RPP. Unlike BOX, an arbitrary rectangular solid having
surfaces NOT parallel to x, y, z axes cannot be defined. You haveto determine six parameters of RPP, the maximum and minimum
values for the x, y, z coordinates. In Example 21, xmin = 5, xmax =14, ymin = 5, ymax = 11, and zmin = 0, zmax = 3 are specified as the
six parameters. The result is the same rectangular solid as definedin Example 20, and shown in Fig.4.23.

zzmax=3zmin=0xmin=5ymin=5ymax=11yxmax=14x
Figure 4.23: The rectangular surface definedin Example 21.

Example 22: Example of SPH
1:
2:[surface]
1
SPH

5 5 5

5

z

You can define a sphere surface with a center of an arbitrary coordinate by the symbol SPH. The 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters are components of the coordinate (x0 , y0 , z0 ), and the 4th parameter is aradius of the sphere. The sphere surface with the center of thecoordinate (5, 5, 5) and the radius of 5 cm is defined in Example
22. There is no diﬀerence between SPH and the symbol S.

R =5

z0=5

y0=5
y

x 0=5
x
Figure 4.24:
Example 22.

The sphere surface defined in

Example 23: Example of RCC
1:
2:[surface]
1
RCC

5 5 0

0 0 105

By specifying the symbol RCC, you can define an arbitrary cylinder surface. Parameters of RCC are components of the center ofthe bottom P(x0 , y0 , z0 ), those of a vector from the bottom to the
top H(H x , Hy , Hz ), and a radius of the cylinder R. The relation between these parameters is shown in Fig.4.25. In Example 23, thecoordinate P(5, 5, 0) is the center of the bottom circle, the vector
is H = (0, 0, 10), and the radius is 5 cm. Unlike the symbols suchas CX and C/X, it is useful to define a cylinder surface having acentral axis NOT parallel to x, y, z axes.

z

H(Hx ,Hy,Hz )=(0,0,10)

R =5
y
x
P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(5,5,0)
Figure 4.25: The cylinder surface defined in
Example 23.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

114

Example 24: Example of RHP
1:
2:[surface]
1
RHP

0 0 0

0 0 105 0 0

2 -5 0-2 -5 0

To define hexagonal prism surfaces as shown in the right panel of Fig.4.26, you can use the symbol RHP or HEX. As
parameters of the symbols, you have to specify each components of the center coordinate of the bottom P(x0 , y0 , z0 ),those of a vector from the bottom to the top H(H x , Hy , Hz ), and those of three vectors A(A x , Ay , Az ), B(Bx , By , Bz ),C(C x , Cy , Cz ). The three vectors A, B, C are required to define the hexagon of the bottom and top surfaces. The left
panel of Fig.4.26 shows the relation between the point P and the three vectors. Namely, lengths and directions of
perpendicular lines between the point P and the continuous three sides of the hexagon determine the three vectors.
In Example 24, the origin is the center of the bottom, and the height along the z axis of the hexagonal prism is 10
cm. The components of the origin (0, 0, 0) are specified as the 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters of RHP, and those of thevector H(H x , Hy , Hz ) = (0, 0, 10) are given as the 4, 5, 6th parameters. From the 7th to 15th parameters are thex, y, z components of A, B, C. The defined hexagon shown in the left panel of the figure is symmetric with respect
to the y axis.

C(Cx,Cy,Cz )=(-2,-5,0)z=0z

H(Hx ,Hy ,Hz )=(0,0,10)Py
B(Bx ,By ,Bz )yxx=(2,-5,0)A(Ax ,Ay ,Az )=(5,0,0)P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(0,0,0)

Figure 4.26: The hexagonal prism surface defined in Example 24.

Example 25: Example of REC
1:
2:[surface]
1
REC

0 0 0

0 0 10

5 0 0

0 2 0

B(Bx ,By ,Bz )=(0,2,0)
When you define elliptical cylinH(Hx ,Hy ,Hz )=(0,0,10)
der surfaces as shown in thez=0zright panel of Fig.4.27, you specify the symbol REC. ParamePters of REC are each components of the center coordinate
yof the bottom P(x0 , y0 , z0 ), thoseyof a vector from the bottom toxx
the top H(H x , Hy , Hz ), and thoseof two vectors A(A x , Ay , Az ) andP(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(0,0,0)A(Ax ,Ay ,Az )=(5,0,0)
B(Bx , By , Bz ). The relation between the point P and the two
Figure 4.27: The elliptical cylinder surface defined in Example 25.
vectors A and B is shown in theleft panel of Fig.4.27. You haveto define the major and minor axis vectors A and B with an initial point P, which is the center of the ellipse. The
surfaces of the elliptical cylinder having the height along the z axis of 10 cm are defined in Example 25. The centerof the bottom is the origin. The 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters of REC are the components of the origin (0, 0, 0), and the4, 5, 6th parameters are those of the vector H(H x , Hy , Hz ) = (0, 0, 10). The x, y, z components of A and B are given
as from the 7th to 12th parameters. The two vectors A and B are used to form the ellipse shown in the left panelof the figure.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

115

Example 26: Example of TRC
1:
2:[surface]
1
TRC

0 0 0

0 0 105

2

H(Hx ,Hy ,Hz )=(0,0,10)z
You can define surfaces of a truncated right-angle cone asshown in Fig.4.28 by specifying the symbol TRC. As parameR2=2
ters of TRC, you have to specify each components of the center coordinate of the bottom P(x0 , y0 , z0 ), those of a vector
from the bottom to the top H(H x , Hy , Hz ), and two radii of
R1=5
the bottom and top circles, R1 and R2 . In Example 26, theysurfaces of the truncated right-angle cone the height along thex
z axis of 10 cm are defined. The center of the bottom circle
P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(0,0,0)
is the origin. The components of the origin (0, 0, 0) are specified as the 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters, and those of the vector
H(H x , Hy , Hz ) = (0, 0, 10) are given as the 4, 5, 6th parame- Figure 4.28: The cut cone surface defined in Exters. The radius of the bottom is R1 = 5 cm, and that of the ample 26.
top is R2 = 2 cm. The R1 and R2 are specified as the 7 and 8thparameters, respectively.
You cannot set R2 to 0 in definition of TRC. If you want to define a usual cone, i.e. not truncated cone, using
TRC, you should set R2 to a small value.

Example 27: Example of ELL (1)1:2:[surface]
1
ELL

3 3 0

-3 -3 09z=0z
By specifying the symbol ELL, you canP2(x2 ,y2 ,z2)=(-3,-3,0)
define a surface of an ellipsoid of revolution (a spheroid). After defining an
2R=18
P2
ellipse by specifying coordinates of twoyy
focal points or a coordinate of its cenP1
ter, an ellipsoid of revolution is definedby rotating the ellipse around its majorxx
P1(x1 ,y1 ,z1)=(3,3,0)
axis. Note that the meaning of the first
6 parameters of ELL depends on the sign
Figure 4.29: The spheroid surface defined in Example 27.
of the 7th parameter R. Example 27 is
an example of R > 0. In this case, youhave to give the coordinates of the two focal points and a radius of the major axis. The coordinate of the first focus
P1 (x1 , y1 , z1 ) is given as the 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters, and that of the second one P2 (x2 , y2 , z2 ) is as the 4,5,6th
parameters. The 7th parameter is the radius of the major axis R. The surface of the ellipsoid of revolution definedin Example 27 is shown in the right side of Fig.4.29. The first and second focal points are P1 (x1 , y1 , z1 ) = (3, 3, 0)
and P2 (x2 , y2 , z2 ) = (−3, −3, 0), respectively. The ellipse is on the xy plane as shown in the left panel of Fig.4.29.
An angle between the major axis and the x axis is 45◦ . The length of the major axis is 2R = 18 cm. The ellipsoidis defined by rotating this ellipse around the major axis.
Although you can also define an ellipsoid surface by SQ, it is easier to define an ellipsoid having an inclined
rotational axis by ELL than by SQ. Note that you can define only surfaces of ellipsoids of revolution by ELL.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

116

Example 28: Example of ELL (2)1:2:[surface]
1
ELL

0 0 0

6 6 0

-6

z=0
z
Example 28 is an example of R < 0 in
P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(0,0,0)
the symbol ELL. In this case, you have|R|=6
to determine a center coordinate of anellipse P, its major axis A, and a rayyPdius of its minor axis. In this example,
the center of the ellipse corresponds tothe origin. The 1st, 2nd, 3rd paramexxters of ELL are given as P(x0 , y0 , z0 ) =(0, 0, 0), and the 4,5,6th parameters are
A(Ax ,Ay ,Az )=(6,6,0)
as A(A x , Ay , Az ) = (6, 6, 0). The ellipse
defined by these parameters is shown in
Figure 4.30: The spheroid surface defined in Example 28.
the left panel of Fig.4.30. An absolutevalue of the 7th parameter R is 6 cm.
This corresponds to the radius of the minor axis. The ellipsoid surface obtained by rotating this ellipse aroundthe major axis is shown in the right side of Fig.4.30.

Example 29: Example of WED
1:
2:[surface]
1
WED

0 0 0

10 0 00 10 00 0 5

H(Hx ,Hy ,Hz )=(0,0,5)
You can define wedge surfaces as shownz
in Fig.4.31 by specifying the symbol
WED. Note that the bottom of the wedge
B(Bx ,By ,Bz )=(0,10,0)
defined by WED is only a right triangle.
In Example 29, one vertex of the bottom
A(Ax ,Ay ,Az )ytriangle P(x0 , y0 , z0 ) = (0, 0, 0) is givenx
as the 1st, 2nd, 3rd parameters of WED.
=(10,0,0)P(x0 ,y0 ,z0)=(0,0,0)
Two vectors A(A x , Ay , Az ) = (10, 0, 0)
and B(Bx , By , Bz ) = (0, 10, 0) whose initial point is P are specified as from the
Figure 4.31: The wedge surface defined in Example 29.
4th to the 9th parameters. The triangle
defined by the two vectors is the right triangle. The height vector of the wedge H(H x , Hy , Hz ) = (0, 0, 5) is given
as the 10,11,12th parameters.

4.5 [ Surface ] section

117

4.5.3 Surface Definition by Macro Body
In using a surface defined by a macro body in the cell definition, “-” refers to the inside of the macro bodyand “+” is the outside. Each surface comprising a macro body can be used in the cell definition, in which case themacro body surface number should be written as “.” plus the macro body surface number.
The surface numbers are listed in Table 4.66.
Table 4.66: Macro Body Surface Numbers
SymbolBOX

RPP

Macro Body Surface Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6

SPH
RCC

RHP
or
HEX

REC

TRC

ELL
WED

1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5

Explanation
Surface vertical with the end of (A x , Ay , Az ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (A x , Ay , Az ).
Surface vertical with the end of (Bx , By , Bz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (Bx , By , Bz ).
Surface vertical with the end of (C x , Cy , Cz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (C x , Cy , Cz ).
Surface at xmax .
Surface at xmin .
Surface at ymax .
Surface at ymin .
Surface at zmax .
Surface at zmin .
Only a user-defined surface number is used.
Side face of cylinder.
Surface vertical with the end of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Surface vertical with the end of (A x , Ay , Az ).
Opposite face for surface 1.
Surface vertical with the end of (Bx , By , Bz ).
Opposite face for surface 3.
Surface vertical with the end of (C x , Cy , Cz ).
Opposite face for surface 5.
Surface vertical with the end of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Side face of cylinder.
Surface vertical with the end of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Side face of cone.
Surface vertical with the end of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Surface vertical with the origin of (H x , Hy , Hz ).
Only a user-defined surface number is used.
Surface including the top and bottom hypotenuses.
Surface including B and H.
Surface including A and H.
Surface including A, B, and the end of H.
Surface including A, B, and the origin of H.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

118

4.6 [ Cell ] section
4.6.1 Formats
In this section, cells can be defined by surfaces described in the [surface] section. The format for thedefinition is based on the General Geometry (GG). You should set a cell as a closed space, and you can make avirtual space for particle transport calculation by combining the defined cells. In PHITS, an outer region must be
explicitly defined as a cell.
Only C and $ can be used as a comment mark, but the # cannot be used as a comment mark here, since thischaracter is used for the cell definition. File including and variable definition can be used in this section. If you
want to use continuation lines, it is enough to put more than 4 blanks at the line head instead of the line sequential
mark at the end of line.
The [cell] section is defined in order by the data: cell number, material number, material density, celldefinition, and cell parameter as keyword style. These are explained in Table 4.67. The format is shown below.

[ C e l l ]cell numbermat.

numbermat.

densitycell def.

cell parameter

LIKE n BUT cell parameter format and repeated structure with lattice can be used. See Sec. 4.6.5 in which
we describe how to use them with some examples. The cell parameters are listed and explained in Table 4.68.
Table 4.67: cell definition format
item
cell number
material number
material density

cell definition

LIKE n BUT
cell parameter

explanation
You can use any number from 1 to 999999.
Set 0 for void, −1 for the outer region, or material number defined in [material]
section.
If the cell is void or the outer region, no input. When the given value is positive or
negative, it is particle density [1024 atoms/cm3 ] or mass density [g/cm3 ], respectively.
Composition ratios defined in the [material] section are renormalized to the particle
densities given here. Thus diﬀerent density materials, which have the same composition
with original one, can be set in this section. A new parameter matadd is prepared inorder to add diﬀerent material number.
Cell geometry is defined by both surface numbers in the [surface] section
and Boolean operators, ⊔(blank)(AND), :(OR), and #(NOT). Parentheses ( and ) can bealso used. See Sec. 4.6.2 for detail.
A cell using this format is the same as the n cell, except only parameters described
after BUT.
This format is keyword=value. As keyword, VOL(volume), TMP(temperature),
TRCL(transform), U(universe), LAT(lattice), and FILL can be used.
In the LIKE n BUT format, MAT(material) and RHO(density) can be used in addition.

When you define some cells having diﬀerent densities from each other with the same material number, the cells
come to be with other material number except for the first cell.
In operation of the cell definition, ⊔(blank) has a higher priority than :.

4.6 [ Cell ] section

119

Table 4.68: cell parameter
item
VOL
TMP
TRCL
U
LAT
FILL
MAT
RHO

explanation
Volume (cm3 ) of the cell is given.
Temperature (MeV) of the material in the cell is given.
Coordinate transform for position of the cell is done using coordinate transform number definedin the [transform] section or the transform format.
Universe number. Number of the universe including the cell is defined. You can use any number
from 1 to 999999. See Sec. 4.6.3 for detail.
Lattice number. Setting LAT=1 or 2, you can define quadratic prism or hexangular prism,
respectively. See Sec. 4.6.4 for detail.
Set universe numbers to fill the cell with the universe.
This is used with LIKE n BUT MAT=m format. You can define the same cell except that its
material number is m.
This is used with LIKE n BUT RHO=x format. You can define the same cell except that its
density is x.

4.6.2 Description of cell definition
Cells are defined by treating regions divided by surfaces defined in the [surface] section. When you describe
the definition, you need a concept, “surface sense”, to make a distinction between two regions divided by thesurface corresponding to an equation, f (x, y, z) = 0, and Boolean operators, ⊔(blank)(AND), :(OR), and #(NOT),
to treat some regions.
The “surface sense” defines one region including a point (x0 , y0 , z0 ), which gives f (x0 , y0 , z0 ) > 0, as “positive sense”, and the other region as “negative sense”. Then, you write only the surface number in the celldefinition space when you want to use a region of positive sense, and write it with minus symbol, −, when aregion of negative sense. An example for this sense is shown below.
Example 30: [cell] section example (1)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

[ C e l l ]
1
0 -10
2 -1
10
[ S u r f a c e ]10 SZ 3 5

The 10th surface represents a sphere with a radius of 5cm. Because the inside of this sphere is negative sense, the
1st cell is defined by −10. The outer region is explicitly defined as the 2nd cell. This example gives the virtual
space as shown in Fig. 4.32.
10x [cm]

5

0

void

1

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.32: Result of the [cell] section example (1).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

120

When you treat some regions to make the cell definition, Boolean operators are used. Symbols ⊔(blank), :,and # denote intersection (AND), union (OR), and complement (NOT), respectively, as the operators. Parentheses,( and ), can be used to combine some regions. The second example in this section uses ⊔(blank) and #.
Example 31: [cell] section example (2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:

[ C e l l ]1
0 11 -12 13
2 -1 #1[ S u r f a c e ]11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -6
16 PZ
6

-14

15

-16

In the cell definition in the 2nd line, the three numbers without minus symbol correspond to regions of positive
sense of the 11th, 13th, and 15th surfaces, and those with minus correspond to regions of negative sense of the
12th, 14th, and 16th surfaces. Then, a region surrounded by the 6 surfaces is defined with ⊔(blank) as the 1st cell,which is the inside of a 12cm cube. The outside of the cube is defined by the complement operator # as the outerregion. Figure 4.33 shows the result of this example.
10x [cm]

5

0

1

void

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.33: Result of the [cell] section example (2).
The next example uses : and parentheses. The sphere in the 1st example and the cube in the 2nd example are
combined.
Example 32: [cell] section example (3)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:

[ C e l l ]1
0 -10 : (112 -1 #1[ S u r f a c e ]
10 SZ
3 5
11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -6
16 PZ
6

-12

13

-14

15

-16)

A part surrounded by the parentheses in the 2nd line corresponds to the region of the 1st cell in the example (2).
In this example, a region combined inside of the cube and that of the sphere in the example (1) is defined with theunion operator : as the 1st cell. The result is shown in Fig. 4.34.

4.6 [ Cell ] section

121

10

x [cm]

5

0

1

void

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.34: Result of the [cell] section example (3).

In the next example, division of a cube into two regions by a spherical surface is shown.
Example 33: [cell] section example (4)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1[ C e l l ]
1
0
-10
2
1 1.0
10 (11
3 -1#1 #2[ S u r f a c e ]
10 SZ
3 5
11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -6
16 PZ
6

-12

13

-14

15

-16)

This [surface] section is the same of the example (3). In the 5th line, the 2nd cell is defined with ⊔(blank) as anoverlap region between the outside of the sphere, which is the 10th surface, and the inside of the cube defined by
the parentheses. The cell is filled with water defined in the [material] section, and its situation is shown in Fig.
4.35. The inside of the sphere is the 1st cell and void.
10x [cm]

5

0

void

2

−5
−10
−10

water

1

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.35: Result of the [cell] section example (4). The 1st and 2nd cells are filled with void and water,
respectively.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

122

4.6.3 Universe frame
In PHITS, you can define some universes with a cell parameter U. A region of main space for particle transport
calculation is filled with a corresponding region in any universe. This function is very useful to set repeatedstructures introduced in Sec. 4.6.5.
An example using three spaces (one main space and two universes) shown in Fig. 4.36 is explained below. The
main space includes two rectangular solids. One universe has a cylinder filled with water, and the other universe
has an iron cylinder surrounded by water. The 1st cell is filled with a region of the universe 1, and the 2nd cell isfilled with that of the universe 2.
(a) Main space10x [cm]

5

0

1

2

void

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

510(c) Universe 2
10

5

5

0

void
water

101

x [cm]

x [cm](b) Universe 1
10

0

−5

iron

−5
102

−10
−10

water

201

202

−5

0
z [cm]

5

−10
−10

10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.36: (a) Two rectangular solids. (b) Cylinder filled with water. (c) Iron cylinder in water.

Example 34: [cell] section example (5)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[2] Fe 1
[ C e l l ]1 0
11 -12 13
2 0
11 -12 13
101 1 1.0 -10 13 -14102 0#101 U=1
201 2 10.0 -10 13 -14
202 1 1.0 #201 U=2
9 -1
#1 #2
[ S u r f a c e ]10 CY
511 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -6
16 PZ
6
17 PZ
0

-14
-14
U=1
U=2

15
17

-17
-16

FILL=1
FILL=2

4.6 [ Cell ] section

123

The universe 1 and 2 are defined in the 7th, 8th lines and the 9th, 10th lines, respectively, using cell parameter
U. These universes have a similar structure that a cylinder is put at the origin of the coordinate space, but theircomponents of inside or outside of the cylinder are diﬀerent from each other as shown in Fig. 4.36. In the 5th and6th lines, the 1st and 2nd cells are, respectively, defined as regions filled with the corresponding part of the each
universe using cell parameter FILL. The result of this example is shown in Fig. 4.37. One sees that the 1st cellconsists of the 101st and 102nd cells in the universe 1, and the 2nd cell consists the 201st and 202nd cells in theuniverse 2.
10x [cm]

5

0

101

void
water

201

iron

−5

102

−10
−10

−5

202

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.37: Result of the [cell] section example (5).

You cannot use an undefined region in the universe. If the 102nd cell is not defined in the 8th line as a void
region, you cannot fill the 1st cell with the universe 1. In addition, a region in the universe should be slightly larger
than that in the main space in order to avoid geometry errors. Furthermore, you should know that all universes
have the same definition for the coordinate system; position of the origin, directions of x, y, and z-axes, and scaleof the space in any universe agree with those in the other universe. If the diﬀerent value is used for PX in the 14th,
15th lines, the cube does not include a part of the cylinder as shown in Fig. 4.38.
10x [cm]

5

102

202

101

0

void
water

201

iron

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.38: Result of the [cell] section example (5) except that the region is shifted in the x-direction.

4.6.4 Lattice definition
For making repeated structures, a cell parameter LAT (lattice parameter) is very useful. In this section, definitionof a unit structure of the lattice and its simple usage are explained showing some examples. See Sec. 4.6.5 formore practical description.
Quadratic prism and hexangular prism shown in Fig. 4.39 can be used as a unit structure by LAT=1 and LAT=2,
respectively. You make one universe having the repeated structure of the lattice. Then, you fill any region with

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

124

the universe. It is noted that the each unit must also be filled with another universe, which is defined with any
material or void. The numbering each component of the units in Fig. 4.39 corresponds to the order of the surface
number written in the cell definition, and the lattice coordinate system, which will be explained below, depends on
the order.

3
2

LAT=1

5
1

2

3

6

4

4

1

LAT=2

Figure 4.39: Unit structure of lattice.
An example using quadratic prism (LAT=1) is shown below.
Example 35: [cell] section example (6)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1[ C e l l ]1
0
11 -12
13 -14 15 -16 FILL=1
101
0
-26
25 -2221 LAT=1 U=1 FILL=2201
1 1.0 -90 U=2
2 -1#1[ S u r f a c e ]11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -616 PZ
6
21 PX -222 PX
223 PY -224 PY
225 PZ -2
26 PZ
2
90 BOX -10 -10 -10 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 20

In the 5th line, a unit cell with LAT=1 is defined using 4 surface numbers. Setting U=1, the universe 1 is defined byrepeated structures of this unit, which is filled with the universe 2 defined in the 6th line. Because a cross sectionof the unit in the x-z plane has a square 4 cm on a side, the 1st cell defined in the 4th line as a 12 cm cube has
9-blocks as shown in Fig. 4.40. It is noted that the unit has an infinite length in the y direction in the universe 1
because of using only 4 surfaces. If you want to define a prism having a finite length, you have to add -24 23 tothe cell definition in the 5th line.
To distinguish cells in the repeated structure, each cell is on the lattice coordinate (s, t, u) as shown in the rightpanel of Fig. 4.40. Note that directions of this coordinate correspond to those of the usual coordinate (x, y, z),
and are defined by the order of the surface number written in the cell definition. When you specify any cell using
mesh=reg in tally sections, you can use the lattice and universe styles as (201 < 101[-1 0 0] < 1), where thelattice coordinate is represented by [s t u]. See Sec. 5.1.2 for this format as well. You can see lattice coordinates
by the [t-gshow] tally with output=7 or 8.
The next is an example using hexangular prism (LAT=2).
Example 36: [cell] section example (7)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1[ C e l l ]1
0
11 -12 13 -14 15 -16 FILL=1101
0-31 32 -33 34 -35 36 -24 23
201
1 1.0 -90 U=2
2 -1
#1

LAT=2

U=1

FILL=2

4.6 [ Cell ] section

125

20

10
15

x [cm]

5

10(-1,1,0) (0,1,0) (1,1,0)

0(-1,0,0) (0,0,0) (1,0,0)−5(-1,-1,0) (0,-1,0) (1,-1,0)

water

5

−10
−10
0
0

5

10

15

20

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.40: Result of the [cell] section example (6) in 3D (left) and 2D (right) images.

8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:

[ S u r f a c e ]11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -616 PZ
623 PY -2
24 PY
2
set: c1[2]31 PZ [ c1*cos(pi/6)]
32 PZ [-c1*cos(pi/6)]
33 P
1 0 [ 1/tan(pi/3)]
34 P
1 0 [ 1/tan(pi/3)]
35 P
1 0 [-1/tan(pi/3)]
36 P
1 0 [-1/tan(pi/3)]
90 BOX -10 -10 -10 20 0 0

[ c1]
[-c1]
[ c1]
[-c1]
0 20 00 0 20A hexagon with LAT=2 is defined in the 5th line using 6 surfaces defined in the 17th-23th lines. The hexagonal
prism is restricted in the y-direction by -24 23 in the cell definition, and is filled with the universe 2, namely,
water as written in the 6th line. The 1st cell has the repeated structure defined as the universe 1. Figure 4.41 shows
the result of this example. One can see that some prisms near edges of the 1st cell, which is defined as a 12 cm
cube, are only partly used. Directions of the lattice coordinate shown in the right panel depend on the order of thesurface number written in the cell definition. When you specify any cell using mesh=reg in tally sections, you
can use the lattice and universe styles as (201 < 101[-2 0 0] < 1), where the lattice coordinate is represented
by [s t u]. See Sec. 5.1.2 for this format as well. You can see lattice coordinates by the [t-gshow] tally with
output=7 or 8.

4.6.5 Repeated structures
You can use some simple procedures in PHITSto make repeated structures, where the same or similar units are
put repeatedly. Using a lattice parameter explained in Sec. 4.6.4 is one of them, and another is the LIKE n BUT
cell parameter format.
LIKE n BUT cell parameter
Using this format, you can make a little diﬀerent cell from original one. Only elements corresponding to cellparameters written after BUT are diﬀerent from the n cell. Cell parameters that can be used in this format are shownin Table 4.68. In the following example, two cell parameters TRCL and MAT are used.
Example 37: [cell] section example (8)4 SECTIONS FORMAT

126
20

10
15

5

(-3,2,0) (-2,2,0) (-1,2,0) (0,2,0) (1,2,0)x [cm](-2,1,0) (-1,1,0) (0,1,0) (1,1,0)
10

0(-2,0,0) (-1,0,0) (0,0,0)(-1,-1,0) (0,-1,0) (1,-1,0)

−5
5

−5

0
z [cm]

0
5

10

15

(2,-1,0)(-1,-2,0) (0,-2,0) (1,-2,0) (2,-2,0) (3,-2,0)

−10
−10
0

water

(1,0,0) (2,0,0)

20

5

10

Figure 4.41: Result of the [cell] section example (7) in 3D (left) and 2D (right) images.

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[2] Fe 1
[ C e l l ]1
0-10 13 -14 #2 #3 #4
2
1 1.0
11 -12 13 -14 15 -16
3
LIKE 2 BUT TRCL=1
4
LIKE 2 BUT TRCL=2 MAT=2
5 -1#(-10 13 -14)
[ S u r f a c e ]10 CY
1011 PX -212 PX
213 PY -214 PY
2
15 PZ -2
16 PZ
2
[T r a n s f o r m ]*tr1
3 0 -5*tr2
0 0 6 30 90 120 90 0 90 60 90 30

1

A 4 cm cube filled with water is defined in the 6th line, and is put at the origin of the coordinate system. Insideof this cube is the 2nd cell regarded as the original cell in this example. In the 7th and 8th lines, respectively,
the 3rd and 4th cells are defined with the LIKE n BUT format, where n = 2. Figure 4.42 shows the result of
the example. The coordinate system of the 3rd cell is transformed using the cell parameter TRCL=1, where thecoordinate transform number 1 is defined in the 19th line in the [transform] section. That of the 4th cell is alsotransformed with TRCL=2. Moreover, the material inside of the cell is replaced with iron defined as the material
number 2 in the 3rd line.
105x [cm]

3
void

0
−5
−10
−10

4

2

iron
water

1

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.42: Result of the [cell] section example (8).

4.6 [ Cell ] section

127

Nesting structure with lattice
A nesting structure can be used on the basis of universe frame in Sec. 4.6.3. For example, the universe 1 isfilled with the universe 2, and the universe 2 is filled with the universe 3. Moreover, the 3rd can be also filled withanother universe. Then, you can define the nesting structure. The maximum number of the nesting level is 10,
which corresponds to a parameter mxlv given in a file param.inc.
In the next example, there are nine square poles defined with LAT=1, and three of these have a diﬀerent structurefrom the others.
Example 38: [cell] section example (9)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[2] Fe 1
[ C e l l ]1
0
11 -12
13 -14 15 -16 FILL=1
101
0
-26
25 -2221 LAT=1 U=1
FILL=-1:1 -1:1 0:0
2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 2201
1 1.0 -90 U=2301
2 10.0 -10 U=3302
010 U=32 -1#1[ S u r f a c e ]
10 CY
1.5
11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -616 PZ
6
21 PX -222 PX
225 PZ -2
26 PZ
2
90 BOX -10 -10 -10 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 20

Definition of the 1st cell and the unit of lattice in the 5th and 6th lines, respectively, is the same of that in the[cell] section example (6). However, a format of the cell parameter FILL written in the 7th and 8th lines
is diﬀerent. In the 7th line, regions treated in this calculation are given in the lattice coordinate system. The
numbers in the next line correspond to the universe number filling each lattice at (s, t, u), where the order is(−1, −1, 0), (0, −1, 0), (1, −1, 0), (−1, 0, 0), . . . , (1, 1, 0); i.e., a lattice at (−1, −1, 0) is filled with the universe 2 andthat at (1, −1, 0) is filled with the universe 3. The universe 2 is defined in the 9th line as space filled with water.
On the other hand, the universe 3 defined in the 10th and 11th lines has an iron cylinder at the origin. The result of
this example is shown in Fig. 4.43. One can see that three lattices at (1, −1, 0), (0, 0, 0), and (−1, 1, 0) have the iron
cylinder. When you specify any cell using mesh=reg in tally sections, you can use the lattice and universe styles
as (302 < 101[0 0 0] < 1), where the lattice coordinate is represented by [s t u]. See also Sec. 5.1.2 forthis format.
10

5(-1,1,0)(0,1,0)(1,1,0)(-1,0,0) (0,0,0)(0,0,0)(1,0,0)x [cm](-1,1,0)

0
−5
−10
−10

water
void
iron

(-1,-1,0) (0,-1,0) (1,-1,0)(1,-1,0)−50z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.43: Result of the [cell] section example (9).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

128

More complex example is shown below.
Example 39: [cell] section example (10)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[2] Fe 1
[ C e l l ]1
0
11 -12
13 -14 15 -16 FILL=1
101
0
-26
25 -2221 LAT=1 U=1
FILL=-1:1 -1:1 0:0
2 2 3(1 0 1) 2 3(1 0 1) 2 3(1 0 1) 2 2201
1 1.0 -90 U=2
301
0
-36
35 -3231 LAT=1 U=3
FILL=-1:0 -1:0 0:0
4 2 2 4401
2 10.0 -10 U=4402
010 U=42 -1#1[ S u r f a c e ]
10 CY
0.5
11 PX -612 PX
613 PY -614 PY
615 PZ -616 PZ
6
21 PX -222 PX
225 PZ -226 PZ
2
31 PX -132 PX
135 PZ -1
36 PZ
1
90 BOX -10 -10 -10 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 20

The virtual space made by this input is shown in Fig. 4.44. The nine square poles are defined with the lattice
parameter. Furthermore, three of these consist of 4 units of the other lattice. The (1 0 1) in the 8th line denotes
the transformation of the coordinate system that the origin is shifted by 1cm in the x- and z-direction. When you
specify any cell using mesh=reg in tally sections, you can use the lattice and universe styles as (402 < 301[-1-1 0] < 101[0 0 0] < 1), where the lattice coordinate is represented by [s t u]. See also Sec. 5.1.2 for thisformat.
10x [cm]

5
water

0

void
iron

−5
−10
−10

−5

0
z [cm]

5

10

Figure 4.44: Result of the [cell] section example (10).

4.6 [ Cell ] section

129

Voxel phantom
In PHITS, you can make a virtual space using voxel phantom for calculation on complex structures, such as
the human body or organism. First, a little cube is defined as a unit of the lattice with LAT=1. Second, you set a
repeated structure of a large size using the unit. Third, you fill each unit with any universe, which is itself filledwith biological matter, such as compounds of carbon and water.
In an example below, a 10 cm cube consisting of 2cm cubes (voxels) of 5 × 5 × 5 = 125 is described.
Example 40: [cell] section example (11)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:

[ M a t e r i a l ]mat[1] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[2] Fe 1
[ C e l l ]1
0
11 -12
13 -14 15 -16 FILL=1101
0 -20 LAT=1 U=1
FILL=-2:2 -2:2 -2:2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 4 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 4 4 4 3 2 3 3 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 4 3 2 2 2 3 3 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2201
0-90 U=2301
2 10.0 -90 U=3401
1 1.0 -90 U=4
2 -1#1[ S u r f a c e ]11 PX -512 PX
513 PY -514 PY
515 PZ -516 PZ
520 BOX -1 -1 -1 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 2
90 BOX -10 -10 -10 20 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 20

2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2

As a unit of voxel, a 2 cm cube is defined in the 24th line. Furthermore, the 1st cell that is inside of a 10 cm cube has
a repeated structure through definition in the 5th line. The region of the lattice coordinate space is determined in the
7th line. The order of voxel in the 8th-12th lines is as follows: (−2, −2, −2), (−1, −2, −2), . . . , (2, 2, 2) represented
by the lattice coordinate. 2 in the 8th-12th lines means the universe 2, which is void, and 3 and 4, namely theuniverse 3 and 4, correspond to iron and water, respectively. Figure 4.45 represents the result of this example thatis a distorted iron box including water its inside. When you specify any cell using mesh=reg in tally sections, you
can use the lattice and universe styles as (401 < 101[0 0 0] < 1), where the lattice coordinate is represented
by [s t u]. See also Sec. 5.1.2 for this format. It is noted that you cannot use formats as (301 < 101[-2:2-2:2 -2:2] 20< 1) because not all the 101[-2:2 -2:2
-2:2] cell have the 301st cell.
20

15

15

10

10

5

5

0

0

0
5
10
15
5
10
15
20
Figure 4.45: Resultsof the[cell] section
example(11) in020 3D images.
The structurein theright panel
is removed
its iron surface from the original one in the left panel.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

130

For time shortening, you can use ivoxel in the [parameters] section. When you perform PHITS calculation
with ivoxel=2, voxel data are output in file(18) in binary and then the calculation is stopped. From the next
calculation with ivoxel=1, a process of the data output is omitted and the calculation time is shortened. If you
use a very huge voxel data, using infl may become to be convenient.
Use of tetrahedron geometry
In this section, definition and basic usage of tetrahedron geometry are explained showing an example. Tetrahedron geometry is a type of polygon mesh geometry and is able to express complex geometry by combination of
diﬀerent size of tetrahedrons.
Tetrahedron geometry is represented by two files:• Node file (List of xyz space coordinates of tetrahedron nodes).
• Element file (List of 4 nodes’IDs consisting each tetrahedron element).
PHITS postulates that the node file and the element file have a common name with diﬀerent suﬃxes, .node and.ele, respectively. Please see ppt file or sample input file in \phits\utility\TetraGEOM in detail.
An example of the node file and the element file is given below.
Example 41: Example of node file
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

# Simple two elements
5
3 0 0# pointID x y z
10.0 -2.5 -4.0
2
-4.0 -2.5
0.0
3
4.0 -2.5
0.0
4
0.0 -2.5
4.0
5
0.0
2.5
0.0

The node file begins with the number of nodes and the number of dimensions (2nd line). PHITS can deal with only
three-dimensional geometry. The two last zeros in the 2nd line are not used in PHITS. The following lines (below
3rd line) represent a list of nodes and their xyz space coordinates in the order of[node no.] [x] [y] [z]Example 42: Example of element file
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

# Simple two elements
2 4 1# elementID point(1:4) universe
1
1 2 3 55001
2
5 2 3 45002

The element file begins with the number of elements, the number of nodes consisting a tetrahedron (=4 for PHITS),
and the number of information tagged to an element (=1 for PHITS) [2nd line]. The following lines (below 3rdline) represent a list of IDs of 4 nodes consisting each tetrahedron in the order of[element no.] [node 1] [node 2] [node 3] [node4] [element universe no.]The element no. represents the ID of the tetrahedron element. The list of IDs of 4 nodes are specified by the node
No. given in the node file. The element universe no. specifies the universe to fill this tetrahedron element. The
definition of this universe should be given in the PHITS input file (See Example 43). Arbitrary comment lines
starting with “#” can be inserted in any line of the node file and the element file.
The node file and the element file can be created by using a software, Tetrahedral Mesh Generator (TetGen).
By using this software, general polygon mesh data can be converted to tetrahedron geometry with some eﬀort.
TetGen can be obtained fromhttp://wias-berlin.de/software/tetgen/

4.6 [ Cell ] section

131

with free of charge. For details of TetGen, please refer to its manual.
The way to specify the use of tetrahedron geometry in PHITS input file is explained in below.
Example 43: [cell] section example (12)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:

[Material]mat[1] 14N 78.1 16O 20.9 40Ar 0.93
mat[2] 1H 2 16O 1
mat[3] 56Fe 1[Surface]
10 rpp-5.0 5.0 -3.0 3.0 -5.0 5.0
20 rpp-7.0 7.0 -5.0 5.0 -7.0 7.0
90 so
500.0
[Cell]
101
1 -0.001205 -20 U=1 LAT=3 tfile=Tetra
1
0-10 FILL=1
2 -1
10
201
2 -1.0-90 U=5000
202
3 -7.874-90 U=5001

TSFAC=1.0

A region defined in rectangular shape (with surface symbol RPP)
is required and tetrahedron geometry will be expanded in this reNode 4
gion. This region should contain all the nodes of tetrahedrons
but should not be too large to avoid unnecessary computationalcosts. At 10th line, a region with cell no. 101 is defined by arectangular shape specified by surface number 20, a rectangularbox of 14cm×10cm×14cm, the option LAT=3 declares the use of
Element 1
tetrahedron geometry. Tetrahedron geometry defined by the node
Node 2
file and the element file with the name specified by TFILE is exNode 5
Node 3panded in this region. Here it should be noted that upper andlower cases of the file name are distinguished for Mac and Linux.
Element 2
With the factor TSFAC, the size of tetrahedron geometry can bescaled-up or scaled-down. The factor will be multiplied to thecoordinates of nodes. The material given in the cell 101 is used
Node 1
to fill the region 101 except for inside of tetrahedrons. In 11th
line, the region with cell no. 1 is defined as a rectangular box of Figure 4.46: Results of the [cell] section ex10cm×6cm×10cm. With the FILL option, this region is filled by ample (11) in 3D images.
the cell no. 101 containing tetrahedron geometry. Tetrahedrongeometry (LAT=3) should be used together with universe&fill nest structure in the same way as Lattice structure
like this example. The universes appeared in the element file should be defined in the same way as the Lattice
structure, which is done in Line 13 and 14 for this example. The element no. 1 is filled by the material 2, water(H2 O), and the element no. 2 is filled by the material 3, iron (Fe).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

132

4.7 [ Transform ] section
4.7.1 Formats
You can define the coordinate transform in this section. Only C and $ can be used as a comment mark. File
including and variable definition can be set in this section. You can only rotate and/or transport the coordinate, andcannot enlarge or shrink using [transform].
The coordinate transformation defined in this section can be used in [source] section, [surface] section,[cell] section, r-z, xyz mesh of tally and the magnetic field.
Formats and examples are shown below.

[ T r a n s f o r m ]TRn
O1 O2 O3 B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

M

Table 4.69: transform definition
itemn
O1 O2 O3
B1 ∼ B9M

explanationtransform number 1 ∼ 999999∗TRn means that Bi is not a cosine, but an angle (degree).
transposition vector
rotation matrix
You can define only rotation matrix. The determinant of the matrix is
automatically adjusted to 1.
= 1 means that transposition vector is in sub coordinate systemdefined in main coordinate system.
= −1 means that transposition vector is in main coordinate systemdefined in sub coordinate system.

Default values are shown below.

TRn

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

4.7.2 Mathematical definition of the transform
The mathematical definition in terms of transposition vector and rotation matrix is the following,
In the case of M = 1,
 ′   x   B1 y′  =  B4
 ′  
B7
z

B2
B5
B8


  
B3   x   O1   
B6   y  +  O2   
O3z
B9

In the case of M = −1,
 ′   x   B1 y′  =  B4
 ′  
B7
z

B2
B5
B8

  
B3   x   B1
  
B6   y  −  B2
  
B3
z
B9

B4
B5
B6



B7   O1 
B8   O2 


O3
B9

4.7 [ Transform ] section

133

Here,
B1
B2
B3

=
=
=

cos(x′ , x)cos(x′ , y)cos(x′ , z)

B4
B5

=
=

cos(y′ , x)cos(y′ , y)

B6
B7
B8

=
=
=

cos(y′ , z)cos(z′ , x)cos(z′ , y)B9=cos(z′ , z)

In the case of M = 1, the object used this transform function is rotated and then translated. On the other hand, inthe case of M = −1, the rotation is performed after the translation. The rotation is performed about the origin of
the xyz coordinate system. Note that the direction of the translation setting M = 1 and −1 is opposite each other.

4.7.3 Examples (1)Example 44: [transform] section example (1)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

[ T r a n s f o r m ]*tr1
0.0000000E+00
1.3500000E+02
9.0000000E+01
2.2500000E+02*tr20.0000000E+00
3.0000000E+02
9.0000000E+01
3.0000000E+01

0.0000000E+00
9.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00
9.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00
9.0000000E+01
0.0000000E+00
9.0000000E+01

1.4000000E+03
4.5000000E+01
9.0000000E+01
1.3500000E+02
2.5800000E+03
2.1000000E+02
9.0000000E+01
3.0000000E+02

1

1

In this example, tr1 rotates the coordinate by 135 degrees around y axis, and transports 140 cm to z direction,
while tr2 rotates 300 degrees around y axis, and transports 258 cm to z direction. Because of TRn with ∗, you cangive angles (in units of degree) directly for Bi , (i = 1, . . . , 9).

4.7.4 Examples (2)Example 45: [transform] section example (2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

[ T r a n s f o r m ]set: c10[90] $ angle of around Z (degree)
set: c20[30] $ angle of around Y (degree)
set: c30[0]$ angle of around X (degree)
tr1

0 0 0
cos(c10/180*pi)*cos(c20/180*pi)
sin(c10/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)+cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)
sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)-cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)-sin(c10/180*pi)*cos(c20/180*pi)
cos(c10/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)-sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)
cos(c10/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)+sin(c10/180*pi)*sin(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)
sin(c20/180*pi)-cos(c20/180*pi)*sin(c30/180*pi)
cos(c20/180*pi)*cos(c30/180*pi)
1

In this example, tr1 rotates the coordinate by c10 degree around z axis, c20 degree around y axis and finallyc30 degree around x axis. You can set c10, c20, c30, and rotate the coodinate to any direction as you want.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

134

4.8 [ Temperature ] section
Free-Gas Thermal Temperature (MeV) for GG cell can be defined in this section. This section corresponds to
TMP card but you cannot set time definition. This value can be set in the [cell] section when you use GG. If thetemperature is double defined, temperatures defined in this [temperature] sections are used. If you do not set
this, the default value is 2.53 × 10−8 MeV.

[ T e m p e r a t u r e ]
reg
tmp
1
1.0*1.e-811
5.0*1.e-8( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )2.0*1.e-8( 11 12 15 )3.0*1.e-8
16
6.0*1.e-8....
........
....
........

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ). In this case, you need to close a value by () , if it is not asingle numeric value.
You cannot use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ).
If you want to change the order of region number (reg) and temperature (tmp), you can set as “tmp reg”.
You can use the skip operator non. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not cell but reg here.

4.9 [ Mat Time Change ] section

135

4.9 [ Mat Time Change ] section
By this section, you can change the material of certain cells to the other material as a function of time. Thisfunction is useful to describe a shutter of beam line, T0 chopper and the other devices for neutron optics. The unitof time is nsec.

[ Mat Time Change ]
mat
time
1
50.0
2
100.0
3
1000.0....
........
....
........

change11
120

In the above example, the material 1 is changed to material 11 at t=50.0 nsec, 2 to 12 at 100 nsec and 3 to void
at 1000 nsec. If you want to replace the order of the initial material (mat), time (time) and the final material(change), set as ”mat change time”. You can use the skip operator non. These three columns are always
necessary to define the mat time change function.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

136

4.10 [ Magnetic Field ] section
4.10.1 Charged particle
You can set a magnetic field in the PHITS calculation. If you use this function for electron and positron, set
EGS5 mode.
Cell number (reg), magnetic field type (typ), half distance of magnets (gap)(cm), magnetic field intensity(mgf), transformation (trcl) and time dependence (time) should be defined as[ Magnetic Field ]
reg
typ
1
4
2
4
3
2
4
2
( 150 < 61 )4
( 150 < 62 )4
( 150 < 63 )4
( 150 < 64 )4
( 150 < 65 )4
( 150 < 66 )
4
...
...
...
...

gap
10.00000
10.00000
10.00000
10.00000
13.00000
13.00000
13.00000
13.00000
13.00000
13.00000........
........

mgf-5.956540
6.416140-7.611980
3.516000
7.880140-7.440800
9.441010-8.295220
3.694830-2.099350........
........

trcl
3
1
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
...
...

time
non
non
0.0
pi/2
non
non
non
non
non
non
...
...

The column of trcl is omissible. The zero for trcl means no transformation. The time is a parameter of user
defined time dependent magnetic field. The column of time is also omissible. The “non” for time means no timedependence. Two subroutines, usrmgt1.f and usrmgt2.f are included in the source as user defined subroutines forthe time dependent magnetic field. The former is for Wobbler magnet, and the latter is for pulse magnet for neutron
optics. You can choose these two subroutine by usrmgt=1, 2 in the parameter section. For the Wobbler magnet,“time” means phase of the magnet, starting time for pulse magnet, respectively.
In the above expression, reg is region number, typ can take 2 or 4 for dipole electromagnet, or quadrupoleelectromagnet respectively.
mgf denotes the strength of the magnetic field (kG), and trcl is the coordinatetransformation number defined in [transform] section.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value.
By using this format, you can set diﬀerent magnetic field for each lattice. If a cell is re-defined, the value,
which is defined at first, is used.
In the case of dipole magnet, the distances gap make no sense, but set any numeric. The magnetic field isavailable not only in the void region, but also in the material where the normal reaction can be occurred.
z-axis is assumed to be the center of the magnetic field. The direction of the magnetic field is positive directionof y-axis for dipole, i.e. the positive charge particle is bent to positive direction of x-axis when it goes to positive
direction of z-axis. For quadrupole, the positive particle is converged in x-axis, diverged in y-axis when it goes topositive direction of z-axis. You need the coordinate transformation by trcl for diﬀerent geometrical situation.
When you specify charge number of the projectile particle with izst in [source] section, the motion of theparticle with the number in the magnetic field is described. Using izst, PH I TS can simulate the motion of theparticle with charge states. The charge number defined with izst doesn’t change while the particle moves. It
should be noted that particles produced from nuclear reactions are not aﬀected by the value of izst; the charge ofthe produced particle is given as its atomic number.
Normally, the tallies are called at the reaction point or the surface crossing; thus, the particle track in, forexample, the magnetic field is shown as a straight line between collisions or between one collision and a surface
crossing. To describe the trajectory correctly as a curve, set itstep=1 and adjust the step length for the field bydeltm in [parameters].

4.10 [ Magnetic Field ] section

137

4.10.2 Neutron
The definition of the magnetic field for neutron is almost the same as for charged particles. Here we describe
the detail of the magnetic field for neutron.

[ Magnetic Field ]
reg
typ
gap
1
60
0.00000
261
0.00000
3106
5.00000
4104
0.00000
5102
0.00000
6101
3.00000
7103
0.00000...
...
........
...
...
........

mgf
35000.035000.07130.03.5
0.20
7130.035000.0........
........

trcl
3
1
0
0
0
2
0
...
...

polar
non
1
0
non
non
1
-1
...
...

time
non
non
non
5.0
non
non
non
...
...

We cannot take into account of the gravity nor additional dipole magnet. For 60 case, it is assumed that the spinalways keeps parallel or anti-parallel to the magnet field. For 61 case, we solve the coupled equation of motion
between the spin and the magnetic field. Then the spin flip can be occurred in the region with weak magnetic field.
The strength of the magnetic field is specified in the unit of [T/m2 ] in mgf column.
For the types above 100, we consider the coupled equations of the spin and the magnetic field. In addition, theeﬀects of the gravity and additional dipole field can be taken into account. 106 is sextupole, 104 quadrupole, and102 dipole, respectively. The strength of additional quadrupole magnet (z-direction) is give by the column of gap
in the unit of [T].
For 101 type, the magnetic field is defined by the user program file, usrmgf1.f. In this user program, the datameasured by the neutron optics group in JAERI are read from the file and used the calculation. The strength of thisfield is renormalized by the value of mgf.
For 101 type, the magnetic field is also defined by the user program file, usrmgf3.f. In this user program, there
is a simple sextupole magnet field as same as in 106 type.
The neutron goes into the magnetic field with the initial spin if it is defined in the source section. If not, theinitial spin is defined at the moment when the neutron goes into the magnetic field. The ratio of the number ofparallel and anti-parallel spin to the magnetic field is determined by the polarization defined by the polar column.
non in polar column means 0 polarization. The polarization is defined asP=ϕ+ − ϕ−,ϕ+ + ϕ−here, ϕ+ and ϕ− are the number of the parallel and anti-parallel particles.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

138

4.11 [ Electro Magnetic Field ] section
You can set uniform electric and magnetic fields in any region. Defining parameters in this section and setting
ielctf=1 in [parameters] section, PHITS can simulate a motion of a charged particle in the fields. If you use
this function for electron and positron, set EGS5 mode.
You can set the electric and magnetic fields together. It is noted that you cannot use a quadrupole magnet,
which can be defined in [Magnetic Field] section.
Cell number (reg), strength of the electric and magnetic fields (elf and mgf, respectively), direction of thetwo fields (trcle and trclm) should be defined. Units of elf and mgf are kV/cm and kGauss, respectively. You
should set the coordinate transformation number trcl, which are defined in [transform] section, to trcle andtrclm. When trcle is 0, the direction of the electric field is positive direction of x-axis. When trclm is 0, thedirection of the magnetic field is positive direction of y-axis. trcle and trclm are not omissible. If you set elf
or mgf to 0, or you don’t need change the direction of the field, you should set trcle and trclm to 0. Set theparameters as follows.

[ Electro Magnetic Field ]
reg
elf
mgf
trcle
1
100
1
1
2
100
1
1

trclm
2
2

When you specify charge number of the projectile particle with izst in [source] section, the motion of theparticle with the number in the electro-magnetic field is described. Using izst, PHITS can simulate the motion of
the particle with charge states. The charge number defined with izst doesn’t change while the particle moves. It
should be noted that particles produced from nuclear reactions are not aﬀected by the value of izst; the charge ofthe produced particle is given as its atomic number.
Normally, the tallies are called at the reaction point or the surface crossing; thus, the particle track in, forexample, the magnetic field is shown as a straight line between collisions or between one collision and a surface
crossing. To describe the trajectory correctly as a curve, set itstep=1 and adjust the step length for the field bydeltm in [parameters].

4.12 [ Delta Ray ] section

139

4.12 [ Delta Ray ] section
In this section, you can set parameters used in the function to generate knocked-out electrons so-called δrays, which are produced along the trajectory of a charged particle in materials, as secondary particles. In the
PHITS calculation, an energy transfer to the material is estimated by Linear Energy Transfer (LET; dE/dx), andis assumed to be deposited only on the particle trajectory. However, it is well known that owing to a high energy
δ-ray the energy deposition is spread far away from the orbit of the primary particle. You can take the eﬀect of
δ-rays into account using this function. The production cross sections of δ-rays from those particles in liquid water
were calculated using the model proposed by Butts and Katz,?) considering the relativistic collision dynamics.
This function shouldn’t be used together with [t-sed] tally.
You can set a threshold energy Eth (MeV) for each region except outer void to control the production of δrays. As the secondary particle, δ-rays with energies above Eth are explicitly generated and transported. For lower
energies than Eth , the deposition energies from δ-rays are included in LET. A minimum energy of Eth you can
set is 0.001MeV (= 1keV). It is noted that in case of very low Eth or setting of a material thiner than 10µg/cm2 ,a behavior of the charged particle slightly changes. This is because the eﬀective stopping power of the charged
particles becomes smaller than its real value due to too many delta-ray productions. A default value of Eth is
1.e + 10, i.e. δ-rays are not produced in the PHITS calculation except for setting the Eth parameter in this section.
The region number and Eth are given by reg and del, respectively. Set these parameters as follows.
[ delta ray ]
reg
del
1
0.1
11
1.0
....
....
....
....

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numericvalue. You cannot use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). If you want to replace theorder of region number (reg) and the threshold energy (del), set as “del reg”. You can use the skip operator
non. Even if you use GG, use the symbol not cell but reg here.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

140

4.13 [ Track Structure ] section
Performing the track-structure simulation 42 for electrons or positrons of low energy below 1 keV, those deceleration processes caused by much collision events for ionization, excitation, and molecular vibration and rotation
can be calculated precisely. Currently, the cross sections only for liquid water are prepared in PHITS, and thosefor other materials are simply obtained from electron density scaling based on the data. The track-structure simulation takes so long time that we cannot recommend to activate this mode in a conventional-scale particle transport
simulation (cm orders) due to much production of low energy electrons around 10 eV. Please take cares that the
track-structure mode can be adapted only to [t-track] and [t-deposit] tallies.
In this section, you have to specify the cells where you would like to perform track-structure simulation. mID
represents the index of the cross sections database used in the track-structure simulation, and currently you canselect only 0 (no track structure simulation) or 1 (track structure simulation using the database of liquid water). If
you will activate mID = 1, mean free paths of the particles in target materials are derived from electron density
scaling based on the database for liquid water. We are planning to prepare the cross section databases for othermaterials in future.

[track structure]
reg mID1
1
2
0

You can use the format ( 2 - 5 89 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numericvalue. You cannot use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[100] < u=3 ). If you want to replace theorder of region number (reg) and index of the cross section database (mID), set as mID reg. You can use the skip
operator non.
The followings are the important parameters for this mode. The parameters of etsmax and etsmin in [parameters]
section are maximum and minimum energies of particles simulated by track-structure mode. In case of the useof the track-structure mode, the parameters of emin(12) and emin(13) should be set concurrently to 1.0e-3, and
EGS5 should be activated (negs=1).

[ P a r a m e t e r s ]emin(12) = 1.E-03
emin(13) = 1.E-03
negs= 1
etsmax= 1.E-2
etsmin= 1.E-6

42 T. Kai et al.,Thermal equilibrium and prehydration processes of electrons injected into liquid water calculated by dynamic Monte Carlo
method , Radiat. Phys. Chem., 115, 1-5 (2015).

4.14 [ Super Mirror ] section

141

4.14 [ Super Mirror ] section
The reflection of low energy neutron by super mirror is defined by this section. We assume the following
empirical formula to describe the reflectivity of the super mirrors.
{R
if Q ≤ Qc
R = 10
(1
(1
R
−
tanh
[(Q
−
mQ
)/W])
−
α(Q
−
Q
))
if
Q > Qc0cc2where Q is the scattering vector (in Å−1 ) defined by
Q = |ki − k f | =4π sin θ.
λThe value of m is a parameter determined by the mirror material, the bilayer sequence and the number of bilayers.
Qc is the critical scattering wave vector for a single layer of the mirror material. At higher values of Q, thereflectivity starts falling linearly with a slope α until a cutoﬀ at Q = mQc . The width of the cutoﬀ is denoted W.
These parameters are defined as[ Super Mirror ]
r-in
r-out
{2001-2020}
3001
2500
3500
2600
3600
....
....
....
....
....
....

mm
3
3
3
..
..
..

r0
qc
am
0.99 0.0217 3.0
0.99 0.0217 3.0
0.99 0.0217 3.0
...
....
...
...
....
...
...
....
...

wm
0.003
0.003
0.003
...
...
...

The reflection surface is defined by the surface between r-in and r-out. You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 }8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ) in these definitions. The
remaining parameters in above expression denote m by mm, R0 by r0, Qc by qc in Å−1 , α by am in Å, and W by wmin Å−1 .
We restrict this function only to neutrons for the case that its energy is less than 10 eV or sinθ is greater than
0.001, the latter is due to roughness of the surface.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

142

4.15 [ Elastic Option ] section
In this section, you can set some parameters for user defined elastic option for low energy neutrons. By thisfunction, you can change angle distributions of elastic collisions of data based neutron reactions. We prepare two
sample routines, usrelst1.f and usrelst2.f. You can choose one of these two by usrelst=1, 2 in the parameter section.
You should define the regions to which this function is applied and 4 parameters as,[ Elastic Option ]
reg
1
2
3
....
....

c1
5
1
3
...
...

c2
1
1
1
...
...

c3
3.3
1.1
0.3
...
...

c4
0.4
0.7
0.8
...
...

If you want to replace the order of region number (reg), (c1 c2 c3 c4), set as “reg c3 c2 c1 c4”. You can
use the skip operator non. You can use the format { 4 - 7 }, but the ( { 4 - 7 } 9 10 ) format cannot be
used.
The sample routine of usrelst1.f is for Bragg scattering based on the data base, and usrelst2.f for any type ofangular distribution described by an analytic formula.

4.16 [ Data Max ] section

143

4.16 [ Data Max ] section
dmax(i), which is the maximum energy of library use for i-th particle, can be defined for each nucleus inmaterials in this section. Maximum 6 [Data Max] sections are allowed to be used in a input file.
[Data Max]
part = neutron protonmat
nucleus dmax
all
Fe
20
5
all
50
3
56Fe
150

Particle is defined in the first line as part =. Only neutron and proton can be define in PHITS ver. 2.86.
Three columns, mat, nucleus, and dmax, can be used. If you want to change the order of (mat) (nucleus),
set as “nucleus mat”. You can use the skip operator non. In the mat column, material numbers can be specified andall means all materials. In the nucleus column, you can specify nucleus as 56Fe and 26056 type. You can use Fe
or 26000, which specifies all isotopes of Fe. You can also use all. By the number (MeV) in the dmax column, youdefine the maximum energy of library use for the nucleus.
If the same nucleus is defined in the [data max] sections, the latest definition has priority in an input file.
The values of dmax(1) and dmax(2) defined by [parameters] section should be the maximum value in[data max] section.
If kmout = 1 is specified in [parameters] section, the values of dmax for each nucleus in the materials areshown in the output file, file(6) (D=phits.out).

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

144

4.17 [ Frag Data ] section
The function to read user defined cross sections can be defined in the [frag data] section. By using thisfunction, you can simulate nuclear reaction events in the calculation on the basis of information given by the crosssection data. It is noted that nuclear data libraries are preferentially used, even in the case of a nuclear reaction you
specify in this section. You can set only proton, neutron, and nuclei as incident particles. Photons and elections
cannot be used. Elastic scattering events for nucleons are separately considered by the default model implemented
in PHITS.
Because weight values of the secondary particles produced by this option change from 1.0, you should decrease
the value of the cutoﬀ weight parameter wc2(i) in the [parameters] section.
Set the parameters as follows.

[ Frag Data ]
opt
proj
0
12C
1
proton
....
...
....
...

targ
16O
63Cu
...
...

file
DDX_12C-16O.dat
DDX_p-63Cu.dat
...
...
...
...

The user defined cross sections are not used when opt=0. In the case of opt=1, PHITS reproduces the cross sectionof the reaction between an incident particle and target, which are specified by proj and targ, respectively, using thedata. Options when opt=2,3 are under construction. When opt=4, PHITS simply extrapolates the given data forincident energies, emission angles, and emission energies. Note that you can use this option only in the case ofneo>0 and nag,0, which will be explained below.
Format of the data of the user defined cross sections is as follows.

projectile
targetneiein(1) ein(2) ein(3) ...... ein(nei+1)
totxs(1) totxs(2) totxs(3) ...... totxs(nei+1)
neoeout(1) eout(2) eout(3) ...... eout(neo+1)
nag
angle(1) angle(2) angle(3) ...... angle(nag+1)
nfrg
frag(1) frag(2) frag(3) ...... frag(nfrg)
proxs(1,1) proxs(1,2) proxs(1,3) ...... proxs(1,nfrg)
ddx(1,1,1,1) ddx(1,1,1,2) ddx(1,1,1,3) ...... ddx(1,1,1,nag)ddx(1,1,2,1) ddx(1,1,2,2) ddx(1,1,2,3) ...... ddx(1,1,2,nag).........
ddx(1,1,neo,1) ddx(1,1,neo,2) ddx(1,1,neo,3) ...... ddx(1,1,neo,nag)ddx(1,2,1,1) ddx(1,2,1,2) ddx(1,2,1,3) ...... ddx(1,2,1,nag)ddx(1,2,2,1) ddx(1,2,2,2) ddx(1,2,2,3) ...... ddx(1,2,2,nag).........
ddx(1,2,neo,1) ddx(1,2,neo,2) ddx(1,2,neo,3) ...... ddx(1,2,neo,nag).........
.........

4.17 [ Frag Data ] section

145（continued）

ddx(1,nfrg,1,1) ddx(1,nfrg,1,2) ddx(1,nfrg,1,3) ...... ddx(1,nfrg,1,nag)ddx(1,nfrg,2,1) ddx(1,nfrg,2,2) ddx(1,nfrg,2,3) ...... ddx(1,nfrg,2,nag).........
ddx(1,nfrg,neo,1) ddx(1,nfrg,neo,2) ddx(1,nfrg,neo,3) ...... ddx(1,nfrg,neo,nag)proxs(2,1) proxs(2,2) proxs(2,3) ...... proxs(2,nfrg)
ddx(2,1,1,1) ddx(2,1,1,2) ddx(2,1,1,3) ...... ddx(2,1,1,nag)ddx(2,1,2,1) ddx(2,1,2,2) ddx(2,1,2,3) ...... ddx(2,1,2,nag).........
ddx(2,1,neo,1) ddx(2,1,neo,2) ddx(2,1,neo,3) ...... ddx(2,1,neo,nag).........
.........
.........
.........
proxs(nei+1,1) proxs(nei+1,2) proxs(nei+1,3) ...... proxs(nei+1,nfrg)
ddx(nei+1,1,1,1) ddx(nei+1,1,1,2) ddx(nei+1,1,1,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,1,1,nag)ddx(nei+1,1,2,1) ddx(nei+1,1,2,2) ddx(nei+1,1,2,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,1,2,nag).........
ddx(nei+1,1,neo,1) ddx(nei+1,1,neo,2) ddx(nei+1,1,neo,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,1,neo,nag).........
.........
ddx(nei+1,nfrg,1,1) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,1,2) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,1,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,nfrg,1,nag)ddx(nei+1,nfrg,2,1) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,2,2) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,2,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,nfrg,2,nag).........
ddx(nei+1,nfrg,neo,1) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,neo,2) ddx(nei+1,nfrg,neo,3) ...... ddx(nei+1,nfrg,neo,nag)In the beginning, you specify incident particle and target in this file. nei is the number of points of the energy
mesh. In the next line, you set nei+1 points of incident energies (ein in the unit of MeV/u). neo is the number ofenergy mesh points of the outgoing particles. In the next line, you set neo+1 points of the energy (eout in the unitof MeV/u), and then in the next next line you set neo+1 data of total reaction cross sections (totxs in the unit ofmb). Note that when totxs=0, total reaction cross sections obtained by models, which are specified by icxsni or
icrhi, are used. nag is the number of angular mesh points for the outgoing particles. You set nag+1 data of theangles in the next line. If nag>0 the data should be given in the unit of radian, and if nag<0 those are in the unit isdegree. When nag=0, isotropic is assumed. nfrg is the number of the outgoing particles. In the next line, you write
nfrg names of the particles. proxs (in the unit of mb) is the production cross sections of the particles at an incident
energy, and then you set neo×nag data of the double diﬀerential cross sections (ddx in the unit of mb/MeV/sr).
You have to specify nei+1 groups of the proxs and ddxs per an outgoing particle.
If you write model in the line where you should write neo, nuclear reaction models are used for simulating
nuclear reaction events. In this case, you do not have to write the data below neo.
Example 46: example of data file of user defined cross sections
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

proton
63Cu
1
10.0
100.0
1000.0 500.03
1.0 10.0 50.0-6
0.0 30.0 60.0

100.0
90.0

120.0

150.0

180.0

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

146

10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:

1
neutron
300.0
10.0 10.0
15.0 13.0
10.0 11.0
0.0
5.0
5.0
10.0
8.0
5.0
6.0

10.0
12.0
10.0

10.0
11.0
11.0

10.0
10.0
10.0

10.0
10.0
10.0

5.0
7.0
5.0

5.0
6.0
6.0

5.0
5.0
5.0

5.0
5.0
5.0

An example of the data file of the user defined cross sections is shown in Example 46. In 1st and 2nd lines, protonand 63 Cu are defined as incident particle and target, respectively. In 3rd line, nei=1 is set. Tow data of incident
energies and total reaction cross sections are given in 4th and 5the lines, respectively. In 6th line neo=3 is set,
and then 4 values of 1.0, 10.0, 50.0, and 100.0MeV are given as energies of the outgoing particles. The numberof angular mesh points nag=-6 is set in 8th line. In this case, the angles are given in the unit of degree. In 10thand 11th lines, the number of particles and its kind (neutron) are specified, respectively. In 12th line, a production
cross section of neutron at the 10.0MeV proton is given. The double diﬀerential cross sections of the neutron are
set in 13th, 14th, and 15th lines. Each lines correspond to the energy bins defined in 7th line, and each columns
correspond to the angular bins defined in 9th line. The production cross section is used as a normalization factor.
When proxs=0 (mb), the integrated values of the ddxs are used as proxs.
When neo is negative, you can set the intensity of the cross section discretely. In this case, the number of eout
should be neo.
If neo is 0, the energy spectra of the outgoing particle can be given by Gaussian distribution. In the places of
ddxs, you set mean value and FWHM of the Gaussian in the unit of MeV.

4.18 [ Importance ] section

147

4.18 [ Importance ] section
The importance for GG cell can be defined in this section. If the importance is not defined, it is set as “1.0”.
Maximum 6 [importance] sections are allowed to be defined in an input file.

[ I m p o r t a n c e ]part = proton neutron
reg
imp
1
1.000000
11
5.000000( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )2.000000( 11 12 15 )
3.000000( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )6.000000....
........
....
........

Particle is defined as part = at the first line. If the “part” is not defined, default value is defined as part =all. The format to describe particles is the same as in tally definition. However, it can distinguish ityp only, eachnucleus is not specified.
If you want to change the order of region number (reg) and (imp), set as “imp reg”. You can use the skip
operator non. Even if you use the GG, you should write not cell but reg here.
You can use the format like ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value.
The importance of bottom level is a product by each importance at each level. In PH I TS , importance ofa specific cell at bottom level can be defined by above format. By using the format, we can define diﬀerent
importance into each lattice. If the importance is double-defined, the first defined importance is valid.
If you set large importance to particles which have strong penetration through matter such as neutrino, PH I TS
calculation takes time too much. If you define part=all, neutrino is included. You must give attention about it.
Some rules can be used to define an importance of a cell in a repeated structures and lattices. For example,
cells 5, 6, and 7 on a bottom level are included by cells 11, 12, and 13 on upper level, we can define the importance
as
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

[ Importance ]reg( 5 6 7 < 11 )( 5 6 7 < 12 )( 5 6 7 < 13 )( 11 12 13 )

imp
2.0
4.0
8.0
1.0

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

[ Importance ]reg( 5 6 7 )
11
12
13

imp
1.0
2.0
4.0
8.0

or

Above two definitions give same results, but in the latter case, the importance for cells 5, 6, and 7 are displayed as
1.0 at the importance summary.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

148

4.19 [ Weight Window ] section
The weight window function can be defined in this section. Maximum 6 [weight window] sections areallowed to be defined in a input file.

[ Weight Window ]part = proton neutroneng = 5( tim = 5 )6.00e-7 3.98e-1 1.00e+0 7.00e+0 5.00e+4
reg
ww1
ww2
ww3
1
0.010000
0.100000
0.001000
110.005000
0.050000
0.000300( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )0.001000
0.010000
0.000100( 11 12 15 )
0.000500
0.005000
0.000030( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )0.000010
0.001000
0.000010....
........
........
........
ww4
ww5
0.010000
0.100000
0.005000
0.050000
0.001000
0.010000
0.000500
0.005000
0.000010
0.001000........
........

Particle is defined in the first line as part = . part = all means all particles. The format to describe particles
part = is the same format as in tally definition. However, it can distinguish ityp only, each nucleus is not
specified.
Next you define the energy mesh or time mesh. First, you define the number of mesh by eng = or tim =and, in next line, the values of each mesh (e1 , e2 , e3 , ....). Minimum value of weight window for each mesh should
be defined in the followings. Each minimum values are like ww1, ww2, ww3, .... where wwi is a window minimum
value for a mesh ei−1 < E < ei . e0 = 0 and t0 = −∞ is assumed. If there exists no eng = / tim = definitions,energy / time mesh are not prepared. In this case, you should set only ww1.
Region number (ref) must be written at the first column. As above example, you can make another table forwwi definitions. From second table, the region definition can be skipped as the example. You can use the skip
operator non in this section. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not cell but reg in the section.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0
0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value.
If you set large weight window to particles which has strong penetration through matter such as neutrino, PH I TS
calculation takes time too much. If you define part=all, neutrino is included. You must give attention about it.

4.20 [ WW Bias ] section

149

4.20 [ WW Bias ] section
In the [ww bias] section, minimum values of the weight window defined in [weight window] can be biased for certain regions. This option is useful when the [weight window] parameters for a certain region arebiased after automatically generating the [weight window] section by [t-wwg]. Figure 4.47 shows a flowchart
how to perform the transport calculation using [weight window] and [ww bias]. First, generate the [weightwindow] section by [t-wwg]. If the obtained parameters of [weight window] are enough to eﬀectively use thevariance reduction technique, the [ww bias] section is not needed. However, if they are not enough, the variancereduction technique can be used more eﬀectively by biasing the [weight window] parameters for a certain region
with [ww bias]. There are two methods to set the [ww bias] section; an automatic method using [t-wwbg],
which is a Weight Window Bias Generator (WWBG), and a manual method by a user, which will be explained
below. For details of [t-wwbg], see Sec. 6.16. When performing a transport calculation with [ww bias] and[weight window], set icntl=0 and iwwbias=1 in [parameters].
Set [weight window]
・With setting [t-wwg], perform

Set [ww bias]
・With setting [t-wwbg], performa normal calculation (icntl=0).

a sample calculation (icntl=15).

([weight window] is automatically set.)([ww bias] is automatically set.)or・Set [ww bias] manually.

Transport calculation with [weight window] and [ww bias]
・Set [weight window] and [ww bias] in the same input ﬁle.
・Execute PHITS with icntl=0 and iwwbias=1 in [parameters].

Figure 4.47: The flowchart of the connection calculation between [weight window] and [ww bias].

The format of [ww bias] is as follows: (Note that set the same particle, energy-mesh, and cell numbers as[weight window].)[ WW Bias ]part = neutroneng = 2
1e-3
1.0
reg
wwb1
wwb2
1
0.25
0.25
2
0.50
0.50
3
1.00
1.00
4
2.00
2.00
....
........
........

In the first line, part= defines which particle is to be considered. When it is omitted, part=all is set. The
expression of part= is the same as that in the tally format. Note that only the expression as ityp can be set. Eachnuclides cannot be specified. Next, the energy mesh should be defined. The line starting with eng= specifies thenumber of mesh. In the next line, energies (e1 , e2 , e3 , ...) are defined. Furthermore, names of columns are gives
as reg, wwb1, wwb2, .... In the reg column, the cell numbers are written. The bias values are given in thecolumns of wwbi. The skip operator non can be used. Each wwbi column corresponds to energies of ei−1 < E < ei .

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

150

Here, e0 = 0. The format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ) can be used, as can the lattice and universe style ( 6 < 10[1 0
0] < u=3 ). However, any value that is not single numeric must be enclosed value by () .
By setting iwwbias=1 in [parameters], the [weight window] parameters multiplied by inverse of thedefined biases in [ww bias] are used. In this case, the products of the multiplication are output in the input echoof [weight window], and [ww bias] with off is output. If an input file without [ww bias] is used, all valuesof [ww bias] in the input echo are set to 1.
An example of [ww bias] is as follows.

Example 47: Example of [ww bias]
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:

[ WW Bias ]part = neutroneng = 11.00000E+05
reg
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

wwb1
1/7
1/6
1/5
1/4
1/3
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
6

Here, neutron is considered as part. One energy region of 100 GeV below is specified. Regions between 1 and
12 are gradually biased. The region of the large number is biased stronger than that of the small number.

4.20 [ WW Bias ] section

151

Figure 4.48(a) shows the xz cross-section view of a geometry; a concrete cylinder with a central axis on the zaxis with a radius of 100cm. Two results of the neutron fluence obtained by the transport calculation without andwith [ww bias] were shown in Figs. (b) and (c), respectively. Source particles of 14MeV-neutrons were generated
at x = 0, y = 0, z = 90cm as an isotropic source. After generating a [weight window] section by [t-wwg], theresult shown in Fig. (b) was obtained by performing the calculation with only the [weight window] section. The
result of the calculation with both the [weight window] section and the [ww bias] section of the example 47
was shown in Fig. (c). The neutron fluence in Fig. (b) was distributed in both regions of the small and large cellnumbers. On the other hand, the fluence in Fig. (c) was distributed in only the large cell numbers, which wereDate = 13:14 16-Aug-2017
File = D:\home\hashimoto\STUDY\houkoku\phits\manual\tex\old-file\WWBG\WWBias\geometry\weight-dose-xz-g.out[t-track] in xyz meshto focus on a certain region, the calculation canbiased by [ww bias] of the example 47. As seen in this example,
be eﬃciently performed by [ww bias].
emin = 1.0000E-10 [MeV](a) Geometry

emax = 1.0000E+03 [MeV]ymin = -2.0000E+01 [cm]ymax = 2.0000E+01 [cm]part. = neutron
mset = 1100

x [cm]

50

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

7

9

10

11

void

12

1

−50

−100

Date = 13:17 16-Aug-2017
File = D:\home\hashimoto\STUDY\houkoku\phits\manual\tex\old-file\WWBG\WWBias\without-bias\weight-dose-xz-n.out
File = D:\home\hashimoto\STUDY\houkoku\phits\manual\tex\old-file\WWBG\WWBias\with-bias\weight-dose-xz-n.out

50100
z [cm]

emin = 1.0000E-10 [MeV]emax = 1.0000E+03 [MeV] (c) With [WW Bias]ymin = -2.0000E+01 [cm]ymax =100
2.0000E+01 [cm]part. = neutron
mset = 1

calculated
by PHITSBias]
2.95(b) Without
[WW

100
10−3
10−4

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

10−6
10−7
10−8

−50

10−3
10−4
10−5

x [cm]

x [cm]

10−5emin = 1.0000E-10 [MeV]emax = 1.0000E+03 [MeV]ymin = -2.0000E+01 [cm]ymax = 2.0000E+01 [cm]part. = neutron
mset = 1

plotted by ANGEL 4.35

50(µSv/h)/(source/sec)

50

Date = 13:17 16-Aug-2017[t-track] in xyz mesh

150

10−6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

10−7

(µSv/h)/(source/sec)[t-track] in xyz 0mesh

10−8

−50
10−9

10−9

10−10

−100

calculated by PHITS 2.95

10−10

0

50

100
z [cm]

150−100

calculated by PHITS 2.95

0

50

100
z [cm]

150

plotted by ANGEL 4.35

Figure 4.48: (a) xz cross-section view of the geometry. (b) Result without [ww bias]. (c) Result with [wwbias] of the example 47.

plotted by ANGEL 4.35

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

152

4.21 [ Forced Collisions ] section
The forced collisions are used for improving tally statistics or thin target analysis by enlarging the collision
probabilities. When specified particle comes into a region defined as the forced collision region, the particle isdivided into two particles. One has a weight by (penetration probability) × (its weight), this particle pass throughto the next region. The other has a weight of (1 - penetration probability) × (its weight), and it is forced to collidewith a target in the region. The collision point is randomly determined according to cross sections. Regions andfactors for the forced collisions can be defined in this section. Non-defined regions are set factor zero.
Maximum 6 [forced collisions] sections are allowed to be defined in an input file.

[ Forced Collisions ]part = proton neutron
reg
fcl
1
1.000000
110.500000( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )0.200000( 11 12 15 )0.300000( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )-0.500000....
........
....
........

You set particle as part = in the first line. The default is part = all. part = is the same format as in tallydefinition.
If you want to replace the order of region number (reg) and (fcl), you can set as “fcl reg”. You can use
the skip operator non. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not cell but reg here.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value. By
using this format you can set diﬀerent forced collision factor for each lattice. If the same cell is re-defined, thevalue, which is defined at first, is used.
The forced collision factor fcl means, 0: no forced collision, | f cl| > 1: is an error, and | f cl| ≤ 1 : multiply
forced collision probability by f cl, instead the weight is reduced by 1/ f cl times.
We have two options to control the particle transport and multiple scattering with the weight cut oﬀ in theforced collisions region. When f cl < 0, secondary particles produced by forced collisions are treated by thenormal process. In this case, weight cut oﬀ is not performed. When f cl > 0, the forced collision is also applied
to secondary particles. In this case, weight cut oﬀ is performed. Even if a particle is killed by this weight cut oﬀ,
of course the particle is tallied before killed. There is a possibility that all particles are killed by this weight cut
oﬀ, if you set the weight cut oﬀ and the forced collisions without consideration. For example, it corresponds totallying tracks of secondary particles and information of particles at a distance from the forced collisions region.
When you want to transport secondary particles produced by forced collisions, you should decrease the value ofthe cutoﬀ weight parameter wc1(i) in the [parameters] section.

4.22 [ Volume ] section

153

4.22 [ Volume ] section
Volume for GG cell (cm3 ) can be defined in this section. If the volume is double defined, the value defined inthis [volume] section is used. The volume is utilized in the tally sections. If you do not set volume, it has 1.0 cm3
volume.

[ V o l u m e ]reg
1
11( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )( 11 12 15 )
16
....
....

vol
1.000000
5.000000
2.000000
3.000000
6.000000........
........

You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ) for a group. In this case, you need to close a value by () ,if it is not a single numeric value.
You cannot use the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). If you want to set cell volume
in detail, use the volume definition in the tally section.
If you want to change the order of region number (reg) and volume (vol), you can set as “vol reg”. You
can use the skip operator non. Even if you use GG, you should write the symbol not cell but reg here.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

154

4.23 [ Multiplier ] section
In this section, you can define a multiplier set, which consists of factors depending on energies of particles, tomultiply results of the [t-track] tally. When you use this set, you have to define multiplier subsections in
the [t-track] section. For example, you can utilize this function for dose estimation using any dose conversion
factor.
In one [multiplier] section, you can define only one multiplier set. The maximum number of the [multiplier]section defined in an input file is 100. Format of this section is as follows.

[ Multiplier ]number = -201
interpolation = log
ne = 10
20.0
2.678
30.0
7.020
50.0
18.50
100.0
24.26
200.0
16.13
500.0
10.51
1000.010.55
2000.010.98
5000.012.10
10000.0
12.45

The ID number of the set is determined by number, which must be between −299 and −200, and is used in the[t-track] section. You can choose which log-log or lin-lin as the interpolation method of the given data table,
by setting interpolation = log or lin, respectively. The number of the energy point is given by ne, and data
sets for the point and the factor are defined, respectively, below ne. Note that the data of the energy point should
be in ascending order.
When you use the multiplier set defined in this section, you have to use multiplier option of the [t-track]
section. The basic format is given as (C k), where C is a normalization factor and k is the ID number of the set.
It is noted that k should be negative. Format of the multiplier subsection is given as follows.

multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 1000
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 1
-201 ) ( 2 -202 )2( 1.2 -201 ) ( 3 -202 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....

The line of multiplier = specifies the number of material where the multiplication is considered. You can use
all instead of the number. For this case, one should also use all for mat column below. The second line of part= defines the particles considered. The maximum number of the particle is 6 and all can be also used, which isdefault. The multiplication aﬀects only these considered particles. The third line of emax = defines the maximum
energy of the multiplication. If emax is omitted, it is automatically defined as the maximum energy given in the[multiplier] section. The number of mat column is the material number which is considered to be multiplied.
The columns of mset1, mset2 define the multiplier set. The maximum 6 multiplier can be set. For each set, theresult is printed out. You can define several multiplier subsections in one [t-track] section, but you should
set the number of the multiplier sets to be equal in each subsection.

4.24 [ Mat Name Color ] section

155

4.24 [ Mat Name Color ] section
Material names, size and colors for graphical output by gshow and 3dshow tallies are defined in this section.
By default, the name is set as material number and the color is set automatically.

[ Mat Name Color ]
mat
0
1
2
3
{ 4 - 7 }
....
....

name
void
air
{mat 2}{mat 3}Fe........
........

size
1
0.5
2
2
3

color
lightgrayyellowgreen
orangeyellow{ 0.067 0.600 1.00 }mossgreen

If you want to replace the order of material number (mat), (name), (size), and (color), set as “mat color
size name”. You can use the skip operator non. You must define at least one parameter in “name” and “color”.
If no definition, the default values are used.
You can use the format { 4 - 7 }, but the ( { 4 - 7 } 9 10 ) format cannot be used. If you need to use
blanks in name definition, the name must be closed by { } as the example. If you want to use ( ), you should
write \( \). In the name, you cannot use { } . Note that a superscript or subscript in the LaTeX format can beused by writing \{ \}. For example, in the case of writing ˆ\{ 208 \}Pb, 208 Pb is output. The maximum numberof characters of a name that you can define is 80.
When you define two (or more) cells of diﬀerent densities from each other with the same material number in[cell] section, the cells except the first one are given other material numbers in matadd=1 (the default setting). In
this section, you have to set the given numbers, which are outputted in the first part of file(6) (D=phits.out)
as a warning message, in the mat column. Even if you set matadd=0 in [parameters] section, the function
unifying the material number is invalid in this section.
The color definition is based on the format in AN GE L . Set color by symbol ( r bbb yy), name ( red orangeblue), or HSB numeric H(hue) S (chroma) B(brightness). In the case HSB numeric definition, close each numericby { }. If only one HSB numeric is defined, chroma and brightness are set 1.
Color symbols, names, and HSB numerics are shown from next page.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

156

Table 4.70: gray scaleÿÿÿÿÿÿ

W
O
K
J
F
E

HSB
−1.0
−0.8
−0.6
−0.4
−0.2
−0.0

ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ

ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ

ÿ

Table 4.72: Color definition by names and HSB numerics

ÿÿÿÿ

ÿÿÿÿ

white
lightgraygraydarkredredpink

darkgraypastelpink

matblack
blackorangebrown
darkbrown
pastelbrownorangeyellow

Table 4.71: Color definition by symbols

ÿÿÿÿÿÿ

R
RR
RRR
Y
YY
YYY
G
GG
GGG
C
CC
CCC
B
BB
BBB

HSB
1.000
0.933
0.867
0.800
0.733
0.667
0.600
0.533
0.467
0.400
0.333
0.267
0.200
0.133
0.067

ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ

ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ

ÿ

ÿÿÿÿ
red
orangecamel
pastelyellow
yellow
pastelgreen−
yellowyellowgreen

−
−
green

darkgreengreen
mossgreen
bluegreen

−
−
cyan

pastelcyan

−
−
blue
violetmagentacyanblue

pastelblue
cyan
blue
violetpurplemagentawineredpastelmagenta
pastelpurple
pastelviolet

ÿÿ ÿÿ
ÿ

ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ
ÿÿ

ÿ

HSB
1.000 1.000 0.600
1.000 1.000 1.000
1.00 0.500 1.000
0.900 0.500 1.000
0.933 1.000 1.000
0.900 1.000 0.500
0.900 1.000 0.300
0.900 0.600 0.500
0.867 1.000 1.000
0.800 0.700 0.700
0.800 0.700 1.000
0.800 1.000 1.000
0.700 0.600 1.000
0.700 1.000 1.000
0.600 1.000 1.000
0.600 1.000 0.600
0.500 1.000 0.300
0.500 1.000 1.000
0.400 0.400 1.000
0.250 0.400 1.000
0.400 1.000 1.000
0.400 1.000 0.500
0.200 1.000 1.000
0.133 1.000 1.000
0.100 1.000 0.500
0.067 1.000 1.000
0.002 0.800 0.700
0.067 0.600 1.000
0.100 0.400 0.500
0.133 0.400 1.000

4.25 [ Reg Name ] section

157

4.25 [ Reg Name ] section
Region names and their font sizes for graphic output by [t-gshow], [t-rshow], and [t-3dshow] are definedin this section. When you set the gshow or rshow option in the other tallies, this definition is applied. By default,a region name is set to its region number.

[ Reg Name ]
reg
1
2
3
4
{ 5 - 8 }
....
....

name
cover
body
{cell 2}{cell 3}tube........
........

size
1
0.5
2
2
3

If you want to replace the order of region number (reg), region name (name), and font size (size), set as “regsize name”. You can use the skip operator non. At least one of name and size must be defined. If nothingis defined, it is assumed to be default. You can use the format { 4 - 7 }, but the ( { 4 - 7 } 9 10 ) format
cannot be used. If you need to use blanks in the name definition, the name must be closed by { } as the example.
If you want to use ( and ), you should write \( and \), respectively. Brackets { and } cannot be used in the namedefinition. Note that a superscript or subscript in the LaTeX format can be used by writing \{ \}. For example,
in the case of writing ˆ\{ 208 \}Pb, 208 Pb is output. The maximum number of characters of a name that you candefine is 80. You can specify a font size as a relative value to the default size.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

158

4.26 [ Counter ] section
The counter function can be defined in this section. Three counters can be used in tally sections. The counterbasically counts when
(1) a particle comes into specified region (in)(2) a particle goes out specified region (out)(3) a particle takes scattering (or nuclear reaction) in specified region (coll)(4) a particle reflects back on a certain boundary of the region (ref)You can set one progress value of the counter from -9999 to 9999, or zero set (10000). Counter values are attachedto particles. Secondary particles produced in the collisions have the same counter value of parent. Capacity of thecounter is from -9999 to 9999. Counter changes only this range. You can set the counter for each particle by usingpart = definition, and you can exclude some particles from the counter actions by *part = definition.

[ C o u n t e r ]counter = 1
part = neutron proton
reg
in
out
coll
ref
1
1
10000
0
0
11
1
10000
0
0
counter = 2*part = proton deuteron triton 3he alpha nucleus
reg
in
out
coll
( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 )-1
01
counter = 3
part = 208Pb
regcoll( 11 12 15 )5
( 6<10[1 0 0]<u=3 )100....
........
....
........

If you want to change the order of region number (reg), (in), (out), (coll), and (ref), set as “reg collin out ref”. You can use the skip operator non. At least one must be defined in the “in out coll ref”. If
nothing is defined, it is assumed no counter. Numeric gives one progress value of the counter. 10000 means zeroset. The initial counter value of source particle is zero.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value.
In the definition of part = , you can specify particles up to 20 particles. For nucleus, you can use the expression like 208Pb and Pb. The latter case, Pb, denotes all isotopes of Pb.
From ver. 2.90, 18 kinds of the opportunities that the counter counts are available as follows.
(1) a particle comes into specified region (in)(2) a particle goes out specified region (out)(3) a particle reflects back on a certain boundary of the region (ref)(4) a particle takes interactions or decays in specified region (coll)(5) a particle takes nuclear interactions in specified region (nucl)(6) a particle takes atomic interactions and generate secondary particle in specified region (atom)(7) a particle decays in specified region (dcay)

4.26 [ Counter ] section

159(8) a particle takes elastic scattering in specified region (elst)(9) a particle takes inelastic scattering in specified region (iels)(10) a particle takes fission in specified region (fiss)(11) a particle generates delta-rays in specified region (delt)(12) a particle generates atomic fluorescence x-rays in specified region (fluo)(13) a particle generates Auger electrons in specified region (auge)(14) a particle takes bremsstrahlung in specified region (brem)(15) a particle takes photoelectric eﬀect in specified region (phel)(16) a particle takes Compton scattering in specified region (cmpt)(17) a particle generates electron-positron pair in specified region (pprd)(18) a particle is annihilated in specified region (anih)
Here, nucl, atom, and dcay, which are particular interactions, belong to coll. elst, iels, and fiss, which are nuclear
reactions, belong to nucl. delt, fluo, auge, brem, phel, cmpt, pprd, and anih, which are atomic interactions, belong
to atom. When you want to analyze the PHITS simulation in detail, set these keywords. Note that if you set colland nucl at the same time, the counting is duplicated when a nuclear reaction event occurs.
If you set (fiss), the counter is called when fission channels of the nuclear data library and the statistical decay
model (GEM) are chosen.

4 SECTIONS FORMAT

160

4.27 [ Timer ] section
The timer function can be defined in this section. The timer controls the time of each particle when (1) aparticle comes into specified region, (2) a particle goes out specified region, (3) a particle takes scattering inspecified region, and (4) a particle reflects back on a certain boundary of the region. You can set the time to bezero(-1), stopped(1) or nothing(0).
[ T i m e r ]
reg
in
1
0
11
1
....
....
....
....
....
....

out
-1
0
....
....
....

coll
0
0
....
....
....

ref
0
0
....
....
....

If you want to replace the order of region number (reg), (in), (out), (coll), and (ref), set as “reg coll inout ref”. You can use the skip operator non. At least one must be defined in the “in out coll ref”. If
nothing is defined, it is assumed no action.
You can use the format ( { 2 - 5 } 8 9 ), and you can use the lattice and universe style as( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you need to close a value by () if it is not a single numeric value.

161

5

Common parameters for tallies
PH I TS has the following tally functions.

Table 5.1: Tally sections
name[t-track][t-cross][t-point][t-heat][t-deposit][t-deposit2][t-yield][t-product][t-dpa][t-let][t-sed][t-time][t-star][t-dchain][t-wwg][t-wwbg][t-volume][t-userdefined][t-gshow][t-rshow][t-3dshow]

explanation
Particle fluence in a certain region.
Particle fluence crossing at a certain surface.
Particle fluence at a certain point.
Heat generation in a certain region.
Deposit energy in a certain region.
Deposit energies in certain two regions.
Residual nuclei yield in a certain region.
Produced particle in a certain region.
Displacement Per Atom (DPA) in a certain region.
LET distribution in a certain region.
Microdosimetric quantity distribution in a certain region.
Time information of particle in a certain region.
Star density (reaction rate) in a certain region.
Residual nuclide yields (in combination with DCHAIN-SP).
Output parameters for [weight window].
Output parameters for [ww bias].
Automatic calculation of region volume.7
Any quantities that user defined.
2D geometry visualization.
2D geometry visualization with physical quantities.
3D geometry visualization.

Common parameters used in these tallies are described below.

5.1 Geometrical mesh
In the tallies shown by Table 5.1, GG region mesh (reg), r-z scoring mesh (r-z), and xyz scoring mesh (xyz)can be used for geometrical mesh of tallying area.
You can choose one mesh frommesh =[ reg,

r-z,

xyz ]

5.1.1 Region mesh
The region mesh defined by the region number or the cell number can be written bymesh = reg
reg = 1 2 3 4 5 ( 10 11 ) 50

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

162

each region number or cell number is separated by blank. If you want to combine some regions, use(following format can be used for defining sequential region numbers.

). Themesh = reg
reg = { 1 - 5 } ( 10 11 ) ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 )In the format {n1 - n2} (n1 is smaller than n2), you can specify regions from n1 to n2. You can’t specify like( n1 - n2 ). Styles ( {} ) and ( all ) can be used, but { () } cannot be used. You can use
the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). By using above format, you can tally from eachlattice individually. And if you set region as reg = all, all regions become tallying region. However, cells which
do not belong to bottom level, are not included.

5.1.2 Definition of the region and volume for repeated structures and lattices
When you define regions including repeated structures and lattices, you must close your definition by ().
A level structure is indicated by <. In the case an intermediate level has the lattice structure, you can specify
lattices using [] represented by the lattice coordinate (s, t, u), after the cell number as 160[1:2 3:6 1:1].
In this example, lattices, which from 1 to 2 in s direction, 3 to 6 in t direction, and 1 in u direction, are defined.
Or you can specify individually as 160[1 3 4, 2 3 4, 3 3 4]. The style () in one level can be used to
combine some regions. See next example.
Example 48: mesh = reg example (1)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

mesh = reg
reg = (all)({ 201 - 205 })( 161 < 160[1:2 3:6 1:1] )( (201 202 203 204) < (161 162 163 ) )( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61 ( 62 63 ) )This region mesh definition is echoed as
Example 49: mesh = reg example (2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:

mesh = reg# mesh type is region-wise
reg = ( all ) ( { 201 - 205 } ) ( 161 < 160[ 1:2 3:6 1:1 ] ) ( ({ 201 - 204 } ) < ( { 161 - 163 } ) ) ( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61
( 62 63 ) )volume# combined, lattice or level structure
non
reg
vol
# reg definition
1 100018.1000E+01 # ( all )2 100025.0000E+00 # ( { 201 - 205 } )3 100031.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 3 1 ] )4 10004
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 3 1 ] )5 10005
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 4 1 ] )6 10006
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 4 1 ] )7 100071.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 5 1 ] )8 10008
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 5 1 ] )9 10009
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 1 6 1 ] )10 10010
1.0000E+00 # ( 161 < 160[ 2 6 1 ] )11 10011
4.0000E+00 # ( ( { 201 - 204 } ) < ( { 161 - 163 } ) )12 10012
2.0000E+00 # ( ( 90 100 ) < 61 )13 10013
1.0000E+00 # ( 120 < 61 )14 10014
2.0000E+00 # ( ( 90 100 ) < ( 62 63 ) )15 10015
1.0000E+00 # ( 120 < ( 62 63 ) )5.1 Geometrical mesh163

In the input, it looks only 5 regions defined, but in the input echo, you can see 15 regions are defined for tally. In
this input echo, region numbers are defined automatically starting from 10001, and the volume of each cell is set 1
because of no [volume] definition.
We explain the detail of 15 regions appears in the volume description of this input echo.
First for ( all ), 81 cells are defined in the bottom level, so the volume of ( all ) is set 81. If the volumeof the cell is defined correctly in the [volume] section, you don’t need to define the volume here again.
Next for ({ 201 - 205 }), this combined region has volume 5 in the echo, since this combined regions have
5 cells of bottom level. This is also not required to re-define here if the volume is set in the [volume] section.
For ( 161 < 160[1:2 3:6 1:1] ), the region 161 is included as a lattice in region 160. In this expression
in the lattice coordinate system, 8 lattices of the region 160 from 1 to 2 in s direction, 3 to 6 in t direction, and 1 inu direction, are used for the tally. In the echo, the number of regions in bottom level is echoed 1. In the case, youhave to specify the volume by yourself by the volume definition below.
For ( (201 202 203 204) < (161 162 163 ) ), some regions are defined in each level, but these are all
closed by ( ), so it means one region as a whole. In this case, given volume by the echo is not correct, so set
volume manually by the volume definition below.
For ( ( 90 100 ) 120 < 61 ( 62 63 ) ), there are two independent regions in each level, so 4 regions
are defined here. In this case given volume by the echo is not correct too, so set volume manually in the [volume]
section.
You can set volume as below.

mesh = reg
reg = 1 2 3 4 ( 5 < 12 ) ( {13 - 17} )volumereg
vol1
1.000025.000036.000041.000010001
6.000010002
5.0000In above example, region numbers from 1 to 4 are set normally as you can see, but regions ( 5 < 12 ) and ({13 - 17} ) have numbers 10001 and 10002. These big values are given in an input echo automatically. You can
see and paste this settings from the input echo.
If you want to change the order of region number (reg) and volume (vol), set as “vol reg”. You can use theskip operator non.
In the input echo, numbered entry is given in non column. When axis = reg, the numbered entry is used asa value of X axis. Even if you use GG, use the symbol not cell but reg here.
When you define regions in the bottom level, set same region twice as ( 3000 < 3000[1:2 3:61:1] ).

5.1.3 r-z mesh
When you use the r-z scoring mesh, first, oﬀsets for x and y coordinate of the center of cylinder can be definedasmesh = r-zx0 = 1.0y0 = 2.0

This can be omissible. Then, define r and z mesh as

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

164

mesh
= r-z
r-type = [1-5]..........
..........
z-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.
You can add θ degree of freedom in r-z mesh of [t-track] tally. You can use a-type mesh definition to
specify θ of r-z mesh in the same manner as in the other angle mesh cases. However, the maximum angle of θmesh is restricted 360 degree (2π) in this case. You can obtain the θ dependence of results of [t-track] tally by
setting axis=rad or axis=deg. The rad represents the θ in radian, while deg in degree.

5.1.4 xyz mesh
When you use the xyz scoring mesh, set x, y, and z mesh as

mesh
= xyz
x-type = [1-5]..........
..........
y-type = [1-5]..........
..........
z-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.

5.2 Energy mesh
Energy mesh begins as

e-type = [1-5]..........
..........

”e1-type” and ”e2-type” are also used in DEPOSIT2 tally. Mesh definition is described later.

5.3 LET mesh
LET mesh begins as5.4 Time mesh165

l-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.

5.4 Time mesh
Time mesh is defined ast-type = [1-5]..........
..........

Mesh definition is described later.

5.5 Angle mesh
Angle mesh in cross tally is defined asa-type = [1, 2, -1, -2]..........
..........

If a-type is defined by positive number, this mesh denotes cosine mesh. If a-type is defined by negative
number, the mesh denotes angle mesh. Mesh definition is described later.

5.6 Mesh definition
There are 8 kinds of mesh definition as e-type, t-type, x-type, y-type, z-type, r-type, a-type
and l-type. The format is common for every mesh types. So only the e-type definition is described below. For
other types, replace “e” into “t”, “x”, “y”, ... and “a”. For example, replace “ne” as “nt, nx, ny, ... , na”,
“emin” as “tmin, xmin, ymin, ... , amin”, and so on.

5.6.1 Mesh type
You can use 5 kinds of mesh type as shown below.
It is noted that you can use only 1, 2 (-1, -2) mesh types in a-type definition. Each mesh type format is shownin followings.

5.6.2 e-type = 1
When you use e-type=1, set number of group, then numerical data as

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

166

Table 5.2: mesh typemesh type
1
2
3
4

5

explanation
give number of groups and mesh points by data
give number of groups, minimum and maximum values.
mesh is divided equally by linear scale.
give number of groups, minimum and maximum values.
mesh is divided equally by log scale.
give mesh width, minimum and maximum values.
mesh points are given by linear scale.
Number of groups is set automatically as resulting maximum
value becomes same with given value, or takes larger value withsmall excess as possible.
give minimum and maximum values and log value of mesh width
mesh points are given by log scale.
Number of groups is set automatically as resulting maximum
value becomes same with given value, or takes larger value withsmall excess as possible.

e-type = 1
ne = number of groupdata(1) data(2) data(3) data(4)data(5) data(6) data(7) data(8).........
.........
data(ne+1)

You can use multi lines without any symbols for line connection.

5.7 Other tally definitions

5.6.3 e-type = 2, 3
When you use e-type = 2, 3, set number of group, minimum value, and maximum value ase-type = 2, 3
ne = number of groupemin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

5.6.4 e-type = 4
When you use e-type=4, set mesh width, minimum value, and maximum value ase-type = 4
edel = width of meshemin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

5.6.5 e-type = 5
When you use e-type= 5, set mesh width, minimum value, and maximum value ase-type = 5
edel = log( width of mesh )emin = minimum value
emax = maximum value

In the case, mesh width is for log scale, i.e., edel = log( Mi+1 / Mi ).

5.7 Other tally definitions
5.7.1 Particle definition
You can define particles aspart = proton neutron pion+ 3112 208Pb

or

167

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

168

part = protonpart = neutron
part = pion+
part = 3112
part = 208Pb

See Table 3.4 for particle identification. You can also use the kf code number.
If you define all particles aspart = all

Maximum 6 particles can be define in a tally. If you want to tally more particles, use another tally sections of
the same kind of tally.
If you want to tally some particles as a group, you can use ( ) as the following. The maximum number inside
the ( ) is 6.

part = ( proton neutron ) all pion+ 3112 208Pb

In this case, as the first group, the sum of proton and neutron contribution is tallied, the second is the sum of all. 5groups of the particle are printed out in this tally.
For nucleus, you can use the expression like 208Pb and Pb. The later case, Pb, denotes all isotopes of Pb.

5.7.2 axis definition
X axis value for output is described here. There are many kinds of axis shown as (depend on kinds of tallies
or geometrical meshes),eng, reg, x, y, z, r, t, xy, yz, zx, rz,cos, the, mass, charge, chart, dchain
let, t-eng, eng-t, t-e1, e1-t, t-e2, e2-t, e12, e21axis = eng

You can set multiple axis per one tally byaxis = eng

or,

x

y

5.7 Other tally definitions

169

axis = eng
axis = xaxis = y

If you define multiple axes, output results are written in diﬀerent files. So you need to specify multiple output files
as shown in the next subsection when multiple axes are defined.
It should be noted that you can define only one axis in a [t-yield] section from ver. 2.50. This restriction
was implemented to calculate statistical uncertainties correctly. If you want to define several axes in the [t-yield]
tally, you have to set the corresponding number of [t-yield] sections in a input file.

5.7.3 file definition
The format to define name of output file is,file = file.001

file.002

file.003

Note that the file name should not have the extension of “.eps”or “.vtk”. As described before, when you set multiple
axis, set output files for each axis like following example.

file = file.001
file = file.002
file = file.003

5.7.4 resfile definition
The format to specify a file name of past tally in the restart calculation is,
resfile = file.001
where the file name must be written with full pathname. Even if several resfile parameters are set in a tally
section, only the earliest one is used. resfile is set to file by default. In this case, results of the past tally are
overwritten.

5.7.5 unit definition
Set output unit asunit = number

The unit number and its meanings are described in each tally explanation.

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

170

5.7.6 factor definition
You can set normalize factor by this format.

factor = numberThis value is multiplied to output values. When you use the [t-gshow] tally, this factor defines line thickness
instead.

5.7.7 output definition
Set output type as

output = name of output

Details are described in each tally explanation.

5.7.8 info definition
This option defines whether detailed information is output or not. Set 0 or 1 asinfo = 0, 1

5.7.9 title definition
This option is for title astitle = title of the tally

It is omissible, and in this case, default is used.

5.7.10 ANGEL parameter definition
In order to add ANGEL parameters in tally output, define asangel = xmin(1.0) ymin(1.3e-8)

Defined parameters are converted to the ANGEL format asp: xmin(1.0) ymin(1.3e-8)

5.7 Other tally definitions

171

These parameters change the minimum of the horizontal and vertical axes, respectively. The main ANGEL parameters are shown in Table 5.3. Please see the ANGEL manual in more detail.
Table 5.3: ANGEL parameter
ANGEL parameter
xmin
xmax
ymin
ymax
xlin
xlog
ylin
ylog
cmnm
cmum
cmmm
cmmt
cmkm

Explanation
Minimum of horizontal axis.
Maximum of horizontal axis.
Minimum of vertical axis.
Maximum of vertical axis.
Change horizontal axis to liner scale.
Change horizontal axis to logarithmic scale.
Change vertical axis to liner scale.
Change vertical axis to logarithmic scale.
Convert cm to nm.
Convert cm to µm.
Convert cm to mm.
Convert cm to m.
Convert cm to km.

From ver. 2.89, the default size was changed from A4 to US letter. ANGEL parameters, a4us(US letter),a3pp(A3), a4pp(A4), a5pp(A5), b3pp(B3), b4pp(B4), and b5pp(B5) can be used to change an output size of aneps file. The characters given in parentheses represent each output size.

5.7.11 SANGEL parameter definition
This definition can be used to insert all ANGEL parameters into tally output files unlike the usual ANGEL
parameter definition, which can specify only ANGEL parameters defined by p:. For example, defining infl:
parameter for ANGEL, the tally file includes an experimental data file, and both calculated results and the experimental data can be plotted in a figure (eps file).
The SANGEL parameter can be set using the format sangel=number of definition lines, and then writing thelines to define the ANGEL parameters. An example with sangel is as follows.
sangel = 2
infl:{exp.dat}
w: ($\theta=$ 0 deg) / X(10) Y(100)where exp.dat is a data file of the experimental data. The data can be shown on the figure of the tally result. By
using w: parameter, the comment “θ=0 deg” can be put at the coordinate of X=10, Y=100 in the figure.

5.7.12 2d-type definition
When you define 2 dimensional output as axis = xy, you must set this 2d-type option as

2d-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

These 2d-types give the format of data arrange.
• 2d-type = 1, 2, 3, 6, 7
Data are written by below format (the example is written by Fortran style).
( ( data(ix,iy), ix = 1, nx ), iy = ny, 1, -1 )

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

172

10 data are written in a line. Also a header for the ANGEL input is inserted. The ANGEL header is inserted
by 2d-type = 1 for contour plot, 2d-type = 2 for cluster plot, 2d-type = 3 for color plot, 2d-type =6 for cluster and contour plot, 2d-type = 7 for color and contour plot.
• 2d-type = 4
Data are written by below format
do iy = ny, 1, -1
do ix = 1, nx( x(ix), y(iy), data(ix,iy) )end doend do3 data of x(ix), y(iy) and data(ix,iy) are written in a line.
• 2d-type = 5
Data are written by below formaty/x ( x(ix), ix = 1, nx )do iy = ny, 1, -1( y(iy), data(ix,iy), ix = 1, nx )end donx + 1 data are written in a line, and total ny + 1 lines. It is useful to use in the tabular soft like Excel.

5.7.13 gshow definition
This option can be used in all tallies without [t-gshow] and [t-rshow]. If you set gshow option with xyz mesh,xy, yz, or xz axis, and 2d-type = 1, 2, or 3, ANGEL can create a graphical plot with region boundary and material
name, or region name, or lattice number on the two dimensional output. You can also obtain graphical plots
directory from the PH I TS calculation by the “epsout” option.

gshow =

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

In above example, 0 means no gshow option, 1 means gshow with region boundary, 2 means gshow with region
boundary and material name, 3 means gshow with region boundary and region name, 4 means gshow with region
boundary and lattice numbers. When you increase the resolution of the plot by resol parameter, the indicationof region name, material name and lattice number on the graph are sometimes disturbed. In this case, you should
increase the mesh points instead of resol.
You can see your geometry plot on a graph without transport calculation by setting icntl = 8 in the [parameters]
section, and this gshow option. You should check whether regions are correct, and a xyz mesh resolution is goodor not, before long time calculation.

5.7.14 rshow definition
You can use rshow definition in all tallies except for [t-cross] and [t-gshow] tallies. This option is available with region mesh, xy, yz, zx axis. This option makes a two dimensional plot in which each region is coloredwith the amount of its region’s output value. And region boundaries, material name, or region name numbers arealso displayed. The xyz mesh definition is required after this rshow definition.

5.7 Other tally definitions

173

rshow = 1, 2, 3
x-type = [2,4]..........
..........
y-type = [2,4]..........
..........
z-type = [2,4]..........
..........

rshow = 0 means no rshow option, 1 means rshow with region boundary, 2 means rshow with region boundaryand material name, 3 means rshow with region boundary and region name numbers. If rshow =0, xyz meshdefinition is not required, comment out it. When you increase the resolution of the plot by resol parameter, theindication of region name, material name and lattice number on the graph are sometimes disturbed. In this case,
you should increase the mesh points instead of resol.
If you use the rshow option with “reg” mesh, there is no output for the values of each region. In this case, you
cannot re-plot the figure because of no original data. When this rshow option is used, usually axis is set as xy,
yz, and zx. But you should use in addition axis = reg in order to save results into another file, for re-plotting.
You can re-plot figures from saved data and [t-rshow] tally function.
You can execute this option without transport calculation by using icntl =10 in the [parameters] section.
For icntl =10, PH I TS makes a two dimensional plot for the tallies with reg mesh, xy, yz, zx axis and rshow = 1,2, 3. In the figure, diﬀerent colors are used for diﬀerent materials. You should check whether regions are correct
and a xyz mesh resolution is good or not, before long time calculation.

5.7.15 x-txt, y-txt, z-txt definition
If you want to change x, y, and z axis titles in the output figure, use these option. These title cannot be definedin the ANGEL parameter.
x-txt = x axis title
y-txt = y axis title
z-txt = z axis title

5.7.16 volmat definition
The volmat parameter corrects a volume where xyz mesh crosses region boundaries. This option is eﬀectivein the case that mesh is xyz, and the material parameter is defined. This corrected volume is calculated by theMonte Carlo method for specified material. volmat denotes the number of scanning parallel to x, y, and z axis
respectively for the Monte Carlo calculation. So if you set too large volmat, the calculation takes long time. You
need to take care of it. If volmat is given by negative value, all xyz mesh is scanned. If positive value, the scanning
is not performed when 8 apexes of the mesh are included in the same material.

5.7.17 epsout definition
If you set epsout =1, output file is treated by ANGEL automatically and an eps file is created. This eps filename is named by replacing the extension into “.eps”. With itall = 1 setting, the eps file is created after every
batch calculation. You can monitor the PH I TS results in real time, by displaying the eps file with the ghostview andby setting refresh function for a file updating by typing “w” key on the ghostview.

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

174

5.7.18 counter definition
You can make a gate to the tallying quantities by using the counter defined by [counter] section. Set minimum ctmin(i) and maximum value ctmax(i) for each counter. The “i” is the counter number from 1 to 3. By
default, ctmin(i) = -9999, and ctmax(i) = 9999. When multiple counters are specified, the common part ofthese terms is tallied.

5.7.19 resolution and line thickness definitions
You can increase the resolution of the region boundaries in the gshow, rshow, and 3dshow with keeping xyz
mesh by resol. Default value is 1, it is same as xyz mesh resolution. If you set resol = 2, the resolution
becomes 2 times for each side. It is useful to draw smooth line for xyz mesh. Also you can obtain clear graphics
by set resol larger for the 3dshow. Even if you set resol larger, memory usage is not changed.
The width shows the line thickness for gshow, rshow, and 3dshow. Default value is 0.5.

5.7.20 trcl coordinate transformation
By this trcl option, you can transform the coordinate of the r-z, and xyz mesh. There are two ways to define
the transformation as below.

trcl = number
trcl = O1 O2

O3

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

M

The first definition is to specify the transformation number defined in [transform] section. The next one is todefine the transformation directly here with 13 parameters as same as in [transform] section. If the data are notwritten in a line, you can write them in multiple lines without the line sequential mark. But you need to put morethan 11 blanks before data on the top of the sequential lines.
In the 3dshow tally, trcl can be used to transform the box. This will be explained in the [t-3dshow] tally
section.

5.7.21 dump definition
In the [t-cross], [t-time], [t-product] tallies, information on the particles can be dumped on the file.
By the parameter of “dump =”, the number of the dump data in one record is specified. If this number is given
by positive number, the data are read as binary data. If negative, the data are read as ascii data. In next line, the data
sequence of one record is described. The relation between the physical quantities and id number is the followings,
Table 5.4: id number of dump data (1)physical quantities
id number

kf
1

x
2

y
3

z
4

u
5

v
6

w
7

e
8

wt
9

time
10

c1
11

c2
12

c3
13

sx
14

sy
15

sz
16

Table 5.5: id number of dump data (2)physical quantities
id number

name
17

nocas
18

nobch
19

no
20

Here kf means the kf-code of the particles (see Table 3.4), x, y, z are coordinates (cm), u, v, w denote the unit
vectors of the direction of the particle, e is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon for nucleus), wt is the weight, time

5.7 Other tally definitions

175

is the initial time (ns), c1, c2, c3 are the values of counters, and sx, sy, sz are the unit vectors of the directionof spin, respectively. name is a collision number of the particle, nocas is a current history number of this batch,
nobch is a current batch number, no is a cascade id in this history. These are assumed as real*8 for the binary data,n(1p1e24.15) data format for the ascii data.
For an example, one record has 9 data as
kf

e

wt

x

y

z

u

v

w

6

7

To read this data, we write the parameters as
dump = 9
1 8 9

2

3

4

5

When you use this dump parameter, axis and file are restricted to one axis and one file, and unit is always
1. The dumped data are written on a file named “*** dmp”, where “***”indicates the file name specified by“file=***”. The normal output of the tally is written on “***”. From this file, you can get the information on
the total normalization factor. (In the former version of PHITS (before 2.66), the normal output was written on
a configuration file (.cfg), and the dumped data were written on “***”.) In the parallel computing, files to thenumber of (PE−1) corresponding to each PE (Processor Element) are created for writing and reading dumped data.
If you set idpara=0 or 1, a file is made in the directory named by /wk/uname/ on each of the nodes. If you set
idpara=1 or 3, the each IP number is put at the end of the filename. The each PE writes down its result on only
the corresponding file, and reads it from the same file in the re-calculation.

5 COMMON PARAMETERS FOR TALLIES

176

5.8 Function to sum up two (or more) tally results
After version 2.74, PHITS has a function to sum up two (or more) tally results. There are two methods for
sum up; one is to integrate the tally results considering the history number of each simulation, while the other isto add the tally results weighted by user defined ratios. The former can be used for the parallel calculation on
computers in which MPI protocol is not installed. On the other hand, the latter is suit for the simulation with
diﬀerent source terms whose intensities cannot be fixed before the simulation, such as that for Intensity-Modulated
Radiation Therapy (IMRT).
In order to use this function, you have to satisfy the following conditions:• icntl is set to 13 in [parameters] section• The parameters for each tally results such as mesh, axis and part are identical to one another• “sumtally” subsection is defined in the tally section that outputs one of the summing up tallies. 43 44“sumtally” subsection is ignored when icntl parameter is not set to 13 in [parameters] section. (From ver. 2.88,“sumtally” works all tallies.) Please see ppt file or sample input file in \phits\utility\sumtally in detail.
“sumtally” subsection should be defined between the lines of sumtally start and sumtally end written
in the tally section that outputs one of the summing up tallies. The set definition is ignored in the sumtallysubsection.
The parameters used in “sumtally” subsection are summarized in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6: Parameters used in “sumtally” subsection
nameisumtally =value
1(default), 2

nfile =
(next line)

Numberfilename value

sfile =
filename
sumfactor = （Omissible, D=1.0）

description
Summing up procedure
1: Integration of tally results
considering history number of each simulation
2: Sum of tally results weighted by user
defined ratios
Number of summing up files
Summing up file name, weighted value
Sum of the weighted values is automaticallynormalized to sumfactor for isumtally=2
Output file nameNormalization factor

For example, if you have two tally results “result-1.out” and “result-2.out” that were obtained from maxcas= 100 and maxbch = 10 and 20, respectively, and you would like to obtain their summing up results considering
their histories, you have to write:
Example 50: example for isumtally=1
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

sumtally start
isumtally = 1$(D=1) sumtally option, 1:integration, 2:weighted sum
nfile = 2
$ number of tally files
result-1.out 1.0
result-2.out 1.0
sfile = result-s.out $ file name of output by sumtally option
sumfactor = 1.0$ (D=1.0) normalization factor
sumtally end

Using this sumtally subsection, you can obtain the results for maxcas = 100 and maxbch = 30. Please be
sure that the initial random seeds for calculating “result-1.out” and “result-2.out” should be diﬀerent from each
43 Before ver. 2.81, this function is available even if file parameter is not defined in the tally section. However, after ver. 2.82, PHITS
occurs the error in the setting without the definition of file.
44 Before ver. 2.85, only one “sumtally” subsection can be defined in a PHITS input file.

5.8 Function to sum up two (or more) tally results

177

other, otherwise you would get biased results for certain random numbers. The most recommended method forchanging the initial random seed is to use irskip parameter. The weighted value for each tally outputs are
generally set to 1 for isumtally = 1, unless you would like to change the weight of source particles. The output
file obtained from this sumtally section, “result-s.out”, can be used for restart calculation by setting istdev < 0.
Note that the initial random seed in the last file of the summing up files is used.
For isumtally = 2, the weighted summation of the tally results, X̄, is calculated by the following equation:X̄ = F

N
∑
rj
j=1

r

X̄ j

(19)

where F is the normalization factor defined by sumfactor, N is the number of summing up files defined by∑
nfile, X̄ j is the j-th tally results, r j is the weighted value of j-th tally, and r is the sum of r j , i.e. r = Nj=1 r j . The
uncertainty of the summation value, σX , can be calculated byvut N ( )∑ rj 2σX = F
σ2X j
(20)
r
j=1
where σX j is the standard deviation of j-th tally results.
If you have two tally results “result-l.out” and “result-r.out”, and you would like to sum up them weighted byfactors of 2.0 and 3.0, respectively, you have to write:
Example 51: example for isumtally=2
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:

sumtally start
isumtally = 2$(D=1) sumtally option, 1:integration, 2:weighted sum
nfile = 2
$ number of tally files
result-l.out 2.0
result-r.out 3.0
sfile = result-s.out $ file name of output by sumtally option
sumfactor = 5.0$ (D=1.0) normalization factor
sumtally end

You can obtain the same results by using multi-source function, but it is more convenient to use sumtallysubsection when you would like to change the weighted values for several cases. It should be mentioned that thesum of the weighted values is automatically normalized to sumfactor for isumtally=2. The output file obtained
from this sumtally section, “result-s.out”, cannot be used for restart calculation.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

178

6

Tally input format

6.1 [ T-Track ] section
Using the [T-Track] tally, you can obtain the fluence in any specified region. In this tally, track length isevaluated whenever particles pass through the specified region as shown in Fig. 6.1, and the sum of the track
lengths in the unit of (cm) is scored. Then, particle fluence in the unit of (/cm2 /source) is determined from thescored track lengths divided by the volume of the region and the number of the source particles.

V

track length
Figure 6.1: [T-Track] tally: track length (solid line) is calculated.
For an example, you can get information on the detector response in the specified region by utilizing this tally.
Multiplying the fluence by a cross section (in the unit of cm2 ) of the detector, you can estimate the number ofcounts in the response.
Table 6.1: [t-track] parameter (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =
material =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
e-type =2 5 8
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2, -1, -2(omissible)

a-type =explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-track]
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option
angle mesh of θ degree of freedom for mesh=r-z
You need angle mesh subsection below this option

6.1 [ T-Track ] section

179

Table 6.2: [t-track] parameter (2)nameunit =

value
1, 2, 3, 4

11, 12, 13, 14

axis =

file =
resfile =eng, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
tfile name(omissible, D=file)x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
1

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =2

explanation
1: [1/cm2 /source]
2: [1/cm2 /MeV/source]
3: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/source]
4: [cm/source]
11: [1/cm2 /nsec/source]
12: [1/cm2 /MeV/nsec/source]
13: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/nsec/source]
14: [cm/nsec/source]
x axis value of output data
2 dimensionaltime axis
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)“Lethargy ” in unit = 3 or 13 is a natural logarithmic unit of energy, and defined by ln(Eref /E) using areference energy Eref and a particle’s energy E. If you set these units, you can obtain results per Lethargy, which
are calculated by Lethargy widths, ln(Ehigh /Elow ), at each energy bins given in the energy mesh subsection. Here,
Ehigh and Elow are maximum and minimum values of the energy bins, respectively.
If you set unit = 1, 2, 3, 11, 12 or 13, you obtain the mean particle fluence in the specified region,
which is calculated from the sum of the track lengths per source divided by the volume of the region. Note that forreg mesh you have to set the volume in the [Volume] section. If you do not, you obtain the particle fluence forvolume = 1cm3 , i.e. the sum of the track lengths per source. For r-z and xyz mesh, the volume is automaticallycalculated. If you set unit=4 or 14, you obtain the sum of the track length per source.
You can add θ degree of freedom in r-z mesh of this tally. The a-type mesh definition to specify θ is thesame manner as in the other angle mesh cases. You can obtain the θ dependence of results by setting axis=rad or
axis=deg. The rad represents the θ in radian, while deg in degree.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

180

Table 6.3: [t-track] parameter (3)nameresol =value
1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =multiplier =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)
number of material(omissible)

explanation
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.
multiplier for each material
You need multiplier subsection below this option

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6.1 [ T-Track ] section

181

Using multiplier option in this tally, you can multiply results of the [t-track] tally by factors depending
on energies of particles. If you define a data set in [multiplier] section, any factors can be used. The basic
format is given as (C k), where C is a normalization factor and k is the ID number of the set. It is noted that kshould be negative. Format of the multiplier subsection is given as follows.

multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 1000
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 1
-201 ) ( 2 -202 )2( 1.2 -201 ) ( 3 -202 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
The line of multiplier = specifies the number of material where the multiplication is considered. You can use
all instead of the number. For this case, one should also use all for mat column below. The second line of part= defines the particles considered. The maximum number of the particle is 6 and all can be also used, which isdefault. The multiplication aﬀects only these considered particles. The third line of emax = defines the maximum
energy of the multiplication. If emax is omitted, it is automatically defined as the maximum energy given in the[multiplier] section, or dmax(i), i = 1, 2, or 14 when you use nuclear data library. The number of matcolumn is the material number which is considered to be multiplied. The columns of mset1, mset2 define themultiplier set. The maximum 6 multiplier can be set. For each set, the result is printed out. You can define several
multiplier subsections in one [t-track] section, but you should set the number of the multiplier sets to beequal in each subsection.
Some parameter sets built-in PHITS can be used. If you set k = −1, a value of 1/weight is used as themultiplication factor. For k = −2, a value of 1/velocity is used. For k = −120, material density is used. Therefore,
you can obtain mass in the region setting icntl=5. With k = −101, −102, −112, or −114, the conversion factor of
proton, neutron, electron, or photon, respectively, is used. These conversion factors were estimated with a conditionof Antero-Posterior geometry (AP) irradiation.?) The unit of the dose conversion factors is (µSv/h)/(n/sec/cm2 ). It
should be noted that the interpolation method of conversion factor has been changed in PHITS ver. 2.00 fromlinear-linear to log-log.
You can also use the following format.

multiplier = number of materialpart = proton
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 33 0.543 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 34 0.321 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 35 0.678 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
In above example, the mset1 is for heat and the mset2 is zero for proton, attenuator set for neutron.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

182

6.2 [ T-Cross ] section
The [T-Cross] tally can be used to obtain the current or flux (actually, the fluence) on any specified surface.
In this tally, a particle crossing the surface simply adds 1 to the current and 1/ cos θ to the flux, where θ is the angle
between the direction of the particle trajectory and the normal vector to the surface. In PHITS, the current and flux
are similar but distinct physical quantities; they diﬀer in terms of the surface element used to calculate the numberof the particles crossing per unit area. The current is evaluated by dividing by the area of the surface S shown in
Fig. 6.2; by contrast, the flux is calculated by dividing by S cos θ. The value of S is given in the geometry meshsubsection as area for mesh=reg and is calculated automatically for the r-z and xyz meshes.

direction ofparticle trajectory

Scosθ
S
θ

Figure 6.2: Relation between the areas S and S cos θ.
As the flux in this tally is evaluated by weighting by 1/ cos θ, the result is equivalent to that obtained from the[t-track] tally for an extremely thin region. Consequently, information on the detector response in the specified
surface can be obtained from the [t-cross] tally. Multiplying the flux by a cross section (in the unit of cm2 ) of
the detector enables estimation of the number of counts in the response.

6.2 [ T-Cross ] section

183

Table 6.4: [t-cross] parameters (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =all (default),
particle name1, 2, 3, 4, 5

e-type =a-type =t-type =unit =

1, 2, -1, -2
The option is required
for a-curr and oa-curr
1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, rcos, the, txy

explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-cross]energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option
angle mesh (1, 2 :cos, -1, -2 :degree)
You need angle mesh subsection below this option
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option
1: [1/cm2 /source]
2: [1/cm2 /MeV/source]
3: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/source]
4: [1/cm2 /sr/source]
5: [1/cm2 /MeV/sr/source]
6: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/sr/source]
11: [1/cm2 /nsec/source]
12: [1/cm2 /MeV/nsec/source]
13: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/nsec/source]
14: [1/cm2 /sr/nsec/source]
15: [1/cm2 /MeV/sr/nsec/source]
16: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/sr/nsec/source]
x axis value of output data
angle (cos, the) and time (t) mesh2 dimensional

There may be cases in which results of a tally are incorrect when r-z or xyz mesh surface agrees with that ofthe defined cell.
The current for a specified angle can be obtained using the angle mesh shown in Fig. 6.3. In cases where
unit=4, 5, 6, 14, 15, or 16, the output is given as a quantity per solid angle (in steradians) calculatedusing the mesh size of the angle-bin defined in the angle mesh subsection.

θFigure 6.3: Schematic of tally using angle mesh.
The “lethargy” in unit=3, 6, 13, or 16 is a natural logarithmic unit of energy defined by ln(Eref /E)
using a reference energy Eref and the particle energy E. By setting these units results per unit Lethargy can beobtained, which are calculated from the Lethargy width, ln(Ehigh /Elow ), in each energy bin given in the energy
mesh subsection. Here, Ehigh and Elow are the maximum and minimum values of the energy bins, respectively.
In unit=4, 5, 6, 14, 15, or 16, “sr” denotes steradians as the solid angle unit.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

184

Table 6.5: [t-cross] parameters (2)namefile =
resfile =value
file name(omissible, D=file)

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=2)
flux
current
f-currb-curro-currof-currob-curr
a-curroa-curr(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

output =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =
epsout =0.5 (default)
0 (default), 1, 2

explanation
Define file names as same number of axis.
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation. Even if
several axis parameters were defined, specify only one resfile.
Normalization factor.
Title.
Angel parameters.
Sangel parameters.
Options for 2 dimensional plot.
Flux by surface crossing.
Current by surface crossing.
Forward current by surface crossing.
Backward current by surface crossing.
Omni45 current by surface crossing.
Omni45 forward current by surface crossing.
Omni45 backward current by surface crossing.
Angle mesh current by surface crossing.
Angle mesh omni45 current by surface crossing.
x axis title.
y axis title.
z axis title.
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), materialname (2), region name (3), and LAT number(4) are plotted by the
option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow>0.
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view with error information.
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view, and outputting ageometry error file (.err).
The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow option.
The option defines the line thickness for gshow option.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps file isnamed by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file, except
for axis= xy, yz, xz.

The output options output=f-curr, b-curr, of-curr, and ob-curr can be used in either xyz or r-z
meshes. Note that in xyz meshes these options are available only for the z-direction.

45 Omni means the energy integrated.

6.2 [ T-Cross ] section

185

Table 6.6: [t-cross] parameters (3)namectmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =

value(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

dump =

Number of data

(next line)

Data sequencegslat =
stdcut =multiplier =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)
Number of material(omissible)

explanation
Minimum value for i-th counter.
Maximum value for i-th counter.
Coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh.
For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file. If dump is
negative, data are written by ascii, if positive, by binary.
Define the data sequence. The history information (nocas andnobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1.
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no.
Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.
Multiplier for each material.
Multiplier subsection is required below this parameter.

In the [t-cross] tally, the dump option can only be used with reg meshes and only on axis=reg. If the
dump option is set, the e-type, a-type and t-type meshes take on only the maximum and minimum values.
The output option can be set as current, a-curr, or oa-curr. In using this dump parameter, axis and file
are restricted to one axis and one file apiece and unit is always 1. The dumped data are written onto a file named“*** dmp”, where “***” indicates the file name specified by file=***. The normal output of the tally is written
on “***”. From this file, information on the total normalization factor can be obtained; doing so requires setting
one mesh each for e-type, a-type and t-type (in the versions of PHITS before 2.66, the normal output was
written on a configuration file (.cfg) and the dumped data were written on “***”). The history information (nocas
and nobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1 for continuous calculation using the dump file; in addition, both thedump file with “ dmp” and the normal output file specified by file= are required to use idmpmode=1. The option
dumpall is not compatible with this dump tally option when shared memory parallelization is active.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.
From ver. 2.86, multiplier option can be used in [t-cross] tally.
Using multiplier option in this tally, you can multiply results of the tally by factors depending on energies
of particles. If you define a data set in [multiplier] section, any factors can be used. The basic format is given
as (C k), where C is a normalization factor and k is the ID number of the set. It is noted that k should be negative.
Format of the multiplier subsection is given as follows.

multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 1000
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 1
-201 ) ( 2 -202 )2( 1.2 -201 ) ( 3 -202 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
The line of multiplier = specifies the number of material where the multiplication is considered. You can use
all instead of the number. For this case, one should also use all for mat column below. The second line of part= defines the particles considered. The maximum number of the particle is 6 and all can be also used, which isdefault. The multiplication aﬀects only these considered particles. The third line of emax = defines the maximum
energy of the multiplication. If emax is omitted, it is automatically defined as the maximum energy given in the186

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT[multiplier] section, or dmax(i), i = 1, 2, or 14 when you use nuclear data library. The number of matcolumn is the material number which is considered to be multiplied. The columns of mset1, mset2 define themultiplier set. The maximum 6 multiplier can be set. For each set, the result is printed out. You can define several
multiplier subsections in one [t-cross] section, but you should set the number of the multiplier sets to beequal in each subsection.
Some parameter sets built-in PHITS can be used. If you set k = −1, a value of 1/weight is used as themultiplication factor. For k = −2, a value of 1/velocity is used. For k = −120, material density is used. Therefore,
you can obtain mass in the region setting icntl=5. With k = −101, −102, −112, or −114, the conversion factor of
proton, neutron, electron, or photon, respectively, is used. These conversion factors were estimated with a conditionof Antero-Posterior geometry (AP) irradiation.?) The unit of the dose conversion factors is (µSv/h)/(n/sec/cm2 ). It
should be noted that the interpolation method of conversion factor has been changed in PHITS ver. 2.00 fromlinear-linear to log-log.
You can also use the following format.

multiplier = number of materialpart = proton
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 33 0.543 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 34 0.321 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 35 0.678 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....

In above example, the mset1 is for heat and the mset2 is zero for proton, attenuator set for neutron.

6.2 [ T-Cross ] section

187

Setting mesh=reg for the geometry mesh in this section requires defining the crossing surface by outgoing(r-from) and incoming (r-to) region number, and the area of the surface (area in units of cm2 ), as shown in theexample below 46 .

mesh = reg
reg = number of crossing surfaces
r-from
r-to
area
2
8
10.0
3
8
5.0
( 4 5 ) ( 4 5 )2.0(13<5) (14<5)
7.0(13<6) (14<6)
7.0(13<7) (14<7)
7.0
...
...
....
...
...
....

In the next line of mesh=reg, give the number of crossing surfaces to tally by reg=. Furthermore, from the nextline, the values of r-in r-out, and area should be written as a matrix format. The default order for this definitionis r-in r-out area. The line of these column headers can be omitted. However, to change the order, rearrange
and explicitly write the column headers as r-in r-out area. The skip operator non can be also used. Whenspecifying the region number, the format ( 2 -5 8 9 ) can be used, as can the lattice and universe style ( 6 <10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). However, any value that is not single numeric must be enclosed by () .
If mesh=reg is set, the obtained current or flux is unidirectional from r-from to r-to; a bidirectional flux canbe set in the third line of the above definition.
Setting the mesh=r-z defines the numbers of two crossing surface types: the number of “nz+1” crossing
surfaces for z defined by ri − ri+1 and the number of “nr+1” crossing surfaces for r defined by zi − zi+1 . If an
r-surface coincides with the surface of the outer void, the flux on this surface is not tallied.
If mesh=xyz is set, the number of “nz+1” crossing surfaces on z are defined by xi − xi+1 , and y j − y j+1 . In thiscase, x and y crossing surfaces are not defined. Setting mesh=r-z or xyz causes crossing particles to be detectedin both directions on the defined surface. The forward direction is defined as the positive direction on a z surface
and from the center to the exterior on an r surface.

46 Before ver. 2.96, r-in and r-out were used instead of r-from and r-to, respectively. These old parameters can be used after ver. 2.97.

Note that “in” and “out” are reversed in this definition.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

188

6.3 [ T-Point ] section
It is impractical to calculate particle fluence at a certain point or line, using [t-track] tally. Hence, the point
estimator tally [t-point] was introduced to estimate such quantities in a short computational time. However, thefollowing conditions must be satisfied in the PHITS simulation using [t-point]:(1) Particle energy should not exceed the maximum energy of the data library used, i.e. dmax.
(2) Only fluence of neutron and photon can be calculated by [t-point].
(3) Neither event generator mode nor EGS5 should not be used (e-mode=0, negs=0).
(4) Material should be uniform within a certain distance around the point detector due to singularity.
(5) Reflection or white boundary surface should not be used.
Please see read-me file or sample input file in \phits\utility\tpoint in more detail.
Table 6.7: [t-point] parameters(1)namepoint =

value
number of dataring =

number of data

part =all (default),
particle name1, 2, 3, 4, 5

e-type =t-type =unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2, 3

11, 12, 13

axis =
file =
resfile =eng, tfile name(omissible, D=file)

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =epsout =(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)

explanation
Option for point detectors.
You need subsection below this parameter.
Option for ring detectors.
You need subsection below this parameter.
maximum 6 particles in a [t-point]energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option
1: [1/cm2 /source]
2: [1/cm2 /MeV/source]
3: [1/cm2 /Lethargy/source]
11:[1/cm2 /nsec/source]
12:[1/cm2 /nsec/MeV/source]
13:[1/cm2 /Lethargy/nsec/source]
x axis of output data
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in therestart calculation. Even if several axis
parameters were defined, you should specify only
one resfile.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension
into ‘‘.eps ’’.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in
the eps file.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter“Lethargy ” in unit = 3 or 13 is a natural logarithmic unit of energy, and defined by ln(Eref /E) using areference energy Eref and a particle’s energy E. If you set these units, you can obtain results per Lethargy, which6.3 [ T-Point ] section

189

are calculated by Lethargy widths, ln(Ehigh /Elow ), at each energy bins given in the energy mesh subsection. Here,
Ehigh and Elow are maximum and minimum values of the energy bins, respectively.
In [t-point], you have to define the number of points or rings, instead of mesh in other tallies. For example,
you have to write point = 3 when you would like to define 3 point detectors. The maximum number of points orrings per [t-point] is 20. If you would like to set more detectors, you have to define another [t-point] tally.
The point and ring detectors cannot be combined in one [t-point] tally. The information on each point and ringmust be defined in the successive lines after the definition of point or ring parameter. The definition of the point
detector is described as follows:[ T-point ]point =
1
non
x
1
10.0

# number of point detectors
y
z
r0
0.0
50.0
1.0

where x, y, z indicate the coordinate of the point detector, r is the radius of the fictitious sphere. (About thefictitious sphere, see the read-me file in \phits\utility\tpoint .) The unit of these parameters is in cm.
The definition of the ring detector is defined as follows:[ T-point ]ring =
1
non
axis
1
z

# number of ring detectors
ar
rr
r0
50.0
10.0
1.0

where axis indicates the direction of ring axis specified by x, y or z, ar is the distance from the origin to thecenter of the ring, rr is the ring radius, and r0 is the radius of the fictitious sphere. You can change the order ofthese parameters by change the order of its denotation, e.g. x y z r0 to z y x r0. Except for this information,
the parameters to be defined in [t-point] are the same as those in [t-track], including the multiplier option.
Thus, radiation dose at a certain point can be estimated using [t-point]. However, you cannot specify material,
two-dimensional plot option, and transform in [t-point].
Table 6.8: [t-point] parameters(2)namestdcut =multiplier =value(omissible, D=-1)
number of material(omissible)

explanation
Threshold value of STD cut off.
multiplier for each material
You need multiplier subsection below this option

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

190

Using multiplier option in this tally, you can multiply results of the [t-point] tally by factors depending
on energies of particles. If you define a data set in [multiplier] section, any factors can be used. The basic
format is given as (C k), where C is a normalization factor and k is the ID number of the set. It is noted that kshould be negative. Format of the multiplier subsection is given as follows.

multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 1000
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 1
-201 ) ( 2 -202 )2( 1.2 -201 ) ( 3 -202 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
The line of multiplier = specifies the number of material where the multiplication is considered. You can use
all instead of the number. For this case, one should also use all for mat column below. The second line of part= defines the particles considered. The maximum number of the particle is 6 and all can be also used, which isdefault. The multiplication aﬀects only these considered particles. The third line of emax = defines the maximum
energy of the multiplication. If emax is omitted, it is automatically defined as the maximum energy given in the[multiplier] section, or dmax(i), i = 1, 2, or 14 when you use nuclear data library. The number of matcolumn is the material number which is considered to be multiplied. The columns of mset1, mset2 define themultiplier set. The maximum 6 multiplier can be set. For each set, the result is printed out. You can define several
multiplier subsections in one [t-point] section, but you should set the number of the multiplier sets to beequal in each subsection.
Some parameter sets built-in PHITS can be used. If you set k = −1, a value of 1/weight is used as themultiplication factor. For k = −2, a value of 1/velocity is used. For k = −120, material density is used. Therefore,
you can obtain mass in the region setting icntl=5. With k = −101, −102, −112, or −114, the conversion factor of
proton, neutron, electron, or photon, respectively, is used. These conversion factors were estimated with a conditionof Antero-Posterior geometry (AP) irradiation.?) The unit of the dose conversion factors is (µSv/h)/(n/sec/cm2 ). It
should be noted that the interpolation method of conversion factor has been changed in PHITS ver. 2.00 fromlinear-linear to log-log.
You can also use the following format.

multiplier = number of materialpart = proton
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 ) ( 0.0 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
multiplier = number of materialpart = neutron
emax = 150
mat
mset1
mset2
1
( 0.1236 1 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 33 0.543 )2( 0.0060 2 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 34 0.321 )3( 0.0032 3 1 -4 : -6 -8 ) ( 1.0 -1 35 0.678 )
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
In above example, the mset1 is for heat and the mset2 is zero for proton, attenuator set for neutron.

6.4 [ T-Heat ] section

191

6.4 [ T-Heat ] section[ T - H e a t ] gives deposit energy for optional region. Deposit energy by low energy neutron and photon canbe also tallied in this tally. The heat from neutrons is usually obtained from Kerma factors with nuclear data. For
e-mode≥1, the heat from neutrons is zero, but the heat is calculated from energy loss of all charged particles andnuclei. The heat from photons is usually obtained also from Kerma factors with nuclear data. For electron=1
with electron transport, we do not use the Kerma factors of photon, but obtain the heat from the energy loss ofelectrons.
Table 6.9: [t-heat] parameter (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

axis =

reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
file name(omissible, D=file)

file =
resfile =material =(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
output =

2 5 8
heat
simpleexplanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
total: Total deposit energy.
total: Total deposit energy.
ncut, gcut, pcut: Deposit energies of neutrons, photons, and protons
below cut oﬀ energy when you set incut>0, igcut>0, ipcut>0,
respectively.
leakage: Kinetic energy of particles going out to the outer region.
And, total: Total deposit energy.
recoil: Kinetic energy of residual nuclei when you set cut oﬀ
energy emin(15-19).
ionization: Deposit energy by energy-loss of charged particles.
low neutron: Deposit energy calculated by neutron Kerma factors.
photon: Deposit energy by Kerma factors.
(If electron=1, contributions of electrons below cut oﬀ energy.)
others: Excitation energy of residual nuclei. When you set
igamma=1, this value comes to be 0 owing to photon emission.

Neutrons, photons, and protons below cut oﬀ energy, are not tallied in the ncut, gcut, and pcut component,
but in the stopped particle if incut=0, igcut=0, and ipcut=0 in the parameter section. When incut>0, igcut>0,
and ipcut>0, they are tallied in the ncut, gcut, pcut part.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

192

Table 6.10: [t-heat] parameter (2)nameoutput =(continued)

value
all

part =

particle name(omissible)

unit =

0, 1, 2

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

explanation
In addition to above,
Contributions of d, t,3 He, α, and residual nuclei to recoil.
Contributions of p, π+ , π− , and the others to ionization.
(Contributions of particles specified by part are output.
However, they are not plotted in eps file.)
stopped particle: Kinetic energy of stopped proton, neutron,
π+ , π− , and the other particles in materials.
(Contributions of particles specified by part are output.
However, they are not plotted in eps file.)
others: Remaining excitation energy and fission component.
When axis is 2 dimensional, all is the same as simple.
Only total, recoil, ionization, low neutron, electron, and others
are output.
When you set output=all, deposit energies for ionizationand stopped particle specified here are output. It should be
noted that the results are not plotted in eps file.
0: [Gy/source]
1: [MeV/cm3 /source]
2: [MeV/source]
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.

6.4 [ T-Heat ] section

193

Generally speaking, heat is an energy of ionization of charged particles. However, in the transport simulation,
cutoﬀ energy of the particle is set and the transport is stopped below the energy. Then there exist some componentsof heat, i.e. recoil, stopped particle, and others, in the output of the heat tally. These components may change as
the parameters of the transport are changed.
Table 6.11: [t-heat] parameter (3)namevolumevalue(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

electron =0 (default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
electron contribution options
0: using photon KERMA factors(electron and positron should NOT be transported,
otherwise their deposition energies are double counted)
1: calculating by ionization loss
(electron and positron transports are required)minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

When you set unit = 0, you can obtain results in the unit of [Gy/source]. When you set mesh = reg, you
should define volumes of each cells in [volume] section or by setting volume parameter of the [t-heat] section.
Because absorbed dose is intensive variable, PHITS does not output “sum over”in output files for unit = 0. It
should be noted that when a region includes more than two materials, dose in the region does not equal to averagevalue of the region. For example, when two material with masses M1 & M2 , and absorb energies E1 & E2 ,
E2
E1
2
+M
in this tally, though its average dose is ME11 +E
respectively, PHITS gives M
+M2 .
1
2
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

194

6.5 [ T-Deposit ] section
This tally is very similar to [t-heat] and scores dose and deposit energy distributions. The diﬀerence from[t-heat] is that this tally only counts an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei. Thus, you must use the event
generator mode (e-mode≥1) if you would like to transport low-energy neutrons. In this tally, you can multiply any
factor as a function of LET(dE/dx) in a certain material to the dose or deposit energy. This function is realized
by user defined subroutine usrdfn1.f and usrdn2.f. As examples, the default program of usrdfn1.f returns the dose
equivalent calculated from deposit energy multiplied with the Q(L) relationship defined in the ICRP60, while thatof usrdfn2.f estimates biological dose on the basis of Microdosimetric Kinetic Model 47 . You can change and add
any factor in this routine. Note that letmat should be set to water when these default programs are used (see“particle therapy” in the recommendation setting in more detail). In addition, using the time mesh with [timer]
section, you can simulate a TOF (time of flight) detector and plot 2-dimensional graph of the correlation between
the deposit energy and the TOF. When output = deposit is set, you can simulate the detector response. Notethat you cannot use this tally when a particle weight changes in the calculation by using [weight window] etc.
After version 2.70, the detector resolution can be considered in the calculation of event-by-event deposition-energy
distributions using output = deposit.
Table 6.12: [t-deposit] parameters (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =all (default),
particle namematerial =(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
letmat =2 5 8(omissible)

dedxfnc =(omissible, D=0)

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)

47 T.Sato et al.

explanation
Geometry mesh.
A geometry mesh subsection is required below this option.
Maximum 6 particles in a [t-deposit].
When output=deposit and deposit=0, all is necessary and only
maximum 5 particles can be set.
Materials to score can be specified.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials, define these material numbers in thenext line. You can set number of materials by negative. In the case,specified materials are not included for scoring.
Material numbers.
Material id for LET(dE/dx).
If omitted, a real material is assumed.
If a material not used in the geometry is selected, its material density
must be defined in [material]. To calculate LET in water, definewater with 1 g/cm3 in [material].
When letmat<0 is set, PHITS automatically calculates dE/dx for water with 1 g/cm3 for electrons and positrons: please see “particle therapy” in the recommendation setting for more details.
0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.f.
As examples, the default program of usrdfn1.f returns the dose equivalent calculated from deposit energy multiplied by the Q(L) relationshipdefined in the ICRP60, while that of usrdfn2.f estimates biological doseon the basis of Microdosimetric Kinetic Model.
Energy mesh.
An energy mesh subsection is required below this option.
Time mesh.
A time mesh subsection is required below this option.

Biological dose estimation for charged-particle therapy using an improved PHITS code coupled with a microdosimetrickinetic model, Radiat. Res. 171, 107-117 (2009).

6.5 [ T-Deposit ] section

195

Table 6.13: [t-deposit] parameters (2)nameoutput =

value
dose
depositunit =

0, 1, 2, 3, 4

deposit =0(default), 1

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z,r, txy, yz, xz, rz
t-eng, eng-t
file name(omissible, D=file)

file =
resfile =factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =

(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

explanation
Score the energy loss of charged particles and nuclei.
Score the variance of deposition energies by individual history (ane-type subsection is required).
0: Dose [Gy/source]; only for output=dose.
1: Dose [MeV/cm3 /source]
2: Dose [MeV/source]
3: Number [1/source]; only for output=deposit
4: Number [1/nsec/source]; only for output=deposit
Option for deposit energy plot when output=deposit.
0: distribution of total deposit energy with contribution of each particle (please use this setting normally).
1: distribution of deposit energy by each particle (default setting
until ver. 2.81).
x axis value of output data.
2 dimensional.
Define file names as same number of axis.
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation. Even if
several axis parameters were defined, you should specify only one
resfile.
Normalization factor.
Title.
Angel parameters.
Sangel parameters.
Options for 2 dimensional plot.
x axis title.
y axis title.
z axis title.

In this tally, one can only score the energy loss of charged particles. So you cannot get the sum of the energy
loss for a specific particle which goes into the tally region by using part = in this tally section. In order to tallythe energy loss for each projectile particle going into the tally region, you should define the counter with part =in [counter] section and ctmin, ctmax in this tally section.
When you set unit = 0 with output = dose, you can obtain results in the unit of [Gy/source]. When you
set mesh = reg, you should define volumes of each cells in [volume] section or by setting volume parameter ofthe [t-heat] section. Because absorbed dose is intensive variable, PHITS does not output “sum over”in output files
for unit = 0. It should be noted that when a region includes more than two materials, dose in the region does notequal to average value of the region. For example, when two material with masses M1 & M2 , and absorb energies
E2
E1
2
+M
in this tally, though its average dose is ME11 +E
E1 & E2 , respectively, PHITS gives M
+M2 .
1
2
When you set output = deposit and deposit = 0, you can obtain the contribution of each kind of particle
set in part to the result of all. In this case, if you don’t set all in part, part = all is automatically set.
When you set output = deposit and deposit = 1, you can obtain the distribution of energies deposited byeach kind of particle set in part. Therefore, a sum of results obtained by setting part = individual particle
does not equal to the distribution of energies deposited by all.
In the case of output = deposit and deposit = 0, statistical uncertainties of results except for values ofpart = all are standard deviations calculated by the history variance mode, independent of istdev.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

196

Table 6.14: [t-deposit] parameters (3)namegshow =value
0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =

1(default), 0

explanation
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh.
You need volume definitions below this option. Default
values are given in input echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz, t-eng, eng-t.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no6.5 [ T-Deposit ] section

197

Table 6.15: [t-deposit] parameters (4)namedresol =value(omissible, D=0.0)

dfano =

(omissible, D=0.0)

stdcut =(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
Parameter for representing the detector resolution.
Valid only for output = deposit. When you set dresol=σr
and dfano=F, deposition energy E of each event is √fluctuatedby following the Gaussian with standard deviation σ2r + FE.
Parameter for representing the detector resolution.
Valid only for output = deposit. When you set dresol=σr
and dfano=F, deposition energy E of each event is √fluctuatedby following the Gaussian with standard deviation σ2r + FE.
Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

Although the fano factor is generally defined as a dimensionless quantity, dfano parameter is defined as aquantity with a dimension of energy.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

198

As an extension of sum up the deposit energies such as reg = (100 200 300 · · · ), weighted summation
option is added. Using this option in this tally, energies deposited in specified i-th regions for each history, Ehistory,iare multiplied by specified coeﬃcients, αi (Nlist ), and then summed up as written by:∑αi (Nlist ) × Ehistory,i .
Ehistory =(21)iThis option weights depending on deposited energies in each history, and it can be applied to simulation, forexample soft errors in semiconductor devices. If you want to weight depending on the condition for each particle,
please use user defined subroutine (usrdfn1.f or usrdfn2.f) and set dedxfnc = 1 or 2. This option can beused only mesh = reg, and it can be executed when you specify reg = convolution. Formats and examples areshown below;

mesh = reg
reg = weightsum
ncond = 4nocelloperator
1
100
ge
2
100
gt
3
100
eq
and
200
lt
4
100
le
ncell = 5
celllist01
list02
100
0.0
0.5
200
0.1
0.6
300
0.2
0.7
400
0.3
0.8
500
0.4
0.9

ethres
0.1
0.2
0.0
0.4
0.5

list
1
1
2
2
3

list03
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0

list00
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

First, you define the number of condition. The next line defines the order of data, i.e., condition number (no),cell number (cell), operator (operator), threshold energy (ethres), and list number (list). In next lines,
conditions are described as many as ncond value. These lines means that “list number is used when the energy
deposited in the specified cell satisfies large/small relation with threshold energy”. The condition written in first ispreferred when the history satisfies some conditions. If the history does not satisfy all the condition, coeﬃcientsof list00 are used. You can set several conditions by writing and in no column. In the cell column, you can use
the format ( 2 - 5 8 9 ) and the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0] < u=3 ). But you needto close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value. In the operator column, you can use greater than gt,
greater equal ge, equal eq, less equal le, and less than lt. The unit of ethres is MeV.
Next, you define the number of convoluted cell. The next column defines the order of data, i.e., cell number(cell), and list number (listxxxx). In next lines, convoluted cell number and coeﬃcients are described. In thecell column, you can use the format ( 2 - 5 8 9 ) and the lattice and universe style as ( 6 < 10[1 0 0]
< u=3 ). But you need to close a value by ( ) if it is not a single numeric value. It should be noted that samedeposited energy is added up many times when you set same cell number many times. If you do not define list00,
coeﬃcients of list00 are set to zero.

6.6 [ T-Deposit2 ] section

199

6.6 [ T-Deposit2 ] section
This tally scores deposit energy distribution in two regions and plot the correlation between two deposit energies. By this, one can simulate, for an example, dE, E counters and plot the correlations in 2-dimensional graph.
Using this tally, you can simulate the detector response. Note that you cannot use this tally when a particle weightchanges in the calculation by using [weight window] etc. In this tally, as in the [t-deposit] tally, you can multiply
any factor as a function of LET(dE/dx) in a certain material to the dose or deposit energy. This function is realized
by user defined subroutine usrdfn1.f and usrdn2.f. As examples, the default program of usrdfn1.f returns the dose
equivalent calculated from deposit energy multiplied with the Q(L) relationship defined in the ICRP60, while thatof usrdfn2.f estimates biological dose on the basis of Microdosimetric Kinetic Model 48 . You can change and add
any factor in this routine. Note that letmat should be set to water when these default programs are used (see“particle therapy” in the recommendation setting in more detail). In addition, using the time mesh with [timer]
section, you can simulate a TOF (time of flight) detector and plot 2-dimensional graph of the correlation between
the deposit energy and the TOF.
Table 6.16: [t-deposit2] parameters (1)namemesh =
reg =part =
letmat1 =

value
reg
r1 r2
all (default),
particle name(omissible)

letmat2 =(omissible)

dedxfnc1 =dedxfnc2 =(omissible, D=0)(omissible, D=0)

e1-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

e2-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2

unit =
axis =

48 T.Sato et al.

eng1, eng2, t,e12, e21, t-e1, t-e2
e1-t, e2-t

explanationgeometry mesh, only reg
Two region numbers should be written.
maximum 6 particles in a [t-deposit2]
material id for LET(dE/dx) of region r1
If omitted, real material is assumed.
material id for LET(dE/dx) of region r2
If omitted, real material is assumed.
If you select the material that is not used in your geometry,
you have to define its material density in [material] section.
If you would like to calculate LET in water, you have todefine water with 1 g/cm3 in [material] sectiont.
When you set letmat < 0, PHITS automatically calculates
dE/dx for water with 1 g/cm3 for electrons and positrons.
Please see “particletherapy” in the recommendation setting
in more detail.
for region r1, 0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.f
for region r2, 0: without, 1: use usrdfn1.f, 2: use usrdfn2.f
As examples, the default program of usrdfn1.f returns the dose
equivalent calculated from deposit energy multiplied with theQ(L) relationship defined in the ICRP60, while that of usrdfn2.f
estimates biological dose on the basis of Microdosimetric
Kinetic Model.
energy mesh for region r1
You need energy mesh subsection below this optionenergy mesh for region r2
You need energy mesh subsection below this option
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option
1: Number [1/source]
2: Number [1/nsec/source]
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional

Biological dose estimation for charged-particle therapy using an improved PHITS code coupled with a microdosimetrickinetic model, Radiat. Res. 171, 107-117 (2009).

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

200

Table 6.17: [t-deposit2] parameter (2)namefile =
resfile =value
file name(omissible, D=file)

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
volume(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =epsout =72 (default)
0 (default), 1, 2

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =stdcut =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= e12, e21, t-e1, t-e2, e1-t, e2-t.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

This tally only scores the energy loss of charged particles. So you cannot get the sum of the energy loss fora specific particle which goes into the tally region by using part = in this tally section. In order to tally theenergy loss for each projectile particle going into the tally region, you should define the counter with part = in[counter] section and ctmin, ctmax in this tally section.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6.7 [ T-Yield ] section

201

6.7 [ T-Yield ] section[ T - Y i e l d ] gives information on produced nuclei. Products by neutrons in the energy below dmax(2) arenot scored, but scored with e-mode≥1.
Table 6.18: [t-yield] parameter (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

special =D=0 (omissible)

part =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials

material =(next line)
mother =2 5 8(omissible)
all,number of mother nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pb

nucleus =(omissible)
all,number of nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pb

elastic =1(default),0,-1

unit =

1, 2

explanation
Geometry mesh.
You need geometry mesh subsection below this option.
When special> 0, nuclear reactions are repeatedmore than once in order to increase statistics.
maximum 6 particles in a [t-yield] section.
Projectile particle of the reaction.
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
You can specify mother nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of mother nuclei,
define their mothers in the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included
for scoring.
Nucleus if you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb
If you want to specify multiple mother groups,
use multiple [t-yield] tallies
You can specify output nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of nuclei,
define their nuclei in the next line.
Nucleus If you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb
Option for contribution of a recoil nucleus in elastic collisions
1: with this contribution
0: exclude recoil target nucleus produced by elastic collisions-1: exclude the same nucleus as the target nucleus
1: [1/source]
2: [1/cm3 /source]

Although you can specify projectiles by part in the [t-yield] section, the result is the sum of their contributions. If you want to obtain each contribution, please set multiple [t-yield] section.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

202

name
ndata =

axis =

Table 6.19: [t-yield] parameter(2)explanation
If you set 1, nuclear production cross section data
are used for nuclear irradiation in cases of proton induced
reactions on α, 14 N, 16 O targets as shown below.
reg, x, y, z, r,
x axis for output
xy, yz, xz, rz
2 dimension
mass
Mass distribution. If the case nucleus isspecified, isotope distribution.
chargeCharge distribution. Nucleus cannot be specified.
chart
Nucleus chart (x:N, y:Z).
Nucleus cannot be specified
dchainfor dchain-sp output. All isotopes are output
only mesh = reg
value
0(default), 1

file =
resfile =file name(omissible, D=file)

output =(omissible)
product (default)
cutoffinfo =
factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

0, 1
(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

For this tally, only one axis parameter is defined in a[t-yield] section.
Define a file name to output.
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
change the timing of the score.
Nuclei produced by nuclear reaction are tallied.
Nuclei stopped by energy cutoﬀ are tallied.
If nuclei are not transported, this is the same as productWith stable nuclei and magic number for chart.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.

The following nuclear reactions are included in the available nuclear data for ndata=1
4

He(n, x)3 H
N(n, x)14 C
16O(n, x)11 C
16
O(n, x)15 O
14N(p, x)13 N
16O(p, x)11 C
14

14

N(n, x)3 H
N(n, x)13 N
16O(n, x)14 C
4He(p, x)3 H
14
N(p, x)14 O
16O(p, x)14 C
1414N(n, x)7 Be
O(n, x)3 H
16
O(n, x)15 C
14N(p, x)7 Be
16
O(p, x)3 H
16
O(p, x)13 N
16

14N(n, x)11 Be
O(n, x)7 Be
16
O(n, x)13 N
14N(p, x)11 Be
16
O(p, x)7 Be
16
O(p, x)14 O
16

14N(n, x)10 C
O(n, x)11 Be
16O(n, x)16 N
14N(p, x)10 C
16
O(p, x)11 Be
16
O(p, x)15 O
16

14N(n, x)11 C
O(n, x)10 C
16
O(n, x)14 O
14N(p, x)11 C
16
O(p, x)10 C
16

If you specify output=cutoff, the parameters of part, mother are neglected.
When igamma=3 in [parameters] section, you can obtain information on the isomer production based on
EBITEM model by setting axis=chart, dchain in this tally.

6.7 [ T-Yield ] section

203

Table 6.20: [t-yield] parameter (3)nameginfo =value
0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =
volume0.5 (default)(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file, except
for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz, chart, dchain.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying output nuclei by nucleus and giving a value of stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS
calculation depending on values of STD (standard deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positiveand itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section. When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller
than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally
sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

204

6.8 [ T-Product ] section[t-product] tallies particles and nuclei produced by nuclear reactions, decays, and fission, and also tallies
source particles. It diﬀers from [t-yield] in that the energy distribution and time distribution of produced
particles and nuclei cannot be obtained. This tally is not available for produced particles by reactions of photons,
electrons, or low energy neutrons below dmax(2), which are described by data libraries. For e-mode≥1, however,particles and nuclei produced by neutron-induced reactions from the library can be obtained.
Table 6.21: [t-product] parameters (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials

material =(next line)
mother =2 5 8(omissible)
all,number of mother nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pbe-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2, -1, -2a-type =explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-product]
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
You can specify mother nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of mother nuclei,
define their mothers in the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included
for scoring.
You cannot specify mother nuclei when output=atomic.
Nucleus if you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb
If you want to specify multiple mother groups,
use multiple [t-product] tallies.
energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option.
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option.
angle mesh (1, 2 :cos, -1, -2 :degree)
You need angle mesh subsection below this option.

6.8 [ T-Product ] section

205

Table 6.22: [t-product] parameters (2)nameunit =

value
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16

21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26

31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36

explanation
1: [1/source]
2: [1/cm3 /source]
3: [1/MeV/source]
4: [1/cm3 /MeV/source]
5: [1/Lethargy/source]
6: [1/cm3 /Lethargy/source]
11:[1/nsec/source]
12:[1/cm3 /nsec/source]
13:[1/MeV/nsec/source]
14:[1/cm3 /MeV/nsec/source]
15:[1/Lethargy/nsec/source]
16:[1/cm3 /Lethargy/nsec/source]
21: [1/sr/source]
22: [1/cm3 /sr/source]
23: [1/MeV/sr/source]
24: [1/cm3 /MeV/sr/source]
25: [1/Lethargy/sr/source]
26: [1/cm3 /Lethargy/sr/source]
31:[1/nsec/sr/source]
32:[1/cm3 /nsec/sr/source]
33:[1/MeV/nsec/sr/source]
34:[1/cm3 /MeV/nsec/sr/source]
35:[1/Lethargy/nsec/sr/source]
36:[1/cm3 /Lethargy/nsec/sr/source]“Lethargy ” in unit = 5, 6, 15, 16, 25, 26, 35 or 36 is a natural logarithmic unit of energy, anddefined by ln(Eref /E) using a reference energy Eref and a particle’s energy E. If you set these units, you can obtain
results per Lethargy, which are calculated by Lethargy widths, ln(Ehigh /Elow ), at each energy bins given in theenergy mesh subsection. Here, Ehigh and Elow are maximum and minimum values of the energy bins, respectively.
“sr ” in unit = 21 - 26 or 31 - 36 denotes steradian, unit of solid angle.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

206

Table 6.23: [t-product] parameters (3)nameaxis =

file =
resfile =output =valueeng, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
tfile name(omissible, D=file)x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

sourcenuclear (default)
nonelaelastic
decay
fissionatomic(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
1

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =2resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =72 (default)

explanation
x axis value of output data
2 dimensionaltime axis
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
Source particle
Particles from nuclear reaction, including elastic
Particles from nonelastic collision
Particles from elastic collision
Particles from decay
Particles from fission
Particles from atomic interaction
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo

6.8 [ T-Product ] section

207

Table 6.24: [t-product] parameter (4)namevolmat =value(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

dump =

number of data

(next line)

data sequencegslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file.
If dump is negative, data are written by ascii,
if positive, by binary.
define the data sequence. The history information (nocas
and nobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1.
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

In the [t-product] tally, you can use the dump option. If the dump option is set, the meshes of e-type
and t-type have only the meaning of the maximum and minimum values. When you use this dump parameter,
axis and file are restricted to one axis and one file, and unit is always 1. The dumped data are written on
a file named “*** dmp”, where “***”indicates the file name specified by “file=***”. The normal output of thetally is written on “***”. From this file, you can get the information on the total normalization factor. To do so,
you had better set one mesh for e-type, a-type and t-type. (In the former version of PHITS (before 2.66),
the normal output was written on a configuration file (.cfg), and the dumped data were written on “***”.) The
history information (nocas and nobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1 for the continuous calculation using dump
file. In addition, both of the two files, the dump file with “ dmp” and the normal output file specified by file=,
are required to use idmpmode=1. The option dumpall is not compatible with this dump tally option when sharedmemory parallelization is active.
This [t-product] can tally the source particles. By using this function, you can modify the dump file. You
can read a dump file and write the information on a new dump file with some modification by setting the dump
parameter and output = source in this tally section, and icntl = 6 in the parameter section.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

208

6.9 [ T-DPA ] section[ T - D P A ] gives DPA (Displacement Per Atom) value. This is the number of displaced atoms per a target
atom, and represents the radiation damage in materials irradiated by energetic particles. The result by this tally
includes the contribution of Coulomb scattering cross section for the charged particle transportation. DPA by low
energy neutron incident reactions can be also obtained by using e-mode≥1.
Table 6.25: [t-dpa] parameter (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials

material =(next line)
mother =2 5 8(omissible)
all,number of mother nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pb

unit =

1, 2

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
file name(omissible, D=file)

file =
resfile =explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-dpa]
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
You can specify mother nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of mother nuclei,
define their mothers in the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included
for scoring.
Nucleus if you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb.
If you want to specify multiple mother groups,
use multiple [t-dpa] tallies.
1: [DPA*1.e-24/source]
2: [DPA/source]
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.

6.9 [ T-DPA ] section

209

Table 6.26: [t-dpa] parameter (2)nameoutput =

value
dpa

all

x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
1

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =2resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

explanation
total: total DPA value
cutoﬀ1: DPA value when energies of charged particles
produced by reactions are below cutoﬀ energy (emin)
cutoﬀ2: DPA value when energies of charged particles
transported in materials are below cutoﬀ energy (emin)transpt: DPA value when charged particles are transported
add d, t, 3 He, α, and nucleus contributions as PKA,
with “simple”
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

210

Table 6.27: [t-dpa] parameter (3)nameepsout =value
0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6.10 [ T-LET ] section

211

6.10 [ T-LET ] section
By the LET tally, you can get the information on track length and dose as a function of LET(dE/dx) of acertain material. This tally counts an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei, and thus, you must use the Event
Generator mode (e-mode≥1) if you would like to transport low-energy neutrons. Note that this tally does notconsider the contribution of the electron and positron below their cutoﬀ energy (emin) to the result.
Table 6.28: [t-let] parameters(1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =
material =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
letmat =2 5 8(omissible)

l-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-let]
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
material id for LET(dE/dx).
If omitted, real material is assumed.
If you select the material that is not used in your geometry,
you have to define its material density in [material] section.
If you would like to calculate LET in water, you have todefine water with 1 g/cm3 in [material] sectiont.
When you set letmat < 0, PHITS automatically calculates
dE/dx for water with 1 g/cm3 for electrons and positrons.
Please see “particletherapy” in the recommendation setting
in more detail.
LET mesh
You need LET mesh subsection below this option
It is noted that the LET spectrum may have unnatural peaks
when you set a very fine mesh, e.g., 20 meshes per oneorder of magnitude.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

212

Table 6.29: [t-let] parameter (2)nameunit =

value
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12

13, 14axis =
file =
resfile =factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =

let, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
file name(omissible, D=file)(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

explanation
1: Track [cm/(keV/µm)/source]
2: Dose [MeV/(keV/µm)/source]
3: Track [cm/ln(keV/µm)/source]
4: Dose [MeV/ln(keV/µm)/source]
5: Track [cm/source]
6: Dose [MeV/source]
7: Track [1/cm2 /(keV/µm)/source]
8: Dose [MeV/cm3 /(keV/µm)/source]
9: Track [1/cm2 /ln(keV/µm)/source]
10:Dose [MeV/cm3 /ln(keV/µm)/source]
11:Track [1/cm2 /source]
12:Dose [MeV/cm3 /source]∫
13: L ∗ f (L) [dimensionless], wheref (L)dL = 1.
∫
14: L ∗ d(L) [keV/µm], where d(L)dL = 1.
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title

From version 3.02, new options (unit=13 and 14) were implemented. Using them, the frequency and dose
probability densities of LET L, f (L) and d(L), respectively, can be easily calculated. The results obtained from
unit=13 and 14 are proportional to those obtained from unit=2 and 4, respectively, but their absolute values
are diﬀerent because the integral of the probability densities are normalized to 1 for the new options. Note that
unit=13 and 14 can be set only when axis=let.

6.10 [ T-LET ] section

213

Table 6.30: [t-let] parameter (3)namegshow =value
0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

214

6.11 [ T-SED ] section
Calculation of the probability density of deposition energies in microscopic sites, called as lineal energy yor specific energy z, is of great importance in estimation of relative biological eﬀectiveness (RBE) of charged
particles. However, such microscopic probability densities cannot be directly calculated by PHITS simulation
using [t-deposit] or [t-heat] tallies, since PHITS is designed to simulate particle motions in macroscopic
scale, and employs a continuous-slowing-down approximation (CSDA) for calculating the energy loss of charged
particles. We therefore introduced a special tally named [t-sed] for calculating the microscopic probability
densities using a mathematical function that can instantaneously calculate quantities around trajectories of charged
particles. The function was developed on the basis of track structure simulation, considering productions of δ-rays
and Auger electrons. Note that the name of “SED” derives from “Specific Energy Distribution”. Details of thecalculation procedure are given elsewhere. 49 50 The function of [delta ray] section shouldn’t be used together
with this tally.
Using this tally, we can get information on probability densities of y and z in water. We can also calculate theprobability densities in diﬀerent materials, although the accuracy has not been checked yet. Similar to [t-let],the dose is only counted in an energy loss of charged particles and nuclei, and thus, we must use the event generator
mode (e-mode≥1) if we would like to transport low-energy neutrons. The deposition energy in microscopic sites
can be expressed by deposit energy ε in MeV, lineal energy y in keV/µm or specific energy z in Gy. The definitionsof these quantities are given in ICRU Report 36. Usage of [t-sed] is similar to that of [t-let].
Table 6.31: [t-sed] parameters (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =
material =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
letmat =2 5 8(omissible)

se-unit =1, 2, 3

cdiam =

(omissible, D=1.0)

explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-sed]
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
material id for LET(dE/dx).
If omitted, real material is assumed.
If you select the material that is not used in your geometry,
you have to define its material density in [material] section.
If you would like to calculate LET in water, you have todefine water with 1 g/cm3 in [material] sectiont.
When you set letmat < 0, PHITS automatically calculates
dE/dx for water with 1 g/cm3 for electrons and positrons.
Please see “particletherapy” in the recommendation setting
in more detail.
Unit of deposition energy in microscopic site
1: deposit energy ε in MeV
2: lineal energy y in keV/µm
3: specific energy z in Gy
Diameter of the microscopic site in µm.
You can select the value from 0.001 to 2.0.

49 T. Sato, R. Watanabe and K. Niita,
Development of a calculation method for estimating the specific energy distribution in complex
radiation fields , Radiat. Prot. Dosim. 122, 41-45 (2006).
50 T. Sato, Y. Kase, R. Watanabe, K. Niita and L. Sihver, Biological dose estimation for charged-particle therapy using an improved PHITS
code coupled with a microdosimetric kinetic model , Radiat. Res. 171, 107-117 (2009).

6.11 [ T-SED ] section

215

Table 6.32: [t-sed] parameters (2)namese-type =value
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

7,8

axis =
file =
resfile =factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =

sed, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
file name(omissible, D=file)(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

explanationε, y or z mesh (unit is defined by se-unit):
an energy mesh subsection (specified in ne, emin, emax, etc.)
is required below this option. If a “Warning: Z bin is notenough!” message occurs, the emin, emax, and ne parametersmust be changed. This warning indicates that the microdosimetric function cannot calculate the y (or z) distribution because therange is too small or the mesh resolution is too poor. For example, set se-type=3, emin=0.01, emax=10000.0, ne=60 or
higher for calculating the y distribution for cite diameter = 1 µm
(cdiam=1.0, se-unit=2).
1: Track [cm/(keV/µm)/source]
2: Dose [MeV/(keV/µm)/source], proportional to y ∗ f (y).
3: Track [cm/ln(keV/µm)/source]
4: Dose [MeV/ln(keV/µm)/source], proportional to y ∗ d(y).
5: Track [cm/source]
6: Dose [MeV/source]∫
7: y ∗ f (y) [dimensionless], wheref (y)dy = 1.
∫
8: y ∗ d(y) [keV/µm], where d(y)dy = 1.
These units are for the case of se-unit=2. For se-unit=1 and3, (keV/µm) is replaced by (MeV) and (Gy), respectively.
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should specify
only one resfile.
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title

From version 3.02, new options (unit=7 and 8) were implemented. Using them, the frequency and dose
probability densities of y, f (y) and d(y), respectively, can be easily calculated. The results obtained from unit=7
and 8 are proportional to those obtained from unit=2 and 4, respectively, but their absolute values are diﬀerent
because the integral of the probability densities are normalized to 1 in the cases of the new options. Note that
unit=13 and 14 can be set only when axis=sed.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

216

Table 6.33: [t-sed] parameters (3)namegshow =value
0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6.12 [ T-Time ] section

217

6.12 [ T-Time ] section
Using this tally, we can get information on the number of particles of energy cut oﬀ, escape, and decay in thetime mesh (nsec). We can also obtain energy spectra of these particles. Especially, this is the unique tally canobtain energy spectra of only the particles of energy cut oﬀ.

material =Table 6.34: [t-time] parameters (1)valueexplanation
reg, r-z, xyz
geometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
all (default),
maximum 6 particles in a [t-time]
particle name(omissible)
You can specify materials for scoring.
all,
all : default (same as no definition)
number of materials
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.

(next line)
t-type =2 5 8
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

e-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

unit =

1, 2, 3, 4

axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz
file name(omissible, D=file)namemesh =
part =

file =
resfile =output =factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =

allcutoffescapedecay(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

material numbers
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this optionenergy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option
1: [1/source]
2: [1/nsec/source]
3: [1/nsec/cm3 /source]
4: [1/nsec/cm3 /MeV/source]
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
energy cut oﬀ, escape, and decay particles
energy cut oﬀ particles
escape particles
decay particles
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

218

Table 6.35: [t-time] parameter (2)namegshow =value
0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

volume(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

explanation
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region
for reg mesh. You need volume definitions
below this option.
Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh

6.12 [ T-Time ] section

219

Table 6.36: [t-time] parameter (3)namedump =

value
number of data

(next line)

data sequencegslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
For mesh=reg, the information is dumped on the file.
If dump is negative, data is written by ascii,
if positive, by binary.
define the data sequence. The history information (nocas
and nobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1.
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

In [t-time] tally, you can use the dump option only with output = cutoff. If the dump option is set, themeshes of e-type and t-type have only the meaning of the maximum and minimum values, and unit is set tobe 1. When you use this dump parameter, axis and file are restricted to one axis and one file, and unit isalways 1. The dumped data are written on a file named “*** dmp”, where “***”indicates the file name specified
by “file=***”. The normal output of the tally is written on “***”. From this file, you can get the informationon the total normalization factor. To do so, you had better set one mesh for e-type, a-type and t-type. (Inthe former version of PHITS (before 2.66), the normal output was written on a configuration file (.cfg), and thedumped data were written on “***”.) The history information (nocas and nobch) is necessary to use idmpmode=1
for the continuous calculation using dump file. In addition, both of the two files, the dump file with “ dmp” andthe normal output file specified by file=, are required to use idmpmode=1. The option dumpall is not compatible
with this dump tally option when shared memory parallelization is active.
By this dump option, you can create similar files to ncut, gcut and pcut files for the sequential calculations of
the other transport code.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

220

6.13 [ T-Star ] section
This tally gives the number that nuclear reactions occur. When nuclear data libraries are used, only neutrons
are tallied.
You must use the EGS5 mode if you whould like to calculate star density of atomic interactions.
Table 6.37: [t-star] parameter (1)namemesh =

value
reg, r-z, xyz

part =all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials

material =(next line)
mother =2 5 8(omissible)
all,number of mother nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pb

nucleus =(omissible)
all,number of nuclei(next line)

208Pb Pbe-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
1, 2

unit =
axis =

eng, reg, x, y, z, r,
xy, yz, xz, rz

explanationgeometry mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
maximum 6 particles in a [t-star]
projectile particle of the reaction
You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for scoring.
material numbers
You can specify mother nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of mother nuclei,
define their mothers in the next line.
You can set number of mothers by negative.
In this case, specified mothers are not included
for scoring.
You cannot specify mother nuclei when output=atomic.
Nucleus if you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb.
If you want to specify multiple mother groups,
use multiple [t-star] tallies
You can specify output nuclei.
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of nuclei,
define their nuclei in the next line.
Nucleus if you specify with mass.
Without mass, all isotopes of Pb.
energy mesh
You need energy mesh subsection below this option.
time mesh
You need time mesh subsection below this option
1: [1/cm3 /source]
2: [1/cm3 /MeV/source]
x axis value of output data
2 dimensional

6.13 [ T-Star ] section

221

Table 6.38: [t-star] parameter (2)namefile =
resfile =value
file name(omissible, D=file)

output =alldecay
elastic
nuclearfissionabsorption
heavyiontransmut

x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
gshow =

atomicdeltarayatmfluauger
brems
photoelec
comptonpairprodannih(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
(omissible, D=3)
(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3, 4

rshow =

0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
1

factor =title =
angel =
sangel =2d-type =2resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

explanation
Define file names as same number of axis.
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should
specify only one resfile.
star density for all reactions
star density for decay reaction
star density for elastic reaction
star density for non-elastic + Hydrogen + HI
star density for fission
star density for absorption
star density for Heavy Ion reaction
star density for a reaction which induces transmutationof target nucleus
star densify for atomic interaction excluding multiple scatteringstar densify for delta-ray production
star densify for atomic fluorescence x-ray emission
star densify for generating auger electron emission
star densify for bremsstrahlungstar densify for photoelectric eﬀectstar densify for compton scatteringstar densify for electron-positron pair production
star densify for positron annihilation
normalization factor
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
options for 2 dimensional plot
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
When mesh=xyz, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), region name (3),and LAT number(4) are plotted by the option.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz,
region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3)are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section below this option.
No geometry check in the case of gshow or rshow>0
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)
The option multiplies region line resolution
by resol times with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness
for gshow or rshow option.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

222

Table 6.39: [t-star] parameter (3)namevolumevalue(omissible)

reg vol
iechrl =volmat =72 (default)(omissible, D=9)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh.
You need volume definitions below this option.
Default values are given in input echo
in the case of no definition.
volume definition. See 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
The option corrects a volume value for each meshwhen material is defined by xyz mesh.
(0 means no correction)
Value of volmat means the number of scansfor one side of xyz mesh
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files.
This eps file is named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file,
except for axis= xy, yz, xz, rz.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
minimum value for i-th countermaximum value for i-th counter
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: noThreshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.

6.14 [ T-Dchain ] section

223

6.14 [ T-Dchain ] section
This tally is used for generating input files for DCHAIN-SP. Figure 6.4 illustrates the flowchart of the connection calculation between PHITS and DCHAIN-SP.

Figure 6.4: Concept of the connection calculation between PHITS and DCHAIN-SP.

In the PHITS calculation, [t-dchain] automatically creates [t-track] and [t-yield] as well as the input
file of DCHAIN-SP. The [t-track] tally calculates the neutron energy spectra below 20 MeV with a 1968energy-group structure. The [t-yield] tally calculates the nuclear production yields by protons, heavy-ions,mesons, and neutrons with energies above 20 MeV.
In the DCHAIN-SP calculation, the neutron energy spectra are multiplied by the activation cross section
contained in the DCHAIN-SP data library. Then, the total activations are estimated by adding these results
and those directly calculated by PHITS using the [t-yield] tally. After that, DCHAIN-SP evaluates radioactivity, nuclide, decay heat, and the gamma energy spectrum at irradiation and cooling time. Please see the“\phits\recommendation\dchain” folder in more detail. When publishing results obtained using this tally, pleaseprovide a reference to the document 51 in footnote below.
Note that the time variation in particle transport simulation or that given by time distribution defined in the[source] section is independent of the time variation in the DCHAIN-SP calculation.
Setting e-mode≥1 in the [parameters] section enables calculation of the yields of radioactive nuclides produced by low-energy neutron reactions below 20 MeV using PHITS instead of the activation cross sections contained in the DCHAIN-SP data library. However, the accuracy of the event generator mode relative to that of the
DCHAIN-SP data library in terms of calculating the residual-nuclide yields has not been verified, and it is therefore recommended that the use set e-mode=0 (default) in the PHITS calculation using [t-dchain]. Note that
activations from the originally activated target are not included in the DCHAIN-SP calculation.
From ver. 3.00, the natural isotope expansion defined in [material] was eﬀective in input files of DCHAINSP generated by [t-dchain]. Note that in the case that one nucleus is defined two (or more) times in a material,
only the latter one is eﬀective. For example, if a material is defined as follows:
MAT[1] Fe 1

56Fe 1a contribution of 56Fe included in Fe is ignored in the DCHAIN-SP calculation.

51 Tetsuya Kai, et al., “DCHAIN-SP 2001: High Energy Particle Induced Radioactivity Calculation Code”, JAERI-Data/Code-2001-016(2001) in Japanese6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

224

Table 6.40: [t-dchain] parameters
name
mesh=

value
reg

file=

file nametitle=
stdcut=timeevo=(next line)(omitted)(omitted, D=-1)
numbertime and factor

outtime=(next line)

amp=
target =numbertime(omitted,D=1.0)0, 1(omitted,D=0)

explanation
Geometry mesh (Currently ONLY region mesh reg can be specified): a geometry mesh subsection must be added below this option. (reg = cell number).
Input file name of DCHAIN-SP. Any extension except .dtrk, .dyld, or.dout can be used.
Title.
Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.
Number of irradiation and cooling steps in DCHAIN-SP calculation.
time: time step of irradiation and/or cooling.
factor: normalized factor for beam intensity.
Time should be calculated from the end of the last step and not from the startof the first irradiation. The allowable units are seconds (s), minutes (m), hours(h), days (d), and years (y). One (or more) blank character must be placed
between the number indicating the time and the unit.
*See example of input for [t-dchain] tally in Example 52.
Number of output timings in the DCHAIN-SP calculation.
Output timing.
If a positive value is given as the output timing, it is calculated from the startof the first irradiation step. If a negative value is given, it is calculated fromthe end of last irradiation step. Except for this positive and negative rule, theformat for specifying the timing is the same as that for timeevo. The timing
cannot be specified until after all steps defined in timeevo are finished.
To output the timing when no radioactive nuclide exists, e.g., 0.0 m, set
iprtb2=0 in the [t-dchain] section.
Power of source (source/second).
0: OFF; Not necessary to write target information:
the information is automatically determined from the [material], [cell],and [volume] sections.
1: ON; Necessary to write target information.
*To add nuclides that are not defined in the [material] in the DCHAIN-SP
calculation, and/or the volume is not set in the [volume], write target=1
and provide the related information as in Example 53.
*See example of target subsection for target=1 in Example 53.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.
In addition to the above parameters, the DCHAIN-SP parameters can also be specified in [t-dchain] section.
The specifiable parameters are:imode, jmode, idivs, iregon, inmtcf, ichain, itdecs, itdecn, isomtr, ifisyd, ifisye, iyild, iggrp, ibetap,
acmin, istabl, igsdef, iprtb1, iprtb2, rprtb2, iprtb3, igsorg, ebeam, prodnp
The respective meanings of these parameters are given in the DCHAIN-SP manual.

6.14 [ T-Dchain ] section

225

Example 52: Example of input for [t-dchain] tally
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:

mesh = reg
reg = 100
file = testDC.spd
title = [t-dchain] test calc.
amp = 1.0E12
timeevo = 4
3.0 h
2.0 h
3.5 h
15.5 h

1.0
0.0
1.0
0.0

outtime = 33.0 h-1.0 h
-3.0 h<-region mesh<-cell number<-file name of DCHAIN-SP input<-source power (source/sec)<-number of irradiation and cooling steps<-irradiation for 3 hours<-cooling for 2 hours<-irradiation for 3.5 hours<-cooling for 15.5 hours<-number of output timing<-3 hours later from the 1st irradiation start time<-1 hour later from the end of the last irradiation step<-3 hour later from the end of the last irradiation step

Figure 6.5: Relation between steps for irradiation and cooling time and output time.

Example 53: Example for the setting of target material compositions and volumes for target=1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

.......
target = 1
non
reg
vol
1
1
8000.0tg-list = 2
H-1
6.689E-02
O-16 3.345E-02
2
2
2000.0tg-list = 1
Fe-56 8.385E-02<-target material composition ON<-omissible<-serial number, cell number, volume<-number of the nuclides<-Element ID, Atomic Number,and Density of the atom (10ˆ24/cmˆ3)<-serial number, cell number, volume<-Number of the nuclides

To indicate an isotope, the symbol of the chemical element must be connected with its atomic number using
the character ‘-.’Important notices for using [t-dchain]:• Only one [t-dchain] tally per PHITS input file is allowed.
• The following parameters must be defined in the [parameters] section:– jmout=1: display the atomic number density of materials.
– file(21): set the placement of the data folder for DCHAIN-SP.
• The volume of each tally region must be defined in the [volume] section.
Files generated by [t-dchain] are listed below.
• The basic input file of DCHAIN-SP: file name is set in the [t-dchain] tally.
• Neutron energy spectra with 1968 group energy structures below 20 MeV are calculated by creating [t-track]:“n.flux.” When more than two regions are set, use the file names n.flux 01, n.flux 02, · · · , f.flux XX.

226

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT• Nuclear production yields are calculated by creating [t-yield]: “nmtc yield.”• Information on the link to the folder containing the DCHAIN-SP data library is in “dch link.dat.”• Files for PHITS restart calculation: ***.dtrk, ***.dyld, *** err.dyld, ***.dout
Not that when DCHAIN-SP is executed, files of names shown below are deleted.
yield.out, out-gsdef, out-gamsporg, out-allreg, spd-act.out, angel-data.ang, out-phits6.15 [ T-WWG ] section

227

6.15 [ T-WWG ] section
The [t-wwg] tally outputs parameters used for the [Weight Window] section. The tally serves as a Weight
Window Generator (WWG) to automatically obtain eﬀective settings of [Weight Window] for a user-defined
virtual space. When using this function, a test calculation using an input file including the [t-wwg] tally must be
performed. Long calculations can then be performed using the [Weight Window] section generated from this test
calculation. The parameters are determined by the number of particles entering the cells 52 . In the test calculation,
PHITS records the number of particles entering the cells specified in [t-wwg], and normalizes their values so as
to set the maximum of the weight window to 1. If no particle arrives at a specified cell, the weight window is set tothe same value as that in the cell with the minimum fluence. This tally outputs one set of the [Weight Window]
section for each type of particle specified by part. If the energy or time mesh is defined in [t-wwg], the [Weight
Window] sections are output for each bin. You have to give volumes of each cells in [volume] section.
When you perform the restart calculation or use the sumtally function with an input file including [t-wwg],
set ireschk=1 in the [parameters] section.
The [t-wwg] parameters are formatted as follows.
Table 6.41: [t-wwg] parameters (1)namemesh =
part =value
reg
all (default),
particle name(omissible)
all,number of materials

explanation
Geometry mesh. Only reg can be set.
Maximum 6 particles in a [t-wwg].

(next line)
e-type =2 5 8
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)1(omissible)eng, reg, xy, yz, xz,
t, wwgMaterial numbers.
Energy mesh.
You need energy mesh subsection.
Time mesh.
You need time mesh subsection.
1: [1/cm2 /source]
x-axis value of output data. [t-track].
It is the same as [t-track] except for wwg.
To perform restart calculation, set two (or more) axis, and then
set the first axis to reg, eng, or t.
Define file names as same number of axis.
Define a file name of the past tally in the restart calculation.
Even if several axis parameters were defined, you should specify only one resfile.
Normalization factor.
Title.
Angel parameters.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3) are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section.

material =unit =
axis =

file =
resfile =file name(omissible, D=file)

factor =title =
angel =
rshow =

(omissible, D=1.0)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3

You can specify materials for scoring.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials, define these material numbers in the next line.

Only reg can be set mesh because the parameters in [Weight Window] are defined for each region. In short,axis should be set wwg to obtain the parameters for [Weight Window]. Although eng, reg, xy, yz, xz, andt can also be set, their results are not related with [Weight Window]. axis= xy, yz, or xz are valid onlywith rshow=1.

52 To be precise, it is determined by the fluence of a Monte Carlo particle, i.e., a particle always having weight= 1.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

228

Table 6.42: [t-wwg] parameters (2)nameginfo =value
0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =
volume0.5 (default)(omissible)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

ctmin(i) =ctmax(i) =trcl =(omissible, D=-9999)(omissible, D= 9999)(omissible)

gslat =
stdcut =1(default), 0(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
No geometry check in the case of gshow> 0 or rshow> 0.
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view with error information.
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view, and output a geometry error file (.err).
The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times withgshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.
The option defines volume for each region for reg mesh. You needvolume definitions below this option. Default values are given in input
echo in the case of no definition.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps file isnamed by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
When epsout=2, error bars are also displayed in the eps file, except
for axis= xy, yz, xz, wwg.
Minimum value for i-th counter.
Maximum value for i-th counter.
Coordinate transformation number or definition for r-z or xyz
mesh.
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no.
Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.
An example output of this tally is as follows.

[ Weight Window ]set: c71[0.0] c72[c71+2.13496E-08]
set: c74[0.0] c75[c74+9.29569E-09]
part = neutroneng = 21.00000E-03

c73[1.25478E-04]
c76[2.08987E-04]

1.00000E+03

reg
ww1
1
(8.94092E-05+c71)/c73
2(1.25478E-04+c71)/c73
3(8.53835E-05+c71)/c73

ww2(2.08987E-04+c74)/c76(1.26817E-04+c74)/c76(5.78131E-05+c74)/c76

In this sample, the [Weight Window] parameters for neutrons with two energy bins are output. In principle,
it is not necessary to change these parameters, but c71 or c74 should be specified when adding a constant value
for each Weight Window.

6.16 [ T-WWBG ] section229

6.16 [ T-WWBG ] section
The [t-wwbg] tally outputs parameters used for the [ww bias] section. The tally serves as a Weight Window
Bias Generator (WWBG) to automatically obtain eﬀective settings of [ww bias], which is used to bias [weightwindow]. The [ww bias] function is useful when the [weight window] parameters for a certain region arebiased after automatically generating the [weight window] section by [t-wwg]. Figure 4.47 shows a flowchart
how to perform the transport calculation using [weight window] and [ww bias]. First, generate the [weightwindow] section by [t-wwg]. If the obtained parameters of [weight window] are enough to eﬀectively use thevariance reduction technique, the [ww bias] section is not needed. However, if they are not enough, the variancereduction technique can be used more eﬀectively by biasing the [weight window] parameters for a certain region
with [ww bias]. There are two methods to set the [ww bias] section; an automatic method using [t-wwbg],
which is a Weight Window Bias Generator (WWBG) and will be explained below, and a manual method by auser. Only one [t-wwbg] section can be set in one input file. [t-wwbg] is eﬀective only when icntl=15 in[parameters]. For details of [ww bias], see Sec. 4.20. When performing a transport calculation with [wwbias] and [weight window], set icntl=0 and iwwbias=1 in [parameters].
Set [ww bias]

Set [weight window]
・With setting [t-wwg], perform

・With setting [t-wwbg], performa normal calculation (icntl=0).

a sample calculation (icntl=15).

([weight window] is automatically set.)([ww bias] is automatically set.)or・Set [ww bias] manually.

Transport calculation with [weight window] and [ww bias]
・Set [weight window] and [ww bias] in the same input ﬁle.
・Execute PHITS with icntl=0 and iwwbias=1 in [parameters].

Figure 6.6: The flowchart of the connection calculation between [weight window] and [ww bias].
[t-wwbg] determines the bias values in stages of some cylindrical regions, which are with a central axis on avector defined by two points (x0,y0,z0) and (x1,y1,z1), shown in Fig. 6.7. Figure 6.7 shows a cross-section
view of three diﬀerent size cylinders. To define the cylindrical regions, the parameters n-mesh, r-mesh, z-mesh,and f-mesh are also required. n-mesh is the number of the cylinders. The diﬀerences of radii and heights ofthe cylinders are given by r-mesh, z-mesh, respectively. In these parameters, the same number of values as then-mesh must be given. The bias values can be set from the inside of the cylindrical regions in f-mesh. f-meshmust be set of (n-mesh)+1. The last value of f-mesh is the bias value in the outside of the cylinders. The
fm4

zm3 zm2 zm1

rm3

fm3

rm2

fm2

rm1

fm1

(x0,y0,z0)(x1,y1,z1)

Figure 6.7: Parameters to define cylindrical regions.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

230

cylindrical regions can be defined regardless of the geometry to calculation of the particle transport simulation.
Note that if the defined cylindrical regions overlap the outer void given in [cell], the outer void region can beextended by the r-out parameter.
The [t-wwbg] parameters are formatted as follows.
Table 6.43: [t-wwbg] parametersnamemesh =
part =
e-type =valueregall (default),
1, 2, 3, 4, 5

t-type =axis =

1, 2, 3, 4, 5(omissible)
xy, yz, xz, wwbg

file =
angel =
x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
rshow =

file name(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1, 2, 3

ginfo =

0 (default),
12

resol =

1 (default)

width =

0.5 (default)

epsout =0 (default), 1, 2

x0, y0, z0 =x1, y1, z1 =n-mesh =r-mesh =n
rm1,rm2,· · · ,rmn

z-mesh =zm1,zm2,· · · ,zmn

f-mesh =fm1,fm2,· · · ,fmn,fm(n+1)

r-out =

(omissible, D=0)

explanation
Geometry mesh. Only reg can be set.
Maximum 6 particles in a [t-wwg].
Energy mesh.
You need energy mesh subsection.
Time mesh.
You need time mesh subsection.
Restart calculation cannot be performed. When xy, yz, zx,
the rshow option is needed.
Define file names as same number of axis.
Angel parameters.
Text of x-axis.
Text of y-axis.
Text of z-axis.
When mesh=reg, axis=xy,yz,xz, region border (1), material name (2), and region name (3) are plotted by the option.
You need xyz mesh section.
No geometry check in the case of gshow> 0 or rshow> 0.
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view with error
information.
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view, and output ageometry error file (.err).
The option multiplies region line resolution by resol times
with gshow or rshow option.
The option defines the line thickness for gshow or rshow option.
When epsout=1, results are plotted into eps files. This eps fileis named by replacing the extension into “.eps ”.
x, y, z coordinates of an initial point.
x, y, z coordinates of a terminal point.
The number of cylindrical regions.
The diﬀerence of radii of cylinders. The number of n-meshmust be set.
The diﬀerence of heights of cylinders. The number of n-meshmust be set.
Bias values in cylindrical regions. The number of (n-mesh)+1
must be set.
Radius to extend the outer void [cm].

6.16 [ T-WWBG ] section

231

The following is an example of [t-wwbg].
Example 54: Example of [t-wwbg].
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:

[ T - WWBG ]mesh = reg
reg = allaxis = wwbg
file = wwbg.out
axis = yz
file = wwbyz.out
part = neutrone-type =1
ne =2
0.0 1e-3 1.0
x0 = 0.0
y0 = -20
z0 = 50x1 = 0.0
y1 = 20z1 = 150
n-mesh =3
r-mesh =10 10 10z-mesh =10 10 10f-mesh =1.0 0.5 0.1
r-out = 1000

0.05

In this example, the initial and terminal points are (0, -20, 50) and (0, 20, 150), respectively. The three cylindricalregions are defined with the central axis on the vector defined the two points. Figure 6.8 shows a spatial distributionof the bias values given by Filetheexample input. The radii of the three cylinders are defined by Dater-mesh,the diﬀerences= wwbyz01.dat= 09:30 08-Aug-2017of them are 10cm. The heights of the cylinders increase by 20cm, which is two times of 10cm given by z-mesh.
Bias values are given as 1.0, 0.5, 0.1, and 0.05 from the inside of the cylindrical regions. The change of the biases
is shown in Fig. 6.8.
x

no. = 1, ix = 110= 0.0000E+00 [cm]0

WWB [WWB]y [cm]

50

0

10−1

−50

0

plotted by ANGEL 4.35

50

100
z [cm]

150

200

calculated by PHITS 2.95

Figure 6.8: Spatial distribution of bias values given by the example 54.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

232

6.17 [ T-Volume ] section
You can automatically obtain volumes of each cell by using this tally. [t-volume] is eﬀective only when you
set icntl=14 in [parameters] section. You can set only one [t-volume] section in one input file. For detailsof the execution of this automatic calculation, see Sec. 7.
The format of parameters in [t-volume] is as follows.
Table 6.44: [t-volume] parametersnamemesh =
file =
resfile =

value
reg
file name(omissible, D=file)r-out =
title =
method =(omissible, D=0.0)(omissible)(omissible, D=0)s-type =1, 2x0, y0, z0,
x1, y1, z1,
r0 =stdcut =(omissible, D=-1)

explanation
Geometry mesh. Only reg can be set.
Define an output file name.
Define a file name of the past tally in therestart calculation.
Radius of outer void. (cm)
Title.
Option for Monte Carlo integration.
0: By particle track lengths.
1: By source points.
Source type for volume calculation.
1: Sphere source. The coordinates of thesphere, (x0, y0, z0), and its radius, r0, haveto be defined.
2: Rectangular solid source. The coordinatesx0, x1, y0, y1, z0, and z1 have to be defined.
Coordinates and radius.

Threshold value of STD cut oﬀ.

You can specify the source type in the volume calculation by s-type. In s-type=1, the source generates on asphere of the center coordinates (x0,y0,z0) and the radius r0 with the inward direction. This is the same condition
as dir=-all in s-type=9 of [source] section. In s-type=2, the source uniformly generates on surfaces of arectangular solid which are defined by 6 planes, x=x0, x1, y=y0, y1, and z=z0, z1. Its direction is inward.
In either case, you have to set the source region to be large so as to cover the all specified cells.
By specifying stdcut, you can automatically stop a PHITS calculation depending on values of STD (standard
deviation). This function is available when stdcut is positive and itall=0,1 is set in [parameters] section.
When all relative values of STD of the tally result are smaller than stdcut at the last of one batch, PHITS finishes
its calculation. If you set stdcut in two (or more) tally sections, all the results of the tally sections have to satisfy
the conditions in order to work the function.
When executing PHITS using [t-volume], the information on the source used in the volume calculation is
output in [source] of the summary file file(6) (D=phits.out). [source] written in the input file of PHITS
is not output in the summary file.

6.18 [ T-Userdefined ] section

233

6.18 [ T-Userdefined ] section
This tally is used for estimating and outputting the physical quantities that cannot be calculated by the othertallies. In order to use this tally, you have to change “usrtally.f” and re-compile PHITS by yourself.
When [t-userdefined] is defined in your input file, PHITS calls subroutine “usrtally” at every momentin the PHITS simulation, namely at the same timing for calling the dumpall option. A subroutine for output all
information is written in the default “usrtally.f”. You can output only your required information by revising thefile. Please see read-me file or sample input file in \phits\utility\usrtally in detail.
In [t-userdefined], some parameters can be specified to use in the subroutine “usrtally” without recompiling PHITS. file is an output file name. nudtvar is the number of variables udtvar(i), which can be used in thesubroutine. udtvar(i)53 must be given as a numerical value.
Table 6.45: [t-userdefined] parametersnamefile =

value
file namenudtvar =udtvar(i) =0(default)
Numerical value (D=0)

explanation
Output file names used in subroutine usrtally.
The maximum number of files can be used is 50.
(Device numbers of these files are from 151 to 200.)
The number of available udtvar(i).
Variables used in subroutine usrtally.
These can be defined upto i =nudtvar.

Example 55: An example input for [t-userdefined]
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

file = output1.dat
file = output2.dat
nudtvar = 2
udtvar(1) = 20.0
udtvar(2) = -10.0<-its device number is iudtf(1)=151<-its device number is iudtf(2)=152<-nudtvar<-udtvar(1)<-udtvar(2)The following parameters can be used in the subroutine usrtally.
(1) NCOL:
This is an intrinsic variable in the program and denotes identification of process.
NCOL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

start of calculation
end of calculation
end of a batchsourcedetection of geometry error
recovery of geometry error
termination by geometry error
termination by weight cut-oﬀ
termination by time cut-oﬀ
geometry boundary crossing
termination by energy cut-oﬀ
termination by escape or leakage(n,x) reaction(n,n’x) reaction
sequential transport only for tally(2) npe, me:
These are the number of used PEs (Processor Elements) and ID number of each processor, respectively, inthe distributed-memory parallel computing.
53 This parameter plays the same role as udtparai (i = 0 − 9) before ver. 3.01. udtparai can be also set after ver. 3.02.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

234(3) ipomp, npomp:
These are ID number of each core and the total number of used cores, respectively, in the shared memory
parallel computing.
(4) iusrtally:
This is a parameter to control whether subroutine usrtally is used or not. If [t-userdefined] isdefined in an input file, this parameter is set to be 1.
(5) iudtf(50):These are device numbers of output files defined with file=. For example, if there is the earliest file definedin [t-userdefined], its device number is iudtf(1)=151.
(6) nudtvar:
The number of available udtvar(i). This is given as nudtvar in the input file.
(7) udtvar(i):These are numerical values defined as udtvar(i) in the input file. udtvar(i) upto i=nudtvar can be used.
If udtvar(i) is not defined in the input file, it is set to 0.
(8) NOCAS, NOBCH, RCASC, RSOUIN:
NOCAS
NOBCH
RCASC
RSOUIN::::current history number in this batchcurrent batch number
real number of NOCAS+maxcas*(NOBCH-1)
sum of the weight of source particle(9) NO, IDMN, ITYP, KTYP, JTYP, MTYP, RTYP, OLDWT:
NO
IDMN
ITYP
KTYP
JTYP
MTYP
RTYP
OLDWT

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

cascade id in this history
material id
particle typeparticle kf-code
charge number of the particle
baryon number of the particle
rest mass of the particle (MeV)wight of the particle at (x,y,z)(10) QS:This is dE/dx for electrons at (x,y,z).
(11) IBLZ1, IBLZ2, ILEV1, ILEV2:
IBLZ1
IBLZ2
ILEV1
ILEV2

:
:
:
:

cell id at (x,y,z)cell id after crossing
level structure id of the cell at (x,y,z)level structure id of the cell after crossing(a) ILAT1:
This is a variable of level structure of cell.
(b) ILAT2:This is a variable of level structure of cell.
(12) COSTH, UANG(1), UANG(2), UANG(3), NSURF:
COSTH
UANG(1,2,3)
NSURF

:
:
:

cosine of an angle of incidence in a surface crossing
x,y,z component of a normal vector of its surface, respectively
internal number of the surface(This is diﬀerent from the surface number defined in the [surface] section.)6.18 [ T-Userdefined ] section(13) NAME, NCNT(1), NCNT(2), NCNT(3):NAME
NCNT(1,2,3)::

collision number of the particle
values of counter 1, 2, and 3(14) WT, U, V, W:
WT
U, V, W::wight of the particle at (xc,yc,zc)
unit vector of momentum of the particle(15) E, T, X, Y, Z:
E
T
X, Y, Z:::

energy of the particle at (x,y,z) (MeV)time of the particle at (x,y,z) (nsec)
position coordinate of the preceding event point (cm)(16) EC, TC, XC, YC, ZC:
EC
TC
XC, YC, ZC:::

energy of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (MeV)time of the particle at (xc,yc,zc) (nsec)
position coordinate of the particle (cm)(17) SPX, SPY, SPZ:
SPX, SPY, SPZ:

unit vector of spin direction of the particle(18) NZST:This is charge state of the particle.
(19) NCLSTS:
This variable means the number of produced particle and nucleus.
(a) MATHZ, MATHN, JCOLL, KCOLL:
MATHZ
MATHN
JCOLL
KCOLL

:
:
:
:

Z number of the mother nucleus
N number of the mother nucleus
reaction type id1
reaction type id2

JCOLL and KCOLL indicate the following meaning.
JCOLL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

nothing happen
Hydrogen collisions
Particle Decays
Elastic collisions
High Energy Nuclear collisions
Heavy Ion reactions
Neutron reactions by data
Photon reactions by data
Electron reactions by data
Proton reactions by data
Neutron event modedelta ray production
Photon reactions by EGS5
Electron reactions by EGS5235

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

236

KCOLL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

normalhigh energy fission
high energy absorption
low energy n elastic
low energy n non-elastic
low energy n fission
low energy n absorption(b) ICLUSTS, JCLUSTS, QCLUSTS, JCOUNT:
These variables have a array and denote the information on the produced particle and nucleus.
ICLUSTSkind of particle
0 : nucleus
1 : proton
2 : neutron
3 : pion
4 : photon
5 : kaon
6 : muon
7 : others
JCLUSTS(i)
i=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
=5
=6
=7
QCLUSTS(i)
i=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
=5
=6
=7
=8
=9
= 10
= 11
= 12

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

angular momentum
proton number
neutron number
itypstatus of the particle 0: real, <0 : deadcharge number
baryon number
kf code
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

impact parameterpx (GeV/c)py (GeV/c)pz (GeV/c)√etot = p2 + m2 (GeV)
rest mass (GeV)
excitation energy (MeV)
kinetic energy (MeV)
weighttime (nsec)
x coordinate (cm)y coordinate (cm)z coordinate (cm)

6.19 [ T-Gshow ] section237

6.19 [ T-Gshow ] section[ T - G s h o w ] gives graphical geometry output for region boundary by xyz mesh. You can obtain theseresults without transport calculations with icntl =7 option in the [parameters] section.
Table 6.46: [t-gshow] parameter
namemesh =

value
xyz

axis =
file =
output =resol =
width =
title =
angel =
sangel =x-txt =
y-txt =
epsout =xy, yz, xz
file name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 (default)
0.5 (default)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1

bmpout =0(default), 1

vtkout =0(default), 1

vtkfmt =0(default), 1

trcl =(omissible)

gslat =
ginfo =

1(default), 0
2 (default),0
1
2

explanationgeometry mesh, only xyz mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
region boundary
region boundary + material color
region boundary + material nameregion boundary + material color + material nameregion boundary + region nameregion boundary + material color + region nameregion boundary + LAT number
region boundary + material color + LAT number
The resolution in displaying region lines is multiplied by this value.
The thickness of displayed region lines.
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
x axis title
y axis title
If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted
into eps files. This eps file is namedby replacing the extension into “.eps”.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Output the tally results in xyz-mesh in the input format of ParaView.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.vtk ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
Format of output file for ParaView.
0: ascii, 1: binary.
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no
Region error checkNo geometry check
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

238

output=7,8 can be used only when cells in bottom level are the lattice themselves, and they give lattice
number in the format as (4,1,2). For example, Fig. 4.40 in Sec. 4.6.4 is generated by the input shown below.
Example 56: [t-gshow] example
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:

[ T - gshow ]mesh = xyz
x-type = 2
nx = 100xmin = -10.
xmax = 10
y-type = 1
ny = 1-5.0 5.0
z-type = 2nz= 100zmin = -10.
zmax = 10.
axis = xz
output = 8
file = cell-example6.dat
epsout = 1

6.20 [ T-Rshow ] section239

6.20 [ T-Rshow ] section[ T - R s h o w ] gives graphical geometry output for region boundary with color plot region in proportion
to physical quantity of the region. Usually, the results obtained by other PHITS calculation using the reg mesh
are used as the input data for this value of physical quantity. You must run PHITS with icntl =9 option in the[parameters] section, in order to execute this tally.
You can give color variation by the linear scale or the log scale by the ANGEL parameter, zlog or zlin. Default
is zlin.
Table 6.47: [t-rshow] parameter
namemesh =

value
xyz

axis =
file =
output =xy, yz, xz
file name12
3
4
1 (default)
0.5 (default)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)

resol =
width =
title =
angel =
sangel =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
reg =value
reg valiechrl =epsout =72 (default)
0 (default), 1

bmpout =0(default), 1

trcl =(omissible)

gslat =
ginfo =

1(default), 0
2 (default),0
1
2

explanationgeometry mesh, only xyz mesh
you need geometry mesh subsection below this option
2 dimensional
Define file names as same number of axis
region boundary
region boundary + material nameregion boundary + region nameregion boundary + LAT number
The resolution in displaying region lines is multiplied by this value.
The thickness of displayed region lines.
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
region definition
value definition with same format as volume definition
see section 5.1.2
Number of maximum column for volume input echo
If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted
into eps files. This eps file is namedby replacing the extension into “.eps”.
Generate Bitmap figure of 2-dimensional tally output.
This file is named by replacing the extension into “.bmp ”.
When mesh=xyz, axis=(xy, yz, or xz), this is available.
coordinate transformation number or definition
for r-z or xyz mesh
1: show lattice boundary in gshow, 0: no
Region error checkNo geometry check
Check geometry and draw its two-dimensional view
with error information
Check geometry, draw its two-dimensional view,
and outputting a geometry error file (.err)

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT240

For example, you can obtain Fig. 6.9 by the [t-rshow] tally shown below from the example (6) in Sec. 4.6.4.
Example 57: [t-rshow] example[ T - rshow ]mesh = xyz
x-type = 2
nx = 100xmin = -10.
xmax = 10.
y-type = 1
ny = 1-5.0 5.0
z-type = 2
nz = 100zmin = -10.
zmax = 10.
axis = xz
output = 1
file = cell-example6-rshow.dat
epsout = 1
reg = (201<101[-1 1 0]<1) (201<101[0 1 0]<1) (201<101[1 1 0]<1)(201<101[-1 0 0]<1) (201<101[0 0 0]<1) (201<101[1 0 0]<1)(201<101[-1 -1 0]<1) (201<101[0 -1 0]<1) (201<101[1 -1 0]<1)
value
non
reg
val
# reg definition
1 1000001
1.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ -1 1 0 ] < 1 )2 1000002
2.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 0 1 0 ] < 1 )3 1000003
3.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 1 1 0 ] < 1 )4 1000004
4.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ -1 0 0 ] < 1 )5 1000005
5.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 0 0 0 ] < 1 )6 1000006
6.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 1 0 0 ] < 1 )7 1000007
7.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ -1 -1 0 ] < 1 )8 1000008
8.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 0 -1 0 ] < 1 )9 1000009
9.0000E+00 # ( 201 < 101[ 1 -1 0 ] < 1 )10Values5x [cm]

1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:

0

−5

−10
−10

−5

100

0
z [cm]

5

Figure 6.9: Example of [t-rshow].

10

6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section

241

6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section[ T - 3 D s h o w ] gives a graphical geometry output by 3 dimensional view. You can execute this tally with
icntl =11 option in the [parameters] section without transport calculations.
Table 6.48: [t-3dshow] parameter (1)nameoutput =

value
0
1
2
3 (default)(omissible)
all,number of materials

explanation
draft
only region boundary
without region boundary
region boundary + color
You can specify materials for display.
all : default (same as no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You can set number of materials by negative.
In the case, specified materials are not included
for display.

(next line)
x0 =
y0 =
z0 =
e-the =
e-phi =
e-dst =
l-the =
l-phi =
l-dst =
w-wdt =
w-hgt =
w-dst =

2 5 8
(D=0.0)(D=0.0)(D=0.0)(D=80)(D=140)(D=w-dst*10)(D=e-the)(D=e-phi)(D=e-dst)(D=100)(D=100)(D=200)w-mnw =
w-mnh =
w-ang =
heaven =mirror =(D=100)(D=100)(D=0.0)
(D=y)
(D=0)

material numbers
Coordinates of original point for view point
and light source. Center of screen is definedby this point and view pointview point angle θ(degree) with z axis
azimuthal angle for view point ϕ(degree) with x axis
distance between view point and the origin (cm)light source angle θ(degree) with z axis
azimuthal angle for light source ϕ(degree) with x axis
distance between light source and the origin (cm)width of screen frame (cm)height of screen frame(cm)screen frame distance from the origin (cm)A straight line drawn between the center of screen frame
and the origin crosses screen surface vertically,and passes through the view point.
number of mesh for horizontal direction
number of mesh for vertical direction
angle of frame (degree)
topside direction; set x, -x, y, -y, z, or -z=-1; mirror transformation in horizontal direction

material =6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

242

Polar
coordinates

Eye Point(e-the,e-phi,e-dst)

Picture Flame

Polar
Coordinates

Light source(l-the,l-phi,l-dst)
e-dst
w-dst
w-hgt
(w-mnh)w-wdt(w-mnw)

w-mnw 㽢 w-mnh 䠙 #Pixel
100 㽢 100 (default)

Origin (x0,y0,z0) XYZ-coordinates
Figure 6.10:
3dshow tally: origin (x0,y0,z0), eye point (e-the,e-phi,e-dst), light source(l-the,l-phi,l-dst), and picture flame (w-wdt,w-hgt,w-dst).

6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section

243

Table 6.49: [t-3dshow] parameter (2)nameline =value
0 (default), 1

r-out =

(D=50000)

shadow =bright =dark =
box =box
matinbox =(D=0)(D=0.8)(D=0.2)(D=0)
10 numbers(omissible)
all,number of materials(next line)
reginbox =258(omissible)
all,region numbers

resol =
width =
file =
title =
angel =
sangel =x-txt =
y-txt =
z-txt =
epsout =1 (default)
0.5 (default)
file name(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)(omissible)0 (default), 1

axishow =(D=1) 0, 1, 2

explanation
When output = 1, 3
0: material boundary + surface boundary
1: material boundary + surface boundary + region boundary
radius of outer void including view point,
and light source(cm)shadow level (0:no shadow, 2 is recommended)brightness limit (1:max, 0:no brightness)darkness limit (1:no darkness, 0:max)number of penetration box, maximum 5
box definition (see below)
materials in the box for display
all : default (same with no definition)
When you set number of materials,
define these material numbers in the next line.
You cannot set number of materials by negative.
material numbers
regions in the box for display
all : default (same with no definition)
If the matinbox is defined for this region,
this region is not displayed.
The resolution in displaying region lines is multiplied by this value.
The thickness of displayed region lines.
Define file names as same number of axis
title
angel parameters
sangel parameters
x axis title
y axis title
z axis title
If epsout is set to 1, results are plotted
into eps files. This eps file is namedby replacing the extension into “.eps”.
0: No.
1: Small axis is shown in the lower-left of a figure.
2: Large axis is shown in the center of a figure.

Definition rules for reg=, and reginbox = are the same as that for the region mesh in section 5.1.1.
For saving calculating time, an outer region defined by the radius r-out is introduced additionally. You haveto use a larger r-out value when you use large geometry, or you want to put the light source and view point far
away. This new definition of the outer region can be seen in input echo. Therefore, you cannot use an input echo
by icntl=11 as an input for next calculation.
Shadow is not created if the view point and light source are set same position.

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

244

6.21.1 box definition
Maximum 5 penetration boxes can be defined. Defined boxes become transparent. To define the box, you first
set three points as b0 (x0 ,y0 ,z0 ), b1 (x1 ,y1 ,z1 ), and b2 (x2 ,y2 ,z2 ). We define the 4-th point b3 from b0 by L cm on thevertical direction of the plane defined by these three points, i.e. ( b2 - b0 ) direction. In this box definition, you can
use the coordinate transformation as trcl = transform number or trcl = (........) before the definition of
the points.
This function may fail when a void region is included in the penetration box. In this case, please fill the void
region with a material of very low density, e.g. air.
The box definition is shown below. Each relations are also shown in Fig. 6.11.

box = 2box
x0 y0 z0x1 y1 z1x2 y2 z2 Lbox
trcl = 2x0 y0 z0x1 y1 z1x2 y2 z2 Lbox
*trcl = (0 0 0
0.0 0.0 0.0-5.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0 5.0

0 90 90

90 60 150

90 30 60

5.0

( x1 , y1 , z1 )( x3 , y3 , z3 )L

( x0 , y0 , z0 )( x2 , y2 , z2 )Figure 6.11: Example of box definition.

-1)6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section245

6.21.2 3dshow example
Example 58: [t-3dshow] example (1)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:

[cell]
1 0 -1 fill=1
2 0 -41 42 -43 44 -45 46 u=1 fill=5
22 0 -41 42 -43 44 -45 46 u=1 trcl=(0 0 20) fill=6
23 like 22 but trcl=(0 0 40) fill = 7
5 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=5 lat=1 fill=3
6 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=6 lat=1 fill= -1:1 0:0 0:0 2 2(0 0 5) 2
7 0 -21 22 -23 24 -25 26 u=7 fill= -1:1 0:0 0:0 2 3 2 lat=1
3 1 3.97300E-02 3 u=2
4 6 4.18280E-02 -3 u=2
13 5 8.47130E-04 -3 u=3
14 3 1.23620E-01 3 u=3
8 -1 +1[surface]1rpp -15 15 -5 5 -5 55
21
px
5
22
px
-5
23
py
5
24
py
-5
25
pz
15
26
pz
-5
41
px
15
42
px -15
43
py
5
44
py
-5
45
pz
15
46
pz
-5
5
rpp -20 20 -5 5 -5 35
6rpp -20 20 -5 5 -5 15
7rpp -20 20 -5 5 35 55
3c/y
0 10 4In above geometry, the whole body is rectangular solid, and it has rectangular solid lattices including cylinders
inside. You can make graphical plot for the geometry by the 3dshow as,

Example 59: [t-3dshow] example (2)
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:

[t-3dshow]
output = 3
heaven = x
resol = 2
width = 0.1
x0 = 0y0 = 0z0 = 25e-the = 70
e-phi = 50
e-dst = 1000
l-the = 50l-phi = 25
l-dst = 2000
w-wdt = 60
w-hgt = 40
w-dst = 150
file = dshow.dat

6 TALLY INPUT FORMAT

246

The output result is ,You can add region boundary by option line=1 as,

You can see how lattices are set up. Next, let material number 5 be transparent, and add shadows bymaterial = -1
5
shadow = 2

6.21 [ T-3Dshow ] section

Let’s define a box.
box = 1
box
0
100
0

10
10
10

30
30
100 100

The defined box part becomes transparent, and you can see inside of the body.

In the last example, add
reg = ( 3 < 6[0 0 0] )matinbox = 1
6

Regions defined by reg = (3 < 6[0 0 0] ) become transparent, and material number 6 becomes visible.

You can display any complex structures as you like combining with these options.

247

7 AUTOMATIC CALCULATION OF REGION VOLUME

248

7

Automatic calculation of region volume

When you set mesh=reg in tally sections, you have to give volumes of each cell to estimate results in the unitof (/volume). PHITS has a function of automatic calculation to obtain the volumes. The instruction how to use thisfunction is shown below.
In this function, PHITS calculates the volumes by performing a Monte Carlo integration with setting the material of each cell to be void and a special source region. When you use this function, set [t-volume] section
and icntl=14 in [parameters] section. An example of [t-volume] is as follows. For details of parameters of[t-volume], see Sec. 6.17.
Example 60: Example of [t-volume]
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

[ T - V o l u m e ]mesh = reg
reg = 101 102 103
file = volume.out
s-type =1x0 = 0.0
y0 = 0.0
z0 = 0.0
r0 = 50.0# mesh type is region-wise
104 105# file name of output for [volume]# 1: Sphere source, 2: Rectangular source# (D=0.0) x of sphere center# (D=0.0) y of sphere center# (D=0.0) z of sphere center# radius of sphere[t-volume] section should have the setting of mesh=reg. The cell numbers should be specified after reg=. By
setting s-type and the related parameters such as x0, you can define the special source region for the volume
calculation. Note that the source region should be set to cover all cells specified in reg=, otherwise the calculated
volumes would be wrong. On the contrary, if you set an extremely large source region, the statistical uncertainties
of the calculated results would be large. The obtained volumes are outputted in a file named by file=. The formatof the output file is as follows.
[ T - V o l u m e ] offmesh = reg
....
....
....
....
[ V o l u m e ]
non
reg
1
101
2
102
....
....

# mesh type is region-wise
....
....
....
....

vol
non
5.0370E+02 0.2909
2.4727E+03 0.1634
....
....
....
....
....
....

# Information for Restart Calculation
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....

Because the volumes are outputted in the format of [volume] section, the results can be used in the main calculation with icntl=0 by infl command. Here, values of the last column in [volume] are statistical uncertainties(relative values). If the uncertainties are large, you can perform the restart calculation by adding istdev=-1 or-2 in [parameters] section, because the output file of [t-volume] has information for the restart mode.

249

8

Processing dump file

You can write down the information on transport particles on dump file by [t-cross], [t-time], [t-product] tallies.
If you set the dump file as a source, you can calculate the sequential transport. Furthermore, you can get the
information which cannot be obtained by the tally functions in PH I TS by processing the dump file. To process thedump file, however, you need to make program to process the dump file. In the following, we show a program toprocess the dump file as an example of such program.
The following program is a simple program which converts the ascii dump file to binary dump file, and viceversa. The following simple program could help you to make a program to process the dump file. The source
program dump-a.f is attached in the holder “src” and the execute file dump a.exe in Windows system is include in
the holder “bin”.
File 3: dump-a.f
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
50:
51:
52:
53:
54:

***************************************************************************
This program exchanges the binary data and the ascii data**of dump file.
****modified by K.Niita on 2005/08/15
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
************************************************************************
implicit real*8 (a-h,o-z)*----------------------------------------------------------------------dimension isdmp(0:30)
dimension jsdmp(0:30)
data isdmp / 31*0 /data jsdmp / 31*0 /character chin*80
character chot*80
logical exex
character dmpc(30)*4
data dmpc / ’ kf’,’
x’,’
y’,’
z’,’
u’,’
v’,’
w’,
&
’
e’,’ wt’,’ tm’,’ c1’,’ c2’,’ c3’,&
’ sx’,’ sy’,’ sz’,’ n0’,’ nc’,’ nb’,’ no’,
&
’
’,’
’,’
’,’
’,’
’,’
’,
&
’
’,’
’,’
’,’
’/
dimension dmpd(30)dimension dmpp(30)data dmpp / 2112.,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
1.0,
&
100.,
1.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
&
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
1.0,
1.0,
1.0,
&
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
0.0,
&
0.0,
0.0,
0.0/
*----------------------------------------------------------------------in = 5
io = 6
id = 20
ia = 21iserr = 0*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
user program frag : 0 => no, 1 => with user program*----------------------------------------------------------------------iuser = 0*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read ascii or binary frag*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*) ’ ** 0 => read binary to ascii’
write(io,*) ’ ** 1 => read ascii to binary’read(in,*,end=993) iasb*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the name of input dump file*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** put the file name of input dump file’

250

55:
56:
57:
58:
59:
60:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
70:
71:
72:
73:
74:
75:
76:
77:
78:
79:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
86:
87:
88:
89:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:
109:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
117:
118:
119:
120:
121:
122:
123:
124:
125:

8 PROCESSING DUMP FILE

read(in,’(a80)’,end=998) chininquire( file = chin, exist = exex )if( exex .eqv. .false. ) thenwrite(io,*) ’ ** Error : the file does not exist’
goto 999
end ifif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenopen(id, file = chin,&
form=’unformatted’,status = ’old’ )else
open(id, file = chin,&
form=’formatted’,status = ’old’ )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the number of data and data sequence*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** put the number of data in a record’read(in,*,end=997) isdmp(0)write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** put the ID numbers of data in a record’read(in,*,end=996) ( isdmp(i), i = 1, isdmp(0) )do k = 1, isdmp(0)if( isdmp(k) .gt. 20 .or.
&
isdmp(k) .le. 0 ) goto 992
jsdmp(isdmp(k)) = k
end dowrite(io,*)write(io,’(’’ # dump data : ’’,30(a4))’)&( dmpc(isdmp(j)), j = 1, isdmp(0) )*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the name of output dump file*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** put the file name of output’read(in,’(a80)’,end=998) chotinquire( file = chot, exist = exex )if( exex .eqv. .true. ) thenwrite(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** Warning : the file already exists’write(io,*) ’ ** Do you want to overwrite ?’write(io,*) ’ ** Yes <= 0, No <= 1’read(in,*,end=995) iyes
if( iyes .ne. 0 ) goto 999
end ifif( iasb .eq. 0 .or. iuser .ne. 0 ) thenopen(ia, file = chot,&
form=’formatted’,status = ’unknown’ )else
open(ia, file = chot,&
form=’unformatted’,status = ’unknown’ )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
read the number of records to read*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** put the number of records to read’
write(io,*) ’ ** all <= 0, or positive integer’read(in,*,end=994) irec*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
start reading the data*----------------------------------------------------------------------write(io,*)write(io,*) ’ ** start read and write the data’*----------------------------------------------------------------------jrec = 0100
jrec = jrec + 1
if( irec .gt. 0 .and. jrec .gt. irec ) goto 500
687
continueif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenread(id,end=688,err=690)

251

126:
127:
128:
129:
130:
131:
132:
133:
134:
135:
136:
137:
138:
139:
140:
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
146:
147:
148:
149:
150:
151:
152:
153:
154:
155:
156:
157:
158:
159:
160:
161:
162:
163:
164:
165:
166:
167:
168:
169:
170:
171:
172:
173:
174:
175:
176:
177:
178:
179:
180:
181:
182:
183:
184:
185:
186:
187:
188:
189:
190:
191:
192:
193:
194:
195:
196:

&

( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )else
read(id,’(30(1p1d24.15))’,end=688,err=690)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )end ifgoto 689
688
if( irec .gt. 0 ) thenrewind id
goto 687
else
goto 500
end if690
continueiserr = iserr + 1
write(io,’(’’ ** Error in dump file no =’’,i5)’) iserrgoto 687
689
continue*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
user program here*----------------------------------------------------------------------if( iuser .ne. 0 ) thendo k = 1, 20
if( jsdmp(k) .gt. 0 ) dmpp(k) = dmpd(k)end dokf = nint( dmpp(1) )x = dmpp(2)y = dmpp(3)z = dmpp(4)u = dmpp(5)v = dmpp(6)w = dmpp(7)e = dmpp(8)wt = dmpp(9)t = dmpp(10)n1 = nint( dmpp(11) )n2 = nint( dmpp(12) )n3 = nint( dmpp(13) )sx = dmpp(14)sy = dmpp(15)sz = dmpp(16)n0 = nint( dmpp(17) )nc = nint( dmpp(18) )nb = nint( dmpp(19) )no = nint( dmpp(20) )end if*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
write data on the file*----------------------------------------------------------------------if( iuser .eq. 0 ) thenif( iasb .eq. 0 ) thenwrite(ia,’(30(1p1d24.15))’)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )else
write(ia)&( dmpd(isdmp(k)), k = 1, isdmp(0) )end ifend if*----------------------------------------------------------------------goto 100*----------------------------------------------------------------------*
end of process*----------------------------------------------------------------------500
continue
write(io,*) ’ ** end of read and write the data’write(io,’(’’ ** number of processed records is ’’,&i8)’) jrec-1
write(io,*)close( id )close( ia )goto 999*-----------------------------------------------------------------------

8 PROCESSING DUMP FILE

252

197:
198:
199:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
206:
207:
208:
209:
210:
211:
212:
213:
214:
215:
216:
217:
218:
219:
220:

992 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : ID should be 1 - 20’
goto 999
993 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : the ascii or binary frag is wrong’goto 999
994 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : the number of records is wrong’goto 999
995 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : the answer should be 0 or 1’
goto 999
996 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : the ID numbers is wrong’goto 999
997 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : the number of data is wrong’goto 999
998 continue
write(io,*) ’ ** Error : file name is wrong’goto 999
999 continue
stop
end

The input parameters are read from normal input, i.e. from console, in an interactive way. When you executethe program, it asks you as,** 0 => read binary to ascii** 1 => read ascii to binary

You put 0 for binary, 1 for ascii. Next it asks you the name of target dump file.
** put the file name of input dump file

You put the name of target dump file.
** put the number of data in a record

The program ask you the number of data in a record. You put positive number for both ascii and binary.
** put the ID numbers of data in a record

You put ID for the data. See kind of dump data and ID, in Tables 5.4, 5.5.
** put the file name of output

You put the file name of output. If the file already exists, the program asks you whether the file can be overwritten
or not.
Next, the program asks you how many records are processed.
** put the number of records to read** all <= 0, or positive integer

If this number is larger than total record number, the program turns back to the top of the data. Finally, the numberof records actually processed is shown.
When you make a program based on this program, you should change iuser to 1 at 35 line in File 3. Then the
program does not write the converted data on file. In this case, the output is written by ascii.
In 150-169 lines, there are variables “kf, x, y, z, u, v, w, e, wt, t, n1, n2, n3, sx, sy, sz, n0, nc, nb, no”. Herekf means the kf-code of the particles (see Table 3.4), x, y, z are coordinate (cm), u, v, w denote the unit vectorof the direction of the particle, e is the energy (MeV, or MeV/nucleon for nucleus), wt is the weight, time is theinitial time (ns), c1, c2, c3 are the values of counters, and sx, sy, sz are the unit vector of the direction of spin,
respectively. By using these variables, you can make a program to obtain desired quantities.

253

9

Output cutoﬀ data format

The information for neutron, photon, electron, positron, and proton below the cut oﬀ energy can be written in
the output file (file(12), file(13), and file(10)), in order to continue these transport calculation by other Monte Carlocodes such as MCNP and EGS4. The data are written in binary. The format is shown below.

rd, rn, ( data(i), i = 1, nint(abs(rd)) )rd, rn, ( data(i), i = 1, nint(abs(rd)) )................
................

First, in the case of incut = 1, and no importance option (rd<0)
rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), i = 1, n )................
................

Next, incut =1 with importance option (rd>0),
rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), i = 1, n )................
................

incut = 2 and no importance option (rd<0),
rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), t(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), t(i), i = 1, n )................
................

incut = 2 with importance option (rd>0),
rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), t(i), i = 1, n )rd, rn, x, y, z, ( e(i), u(i), v(i), w(i), wt(i), t(i), i = 1, n )................
................

where n = nint(rn), x, y, z is a coordinate (cm), e(i) is an energy (MeV), u(i), v(i), w(i) is an unit
vector of momentum, wt(i) is an weight, and t(i) is time (ns). In the case igcut =3, the particle identifier p(i)is written instead of t(i) in the case of incut =2.
p(i) = 3.0 is photon, p(i) = 4.0 is electron, and p(i) = 5.0 is positron.

10 REGION ERROR CHECK

254

10

Region error check

When you make a complex geometry, it is diﬃcult to set up the geometry without any mistakes such as double
defined and undefined regions. Thus, a function for automatically detecting double defined or undefined regions
was implemented after version 2.67. This geometry check function works when you specify a tally for generating
the two-dimensional view of your geometry; namely [t-gshow], [t-rshow], and other tallies with setting axis
= xy, yz, or xz and gshow (icntl=8) or rshow (icntl=10) options.
A parameter ginfo assigned to each tally controls this geometry check function; ginfo = 0 for no geometry
check, ginfo = 1 for checking geometry and drawing its two-dimensional view with error information (see Fig.
10.1), and ginfo = 2 for checking geometry, drawing its two-dimensional view, and outputting a geometry error
file that specifies the xyz coordinates of the error location. The default value of ginfo for tallies depicting thetwo-dimensional geometry is 2.
Figure 10.1 shows an example of the two-dimensional view with geometry errors. Double defined regions are
painted in black, and undefined regions are in purple. When undefined region is detected, its surrounding regions
may disappear from the figure.

Figure 10.1: Output including geometry errors.

When ginfo=2 and PHITS detects a geometry error, a geometry error file named “***.err” is outputted (***
indicates the original tally output file name without extension). In this file, the (x,y,z) coordinates together with theoverlapping cell numbers are written as follows:
Errors of cell definition in EPS Page No. =1
Overlapped Cell IDs x, y, z coodinates(Cells 0
0 indicate undefined region)
100
102-4.847761E+00 1.234568E-11 -1.211940E+00
00-4.241791E+00 -2.500000E+00 -8.079602E-01
The first line indicates that cell number 100 and 102 are overlapped at the point of x = -4.847761E+00, y =1.234568E-11, z = -1.211940E+00. The second line indicates that undefined region is detected at the point of x =-4.241791E+00, y = -2.500000E+00, z = -8.079602E-01.
You can easily find geometry errors using this geometry check function. It should be noted that this function
can detect geometry error only when the error occurs on the grid points of the xyz mesh of the tally. Thus,
geometry errors outside the tally region cannot be detected. Even in the tally region, a small error region may also
be undetected because the error region might not contain any grid point.

255

11

Additional explanation for parallel computing

There are two types of parallel computing: distributed-memory parallel computing using the MPI protocol, andthe shared-memory parallel computing using OpenMP architecture. Parallel PHITS calculation can be performed
using either of these methods, or by using a hybrid method. To execute distributed-memory parallel computing,the MPI protocol must be installed in the user’s computer; by contrast, there is no additional software required forshared-memory parallel computing. Each executable file must be generated according to the type of the parallel
computing employed: see Sec. 2.4 for details.
In distributed-memory parallel computing, jobs are distributed to each CPU core in batch units. When all jobs
assigned to each core are finished, the main core gathers their results. In this mode, all cores individually use
an amount of memory equivalent to that used in single processing; thus, the total RAM memory in the computer
system must be larger than the product of the memory used for single processing and the core number. As a result,
this type of parallel computing is not suitable for calculations requiring a large amount of memory, for instance,
calculations involving voxel phantoms.
In shared-memory parallel computing, jobs are distributed to each CPU core in the units of history. In thiscase, the cores share a large portion of the memories used by PHITS aside from those defined as “thread private”
variables. Thus, the memory required in this parallel computing mode is nearly the same as that required for single
processing. One disadvantage of shared parallel computing relative to memory-distributed computing is its slower
computational time as a result of the competition for access to shared memories. This disadvantage becomes very
important for calculations in which memories are frequently updated, such as those using the [t-sed] tally.

11.1 Distributed memory parallel computing
11.1.1 Execution
A PHITS calculation using distributed-memory parallel computing with the MPI-protocol can be executedusing the following command:
mpirun -np 8 phits_LinIfort_MPI.exe
where phits LinIfort MPI.exe indicates the PHITS-executable file name and the number of processing elements(PEs) is set following “-np.” This command can be sent using a parallel computing submission protocol such as“qsub,” in which case the name of the PHITS input file should be written in a text file named phits.in with thefirst line given as
file = input_file_namewhere “input file name” is the name of the PHITS input file. This rule is only eﬀective for distributed memory
parallel computing. file=phits.in can also be written in the first line, with the contents of the PHITS input fileadded following the second line of phits.in: please see Sec. 2.4 for further details.

11.1.2 Adjustment of maxcas and maxbch
In distributed-memory parallel computing, jobs are distributed to each CPU core in units of batch. Hence, thenumber of batches (maxbch) should be a multiple of PE−1 (one of the PEs is used for control). If not, PHITS willautomatically change maxbch to a multiple of PE−1 and adjust the number of histories per batch, maxcas, to makethe total history number equivalent to the value set in the input file. In this case, relevant comments will be output
at the end of the input echo.
In restart mode (istdev<0), adjustment of maxcas is not performed, as this value should be set to the samevalue as was written in past tally results.

11.1.3 Treatment of abnormal ending
When PHITS stops as the result of an abnormal end in a PE, the PE is removed from the operation and a total
result by remaining PE is given as the final result. In this case, the user should check the ncut file, which will beincomplete.

11 ADDITIONAL EXPLANATION FOR PARALLEL COMPUTING

256

11.1.4 ncut, gcut, pcut, and dumpall file definition in PHITS
For the parallel calculation, ncut, gcut, and pcut can be defined normally in an input file asfile(12) = temp/ncut.dat
In 1 PE calculation, the specified ncut.dat is written normally; in multi PE calculation, however, ncut.dat is
written separately in each node as/wk/j9999/temp/ncut.dat
where “j9999” is the user-name, which is read-in automatically from the environmental variable “LOGNAME.”
By default, the user-name is placed in the “LOGNAME” in a UNIX system.
Before parallel calculation, a “j9999” directory should be created under the “/wk” directory for each node.
To create an ncut file in a directory not named using the user-name, the environmental variable “LOGNAME”
should be changed before parallel calculation. In the case, the user should confirm the existence of the directorythat they specified under “/wk.”
inpara, igpara, and ippara are used as writing options. By default, they each have values of zero: resetting the value= 1 gives the output files IP numbers as follows:
inpara, igpara, and ippara are prepared for writing options. By default, they have zero value. If you givevalue 1, output files are given IP numbers as/wk/j9999/temp/ncut.dat.005
where 005 is the IP number.
Setting inpara, igpara, or ippara=3 averts addition of the default file path/wk/j9999/
In each case, setting the value= 3 places the IP number at the end of the file, as in the case = 1.

11.1.5 Read-in file definition in PHITS
The read-in files used in PHITS are Decay-Turtle source files. Although these files generally have only a small
eﬀect on network traﬃc, they can occasionally reach sizes as large as 100 MB and, if there is a read-in for every
event, their eﬀect to network traﬃc can increase. Thus, the Decay-Turtle data file should be copied and placed ineach PE as /wk/j9999/turtle/sours.dat and then defined as file=/wk/j9999/turtle/sours.dat in the
PHITS input.

11.2 Shared-memory parallel computing
11.2.1 Execution
Except when Linux or PHITS is directly specified by a command input, PHITS calculation using sharedmemory parallel computing can be executed by adding “$OMP=N” (N is the number of CPU cores to be used) before
the first section in a PHITS input file. When N = 0, all cores in the computer are used. If N = 1 is set, the parallel
computing is not used. From version 2.73, the installed executable file of the OpenMP version is available only on
64-bit Windows systems. Note that the function of $OMP is available only for using phits.bat(on Windows OS)or phits.sh(on Mac OS).
In the case when Linux or PHITS is directly specified by a command input, PHITS with shared-memory
parallel computing can be executed using the following command:
phits_LinIfort_OMP.exe < phits.inp
where phits LinIfort OMP.exe indicates a PHITS-executable file compiled using the OpenMP option and “phits.inp”
is the PHITS input file. Any name can be used for the PHITS input file, as the file name restriction to phits.in is
not valid in this case. To specify the number of cores to be used for parallel computing, the environment variable“OMP NUM THREADS” should be defined. Note that this variable should be set to equal the real number ofCPU-cores, not the number of total threadds, when using hyper-threading technology, as parallel computing using
this technology does not work in PHITS calculation. The environment variable can be changed as follows:

11.2 Shared-memory parallel computing

257

export OMP_NUM_THREADS=8Note that in hybrid parallel computing the environment variables need to be set individually on each node.
From version 2.73, the installed executable OpenMP version file is available only for 64-bit Windows systems,
as an error owing to heap memory shortage sometimes occurred on Windows OS when the executable file of the
OpenMP version for 32-bit was used with many cores. However, this error is avoided by using the executable filefor 64-bit Windows.

11.2.2 Important notices for shared-memory parallel computing
Using only one core for memory-shared parallel computing in PHITS takes approximately twice as much time
as is needed for single processing. Therefore, it is useless to select memory-shared parallel computing mode for acomputer with only one or two cores.
Runtime execution of ANGEL from PHITS by setting epsout≥1 is still inapplicable in shared-memory parallel computing (this is only possible for Intel Fortran-compiled PHITS on Windows). To avoid this problem,
the PHITS-executable file for memory-shared parallel computing contained in the current PHITS package wascompiled by replacing a-angel.f by a-angel-winopenmp.f, which outputs the file names specified by tallies
with epsout≥1 into angel-temporary.inp. phits.bat then automatically executes this stand-alone version of
ANGEL angel.bat using angel-temporary.inp as the input file. Note that even with itall=1, the eps file is
not automatically updated when each batch finished.
Segmentation errors occur in executing memory-shared parallel computing PHITS on Linux may be caused by
the overuse of the stack memory; in this case, the stack size must be increased using the following command:
export OMP_STACKSIZE=1G
which sets the stack size to 1 GB.
In principle, the results obtained from single processing and shared-memory parallel computing should be thesame. Thus, the user should inform us (phits-oﬃce) if inconsistencies are found between the results obtained bythese two modes, as these may represent bugs in the programming.

12 FAQ

258

12

FAQ

12.1 Questions related to parameter setting
Q1.1 Input file that works before ver. 2.88 does not work after that version.
A1.1 Several revisions were made in terms of the input file format after ver. 2.89 to avoid frequently-occurring
mistakes. In general, it is not necessary to change input file when PHITS is updated, but in some cases, it isnecessary. If you encounter an error after the update, please check the following points.
(1) After ver. 2.89, c cannot be used as a comment remark in [material] section in the default setting. You have to change the comment remarks c in [material] to $ or #, or set icommat=1 in[parameters].
(2) After ver. 2.93, low energy neutrons are transported using nuclear data library in the default setting.
Thus, you may encounter an error “There is no cross section table(s) in xsdir” even when you want
to transport only photon and electrons. In that case, you have to set nucdata=0 in [parameter] todisable the use of nuclear data library.
(3) After ver. 2.96, it is not allowed to define two or more [parameter] sections in an input file.
(4) After ver. 2.96, unnecessary tallies are automatically disabled, depending on the icntl parameter.
Consequently, set and infl commands are ignored when they are written in the disabled sections.
When set or infl commands are ignored, PHITS outputs warning.
Q1.2 Electrons and positrons are not transported.
A1.2 Transport of electrons and positrons are ignored in the default setting because they are time consuming. If
you want to transport them, you have to activate EGS5 mode by setting negs=1 in [parameters].
Q1.3 What is the setting of nuclear reaction models giving the most accurate result?
A1.3 In general, the default models give the best results in most cases. However, it is desirable to activate RQMD
(irqmd=1) for precisely simulating nucleon-nucleon interactions, and SMM (ismm=1) for precisely estimating the residual nuclide yields after high-energy nuclear reactions, though they are time consumptive.
Q1.4 What kind of simulation does event-generator mode suit for?
A1.4 Event generator mode suits simulations by which the event-by-event information is necessary to be obtained, e.g. detector response calculations and design of semi-conductor devices. It is also useful for thesimulation that must determine energy and type of charged particles produced by low-energy neutron interactions. In concrete, event generator mode generally suits does the simulations using [T-Deposit],[T-LET], [T-SED], [T-Yield] and/or [T-Product] tallies. On the other hand, it is not suit for the simulations only using [T-Track] and/or [T-Cross] tallies, such as shielding calculation. See “4.2.22 Event
Generator Mode” section in more detail.
Q1.5 When should I change the mode for the statistical uncertainty (the setting of istdev)？
A1.5 We generally recommend the history variance mode (istdev=abs(2)), where the statistical uncertainty
depends on the total history number (maxcas*maxbch), except for the case of shared-memory parallel computing, where only the batch the batch variance mode (istdev=abs(2)) can be selected. However, thecomputational time occasionally becomes extremely long in the history variance mode, especially in thecase of tallies using a lot of memories, e.g. xyz mesh tally with very fine structure. When you perform the
PHITS calculation with such conditions, please change to the batch variance mode and set maxbch to be
more than 10.
Q1.6 Is it possible to use nuclear data libraries other than JENDL-4.0?
A1.6 Yes. PHITS can use nuclear data libraries that are written in the ACE format, i.e. MCNP format. The
followings are the instruction how to use a new nuclear data library in PHITS.
(1) Open xsdir contained in the package of the new nuclear data library with a text editor, and copy
all addresses of nuclear data (e.g. 1001.80c 0.999167 xdata/endf71x/H/1001.710nc 0 1 4 17969 0 02.5301E-08)

12.2 Questions related to error occurred in compiling or executing PHITS(2) Open xsdir.jnd included in theaddresses at the end of the file.

data

259

folder of PHITS with a text editor, and paste the copied(3) Creating a new folder with appropriate name written in the address file in theand copy data files of the new nuclear data library to the created folder.

XS

folder of PHITS,(4) Explicitly specify the library ID in the [material] section of your PHITS input file (e.g. 1H.80c or
1001.80c for the above example). If you do not specify the library ID, PHITS automatically find thedata library of the nucleus earlier written in xsdir.jnd . Thus, JENDL-4.0 is selected when the data
for the nucleus is available.
Q1.7 How can I obtain neutron fluxes emitted from photonuclear reactions with a good statistical uncertainty?
A1.7 You can bias the photonuclear cross section using the pnimul parameter. For example, the probability tocause photo-nuclear reaction becomes double when you set pnimul=2.0, and the weights of secondary
particles emitted from the photonuclear reaction are 0.5. If you set very high value for pnimul, e.g. above
100.0, the photon fluxes might be changed. Thus, please check whether the photon fluxes does not changevery much when you use this parameter.
Q1.8 I cannot restart PHITS simulation due to error related to the inconsistency of tally. Why?
A1.8 It is due to the loss of significant digit in the PHITS input file. In that case, you have to set ireschk = 1,
then PHITS skips the consistency check.

12.2 Questions related to error occurred in compiling or executing PHITS
Q2.1 I got an error in compiling PHITS. How can I compile PHITS ?
A2.1 PHITS can be compiled by Intel Fortran 11.1 (or later) or gfortran 4.7 (or later). However, Windows gfortran
4.9 - 5.4 cannot compile PHITS properly. The recommended compiler is Intel Fortran because PHITS
compiled by Intel Fortran is much faster than that by gfortran. See “2.4 Compilation using make commandfor Windows, Mac, and Linux” section in more detail.
Q2.2 Segmentation fault occurred during the execution of PHITS.
A2.2 It might be due to the overflow of the memory used in PHITS. In that case, you have to increase the maximum
size of memory acceptable to PHITS. The maximum size is defined as mdas parameter in param.inc in thesrc directory. Thus, you have to increase this number, and re-compile PHITS. You may also have to increaselatmax parameter if you would like to use a huge lattice structure such as voxel phantom. See Manual “2.9Array sizes” in more detail.
Q2.3 An error occurred when I try to use infl: in my PHITS input file.
A2.3 When infl: command is used in your PHITS input file (let name input.dat), you have to type file =input.dat at the first line of input.dat file. Or you have to make another input file (let name phits.in)
whose first line is file = input.dat, and use phits.in as the input file of the PHITS. For example
phits_c.exe < phits.in > output.dat
See Manual “2.7 Executable file” section in more detail.
Q2.4 An error occurred when I try to execute PHITS on Linux or Unix console, but I can execute it on Windows
using the same input file.
A2.4 Many reasons are considered to cause the error, but the most probable one is the diﬀerence of “returncode” used in Linux (or Unix) and Windows. If you prepare your input file in your Windows computer, andtransfer to your Linux (or Unix) system using FTP software, you have to check the status of transfer mode;
i.e. you have to select “ASCII mode” in your FTP software.
Q2.5 Can PHITS be executed on Cygwin?
A2.5 Yes, you can. You can find the Cygwin option in “makefile” of PHITS.
Q2.6 Which is suitable for compiling PHITS, Intel fortran or gfortran?

260

12 FAQ

A2.6 We basically recommend Intel fortran compiler because it can make a faster executable file of PHITS than
gfortran. When you use gfortran, you had better set “-O0”, namely NOT use optimization options, because
there is a possibility that the executable file with the optimization doesn’t work correctly. Therefore, theexecutable file compiled by Intel fortran is averagely 3-5 times as fast as that by gfortran. Furthermore, there
is a problem that gfortran of the latest version cannot compile PHITS (see A2.1). Note that Intel fortrancompiler is not a free-ware (also Linux version).
Q2.7 How should I set the distributed memory parallel computing (MPI) or the shared memory parallel computing(OpenMP) depending on the situation?
A2.7 The calculation using MPI is basically faster than that using OpenMP, if the MPI protocol is installed in thecomputer. However, because the protocol is not installed in usual computers of Windows and Mac OS in
the default setting, we recommend the use of the executable file with OpenMP. If you want to perform the
PHITS calculation using a huge memory such as high energy files of nuclear data and voxel phantom, youhave to use the setting of a hybrid MPI-OpenMP, because there is a possibility of a memory shortage of thecomputer in the case using MPI only. In the hybrid setting, you should increase the number of MPI processes
as much as the used memory is not over the capacity of the computer. Note that PHITS uses CPU cores of
the number of OpenMP processes to control the MPI processes. For example, when you use a computer
having 128 CPU cores and set the number of the OpenMP processes to 8, you can specify the maximum
number of the MPI processes is 128/8 − 1 = 15.
Q2.8 I got so many lost particles when I rotate a lattice structure by [transform].
A2.8 The size of outer frame surface should be smaller than the lattice structure inside it, otherwise you may
observe many lost particle. Please see \phits\lecture\advanced\voxel\ in more detail.

12.3 Questions related to Tally
Q3.1 What is the diﬀerence between [t-heat] and [t-deposit] tallies?
A3.1 The two tallies give basically the same values of deposition energies as each other. However, the [t-heat]tally can also give the deposition energy estimated by the Kerma approximation for neutrons and photons.
When you use this approximation, set e-mode=0 in [parameters] section and electron=0 in [t-heat]section for neutrons and photons, respectively. The [t-deposit] tally is useful for calculating depositionenergy weighted by user defined function, such as Q(L) relationship for calculating dose equivalent. See
Manual “6.5 [t-deposit]” section in more detail.
Q3.2 The track length or fluence of heavy ions calculated by [t-track] or [t-cross] is strange.
A3.2 It might be due to the miss-define of the energy mesh in the tally section. The energy of heavy ions should
be defined in MeV in the tally section, although it should be written in MeV/u in the [Parameters] section.
Q3.3 Results obtained by [T-LET] and/or [T-SED] tally are strange.
A3.3 You have to check the density of material selected by letmat. If you select the material that is not usedin your geometry, you have to define its absolute atomic densities (1H 6.893407e-2 16O 3.446704e-2) in[Material] section. In addition, if you set a very fine mesh (more than 10 meshes per decade) in [t-let],the results might have zigzag structure. In that case, you have to widen the LET mesh.
Q3.4 How can we estimate the statistical uncertainty from the tally output?
A3.4 Version 2.50 or later, the standard deviations or standard errors are correctly outputted in the tally results.
See “4.2.2 Number of history and bank”section in detail.
Q3.5 Can I use “dump”function when I execute PHITS in the distributed memory parallel computing?
A3.5 From version 2.30, it works. Please ask PHITS oﬃce about its detailed usage.
Q3.6 Tally results in a box obtained using ”mesh=reg” and ”mesh=xyz” are inconsistent with each other.
A3.6 PHITS automatically calculate the volume of tally regions only in the cases of mesh = xyz or r-z. Thus, if
you set ”mesh = reg” and you do not specify [volume] section, the volume of the tally region is assumed tobe 1 cm3 .
Q3.7 Why do some events deposit energies greater than the incident energy using [t-deposit] with ”output=deposit”
option.

12.4 Questions related to source generation

261

A3.7 When exothermic nuclear reaction occurs, the total energy of secondary particles becomes greater than theincident energy. Such events are also observed when mesh = xyz or r-z and nedisp,0. This is due to thealgorithm for considering the energy straggling of charged particle in PHITS. In that case, you have to setmesh = reg in [t-deposit], and define cells that correspond to each xyz or r-z mesh in [cell] section.

12.4 Questions related to source generation
Q4.1 How can we normalize PHITS outputs when I use the isotropic source (s-type=9 with dir = -all)?
A4.1 If there is nothing inside the sphere of the isotropic source, the fluence inside the sphere is normalized to
1/π/r12 (/source), where r1 is the radius of the sphere. Thus, if you would like to convert the tally output(/source) to the unit fluence, you have to multiply the result with πr12 . It should be noted that the weightcontrol method is employed in generating the isotropic source, and thus, the event-by-event information
cannot be derived from the simulation using the isotropic source. If you would like to obtain event-by-event
information for isotropic irradiation, you have to set dir = iso in the [source] section. You have to
update PHITS if you want to use this function.
Q4.2 Source particle does not created in the cell where it should be.
A4.2 If you set the source generating surface (or point) exactly on the surface of a certain cell, PHITS sometimes
miss-identify the cell where it should be. In this case, please move the source surface a little bit diﬀerent
from the cell surface.

Index<source>, 60, 87∆ angular distribution, 38
δ-ray, 3, 39
γ decay, 36[Weight Window], 35, 227[cell], 9, 22, 23, 101, 104, 105, 110, 118–121, 123–129,
131, 134, 147, 148, 155, 224[counter], 1, 3, 5, 22, 158, 174[data max], 4, 22, 143[delta ray], 1, 11, 22, 139[delta-ray], 6[elastic option], 22, 40, 142[electro magnetic field], 22, 61, 138[end], 23, 24[forced collisions], 22, 152[frag data], 4, 22, 144[importance], 22, 45, 147[magnetic field], 22, 61, 136, 138[mat name color], 22, 44[mat time change], 22, 135[material], 3, 4, 9, 22, 44, 49, 101, 103, 118, 121, 123–
129, 131, 155, 223, 224, 258[matnamecolor], 155[multiplier], 11, 22, 154, 181, 185, 186, 190[parameters], 1–7, 14, 20, 22, 29, 87, 101, 130, 136,
138, 140, 143, 144, 149, 150, 152, 155, 176,
180, 185, 189, 193, 197, 200, 202, 203, 207,
210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 224, 227–229, 232,
248, 258[reg name], 22, 157[source], 4, 6, 8–10, 22, 37, 59, 136, 138, 223, 232[super mirror], 22, 141[surface], 22, 23, 55, 104, 118–121, 123–129, 131, 234[t-3dshow], 4, 23, 29, 157, 161, 241[t-cross], 1–3, 9, 11, 23, 43, 72, 161, 172, 182[t-dchain], 1, 3, 4, 6, 10, 11, 21, 23, 161, 223[t-deposit2], 23, 31, 102, 161, 199[t-deposit], 1, 3, 5, 6, 9, 23, 31, 102, 140, 161, 194, 214[t-dpa], 3, 6, 23, 161, 208[t-gshow], 23, 29, 124, 125, 157, 161, 172, 237, 238[t-heat], 6, 9, 23, 161, 191, 194, 214[t-let], 1, 23, 102, 161, 211, 214, 260[t-point], 5, 23, 43, 161, 188, 190[t-product], 3, 9, 11, 23, 29, 43, 71, 72, 161[t-rshow], 23, 29, 157, 161, 173, 239, 240[t-sed], 1, 23, 102, 139, 161, 214, 255[t-star], 3, 5, 23, 43, 161, 220[t-time], 9, 11, 23, 43, 72, 161, 217[t-track], 2, 6, 11, 23, 43, 140, 154, 161, 178, 181, 182,
185, 223[t-userdefined], 1, 23, 161, 233[t-volume], 3, 23, 29, 161, 232, 248[t-wwbg], 2, 23, 29, 149, 161, 229[t-wwg], 4, 23, 149, 161, 227[t-yield], 5, 7, 23, 36, 161, 169, 201, 204, 223[temperature], 22, 134[timer], 22, 160, 194, 199[title], 22, 28[track structure], 22, 140[transform], 22, 104, 106, 119, 126, 132, 133[volume], 22, 45, 153, 163, 224, 227, 248[weight window], 2, 4, 22, 35, 148, 149, 161, 194, 199,
229
[ww bias], 2, 22, 29, 35, 149, 161, 229
2d-type, 171, 172, 179, 184, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207,
210, 212, 215, 217, 222
3dshow, 174
a-curr, 184
a-type, 8, 9, 61, 63–65, 70, 72, 75, 90, 91, 165, 178,
183, 185
abnormal end, 255
abort, 20
absorption, 37, 222
actlow, 88
ag1, 91ag2, 91
all, 61, 70, 143, 150, 154, 179, 181, 183, 186, 188, 190,
191, 194, 201, 204, 210, 211, 215, 217, 220,
222, 227, 230, 232amp, 224
andit, 38
ANGEL, 1, 20, 31, 173
angel, 2, 179, 184, 188, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207, 210,
212, 215, 217, 222, 227, 230, 237–240, 243
AN GE L , 239, 257
ANGEL, 170, 172, 173
ANGEL parameter, 170angle, 183angle mesh, 165
angle straggling, 39
angular straggling, 2area, 187
ascat1, 39
ascat2, 3, 39
ASCII, 45
ATIMA, 4, 5, 39
Auger electron, 2, 88
automatic calculation of region volume, 23, 29, 161, 248
axis, 1, 3, 7, 31, 36, 168, 169, 171, 173, 179, 180, 183,
184, 188, 191, 195, 199, 200, 202, 204, 207,
208, 210, 212, 215, 217, 219, 220, 222, 227,
230, 237–240
axishow, 243b-curr, 184
Baba, 36bank, 30

262

INDEX

batch, 20, 30, 44, 173, 255
batch.out, 4, 20, 48
becquerel, 87
Bertini, 33, 36, 38
binary, 45, 46
Bitmap, 4
blank, 22–25, 162
bmpout, 180, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 219, 222, 237,
239
bnum, 50
Boolean operator, 118–120
BOX, 106, 124, 125, 127–129
Bragg scattering, 40
bremsstrahlung, 50

263

cutoﬀ, 3, 217
CX, 105
CY, 105, 123, 126–128
CZ, 105

datapath, 14dbcutoﬀ, 39dchain, 7, 36, 168, 202
DCHAIN-SP, 1, 48
decay, 207, 217, 222
decay-turtle, 59, 67, 256
DECDC, 4, 48, 87
dedxfnc, 194
dedxfnc1, 199
dedxfnc2, 199deg, 179
C/X, 105
delayed neutron, 49
C/Y, 105
delt0, 39, 47
C/Z, 105delta-ray, 10, 11, 22, 139, 214
cdiam, 215
deltb, 47
cell definition, 118–120, 124, 125deltc, 7, 47
cell number, 118, 149, 161, 162deltg, 47
cell parameter, 118, 119, 122, 125, 126
deltm, 7, 44, 47, 136, 138
chard, 52deltt, 47
charge, 168, 202den, 103
chart, 36, 168, 202density, 9, 118
cluster plot, 172
deposit, 6, 31, 193, 195
cmin(i), 32
deposit energy, 214
cmkm, 171dfano, 197
cmmm, 171
dipole electromagnet, 136
cmmt, 171
dir, 1, 61, 63–70, 72, 75, 232
cmnm, 2, 171
direction cosine, 67
cmum, 171
distributed memory parallel computing, 233
color, 135, 155
distributed-memory parallel computing, 30, 255
color plot, 172
dl0, 98
comment mark, 23, 24, 101, 104, 118, 132
dl1, 98
compilation, 14, 18–20
dl2, 98
compile, 59
dmax, 143
composition ratio, 101dmax(12), 34, 37, 51
compound, 101dmax(13), 34, 51
COND, 102dmax(14), 34, 51
contour, 172dmax(2), 2, 34, 204
coordinate transform number, 104, 126dmax(i), 10, 32, 201cos, 168, 183, 204
dmpmulti, 73
cosine, 63–65, 67, 132dnb, 49
Coulomb diﬀusion, 39
dom, 61, 63–65, 68–70, 72, 98
counter, 74, 174, 175, 188, 228dose, 195
cpu time, 45
ctmax, 174, 180, 185, 188, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207, 210, DPA, 3, 11dpa, 208, 210
213, 216, 219, 222, 228
ctmin, 174, 180, 185, 188, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207, 210, dpf, 98
213, 216, 219, 222, 228
drd, 98
Cugnon, 36
DRES, 36
current, 182, 184
dresol, 197
cut oﬀ energy, 10, 253
dtime, 87
cut-oﬀ energy, 32, 37, 43, 48
duct source, 98
cut-oﬀ time, 35
dump, 9, 11, 59, 72, 74, 75, 175, 185, 207, 219, 249
cut-oﬀ weight, 35
dumpall, 9, 11, 29, 45, 48, 54, 185

264

DWBA, 9, 38
dxw, 98
dyw, 98

INDEX

energy straggling, 39
eng, 7, 148, 149, 168, 179, 183, 188, 204, 217, 220, 227
eng-t, 168, 194
eng1, 199
e-dst, 241
eng2, 199
e-mode, 7, 8, 40, 58, 188, 191, 194, 201, 204, 208, 223 ENSDF, 10
e-phi, 241enum, 50
e-the, 241
eps, 20, 173, 180, 184, 188, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207,
e-tyep, 78
210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 228, 230, 237, 239
e-type, 2, 4, 9, 59, 72, 75, 79, 81–83, 85, 86, 164–167, epsout, 3, 173, 180, 184, 188, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207,
178, 183, 185, 188, 194, 204, 217, 220, 227,
210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 228, 230, 237, 239,
230
243, 257
e0, 2, 59, 63–70, 72, 75, 78
epstfl, 52
e1-t, 168, 199
eqmdnu, 33
e1-type, 199
escape, 217
e12, 168, 199
esmax, 5, 32
e2-t, 168, 199
esmin, 5, 32
e2-type, 199
ESTEP, 102e21, 168, 199
et0, 85
EBITEM, 10, 36, 202
et1, 85
EEDL, 11et2, 85eg0, 85
etsmax, 32, 140eg1, 85, 86
etsmin, 32, 140eg2, 85, 86
evaporation, 36
eg3, 85, 86
event generator mode, 40
EGS5, 2, 3, 5–8, 32, 34, 48, 51, 101, 136, 138, 140, 220 exa, 69
eielfmax, 33
Excel, 172
eielfmin, 33
execution, 14, 15
einclmax, 33
einclmin, 33
f-curr, 184eisobar, 33
f-mesh, 230
ejamnu, 33
factor, 61, 73, 170, 179, 184, 188, 193, 195, 200, 202,
ejampi, 33
207, 210, 212, 215, 217, 222, 227
ejamqmd, 2, 33
FAQ, 258
elastic, 5, 222fcl, 152
elastic scattering, 36, 49
file, 31, 72, 169, 179, 184, 188, 191, 195, 200, 202, 207,
208, 212, 215, 217, 222, 224, 227, 230, 232,
electromagnetic field, 37
233, 237–240, 243, 248
electron, 191, 193
File including, 24, 101
element, 101
file(1), 2, 34, 48
Element file, 130
file(10), 48
element symbol, 101
file(11), 48
elf, 138
file(12), 48
ELIB, 101, 102
file(13), 48
ELL, 11, 106
file(14), 48
emax, 154, 181, 185, 186, 190
file(15), 45, 48
emcnf, 49
file(18), 46, 48
emcpf, 50
file(2), 48
emin(12), 34, 50, 51, 140
file(20), 8, 34, 48
emin(13), 34, 50, 51, 140
file(21), 48
emin(14), 34, 51
file(22), 4, 21, 48
emin(2), 2, 34
file(23), 48
emin(i), 32, 211file(24), 48, 87
emumax, 37
file(25), 48
emumin, 37
file(3), 48
energy cut oﬀ, 217
energy mesh, 164, 178, 183, 188, 204, 217, 220, 227, file(4), 48
230
file(6), 40, 44, 45, 48, 101, 143, 155, 232

INDEX

file(7), 14, 34, 48, 101
FILL, 118, 119, 123–125, 127–129, 131fiss, 5fission, 207, 222
flight mesh, 47
fluence, 178, 182
flux, 182, 184
forced collisions, 35
Fortran, 14, 19, 25, 171, 257
gap, 136
GAS, 102
gcut, 43, 191, 256
GEM, 36
GG, 22, 45, 134, 147, 148, 152, 153, 161, 163
GG(General Geometry), 118
ghostview, 173
giant-dipole resonance, 2
ginfo, 179, 184, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 213, 216, 219,
222, 228, 230, 237, 239, 254
GQ, 105
gravity, 40
gravx, 40
gravy, 40
gravz, 40
groups, 165
gshow, 29, 157, 172, 174, 179, 184, 193, 197, 202, 207,
210, 213, 216, 219, 222
gslat, 180, 185, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 213, 216, 219,
222, 228, 237, 239
Hashimoto’s formula, 38
heat, 191
heaven, 241
heavyion, 222
HEX, 106
HLIB, 101, 102
HSB, 155
iaprim, 53
iauger, 52
iaugers, 88
ibad, 50
ibod, 23
ibound, 53
ibrdst, 53
icntl, 2, 29, 45, 48, 49, 149, 176, 229, 232, 237, 248,
258
icommat, 3, 49, 258
icput, 45
icrdm, 5, 38
icrhi, 38, 145
ICRU Report, 214
icxsni, 38, 145
icxspi, 5, 38
idam(i), 49
idbg, 23

265

idelt, 7, 47
ides, 2, 50
idmpmode, 73, 185
idpara, 45
idwba, 38
iechrl, 180, 193, 197, 200, 207, 210, 213, 216, 219, 222,
239
iedgfl, 52
iegsout, 51
iegsrand, 51
ieispl, 53
ielas, 36
ielctf, 37, 138
ieleh, 37ielms, 36
igamma, 2, 8, 36, 48, 202
igchk, 47
igcut, 43, 191
igerr, 47
iggcm, 45
Ignatyuk, 36
igpara, 43, 256
ih2o, 39
iidfs, 38
imagnf, 37, 47, 136
iMeVperu, 1, 43
imout, 44
impacr, 53
implicit capture, 35
importance, 35, 45, 147
imsegs, 7, 51
imubrm, 37
imucap, 37
imuint, 37
imuppd, 37
INC-ELF, 11, 33
incelf, 33
INCL, 7, 10, 11, 33
inclg, 33
include files, 21
incohr, 53
incut, 43, 191, 253
infl, 1, 2, 5, 20, 24, 171, 248, 258
info, 170, 202
infout, 9, 40
inmed, 36
inner void, 118
inpara, 43, 256
input echo, 29, 35, 44, 45, 150
installation, 14, 15
installation folder, 48Intel Fortran, 7interpolation, 154
inucr, 49
ionization potential, 39
ipara, 45
ipcut, 43, 191

INDEX

266

ipegs, 7, 51
iphot, 50
iphter, 53
ipngdr, 37
ipnint, 7, 37, 51
ipout, 45
ippara, 43, 256
iprdst, 53
ipreeq, 36
iprofr, 53
iprtb2, 224
iraylr, 52
ireschk, 30, 227, 259
irlet, 1, 3, 39
irqmd, 9, 33, 258
irskip, 30
isaba, 49
iscorr, 60
ismm, 36, 258
iso, 1
isobar, 36
ispfs, 3, 62
istdev, 10, 30, 195, 248, 255
istrg, 50
isumtally, 176
itall, 2, 20, 44, 180, 185, 189, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207,
210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 224, 228, 232, 257
itetra, 46
itetvol, 46
itstep, 44, 136, 138
ityp, 150
iunr, 49
iunrst, 52
ivout, 45
ivoxel, 46, 48, 130
iwwbias, 35, 149, 229
izst, 61, 136, 138
JAM, 8, 10, 33
JAMQMD, 2, 3, 5, 8, 33
JAMQMD2, 2
JENDL, 11
JENDL-4.0, 2, 34, 101
jmout, 44
JQMD, 2, 9, 36
JQMD-2.0, 6, 9, 33
K/X, 105
K/Y, 105
K/Z, 105
Kerma, 33
kf code, 168
kf-code, 26
kmout, 44, 101
KUROTAMA, 1, 8, 11, 38
KX, 105
KY, 105

KZ, 105
l-dst, 241l-phi, 241l-the, 241
l-type, 211
Landau, 39
LAT, 46, 118, 119, 123–125, 127–129, 131, 237
LaTeX, 155, 157
lattice, 10, 61, 119, 123–125, 127–129, 134, 136, 139,
147, 148, 150, 152, 153, 158, 160, 162, 163,
187
lattice coordinate system, 124, 125, 127–129, 162, 163let, 168, 194, 199, 212
letmat, 102, 194, 211, 215
letmat1, 199
letmat2, 199
level, 36level density, 36level structure, 163
library, 29, 32, 101, 102, 220
LIKE n BUT, 125, 126
LIKE n BUT, 118, 125line, 241line connection, 166
lineal energy, 214
Linux, 14, 256
little, 125
lost particle, 47
lpolar, 52
Lynch’s formula, 39
Mac, 14, 15, 256
macro body, 11, 104, 106, 117
magnetic field, 37, 40, 44, 136
make, 18, 20
makefile, 6
MARS-PF, 48
mass, 168, 202
mass density, 102, 118
mass ratio, 44
MAT, 118, 119, 125, 126
mat, 101, 103, 135, 143, 154, 155, 181, 185, 186, 190
matadd, 44, 118, 155
material, 101, 173, 178, 180, 191, 193–195, 201, 203,
204, 207, 208, 210–212, 215–217, 219, 220,
222, 227, 241
material density, 44, 102
material name, 172, 173
material number, 44, 101, 102, 118, 119, 126, 154, 155,
172, 180, 181, 184, 186, 190, 193, 195, 203,
207, 210, 212, 215, 219, 222, 228, 237, 239
maxbch, 29, 30, 45, 73, 255
maxbnk, 30
maxcas, 29, 30, 45, 73, 255
maximum, 85, 86, 106
maximum value, 165, 167

INDEX

Maxwell, 2
MCNP, 44, 253
mdbatima, 39
mesh, 1, 5, 6, 10, 70, 124, 125, 127–129, 161–164, 167,
178, 180, 183, 184, 187, 191, 194, 195, 199–
202, 204, 207, 208, 210–212, 215–217, 219,
220, 222, 224, 227, 230, 232, 237–240, 248
mesh definition, 164, 165, 172, 173
mesh type, 165
mesh width, 165, 167
method, 232
mgf, 136, 138mID, 140
minimum, 85, 86, 106
minimum value, 165, 167
mirror, 241
mixture, 101
Moliere, 39
mother, 201, 204, 208, 220
MPI, 11, 18, 255
mset, 154, 181, 185, 186, 190
multi-source, 60, 61, 94
multiplier, 10, 11, 154, 180, 181, 185, 186, 189, 190muon capture, 37
muon capture reaction, 5, 7
Muon-induced nuclear reaction, 8
muon-induced nuclear reaction, 37
mwhere, 35
MWO formula, 38
mxlv, 127
mxspln, 35
n-mesh, 230
na, 8, 90
name, 135, 155, 157
NASA, 38
natural, 4, 44
natural abundance, 101
natural isotope, 223naz, 23
ncut, 43, 191, 255, 256
ndata, 202
ndedx, 1, 4, 39
ne, 81–83, 154
nedisp, 39, 47
negs, 1, 2, 8, 32, 34, 51, 140, 188
neispl, 53
nesting structure, 127
neutron capture, 49
neutron multiplicity, 38
neutron optics, 79, 83
nevap, 36
nfile, 176ni, 87
NLIB, 101, 102
nlost, 47
nm, 9, 85, 86

267

NMTC, 39nn, 8, 9, 91
no ionization, 29
no reaction, 29
nobch, 185
nocas, 185
nocoh, 50
Node file, 130
non, 136, 140, 157
nonu, 6, 49
norm, 88
npidk, 37
nrecover, 40
NRF, 6nspred, 1, 3, 7, 39, 47
ntetelem, 46
ntetsurf, 46
ntmax, 73, 75
ntt, 92
nuc, 103
nucdata, 2, 34, 258
nuclear, 207, 222
nuclear data, 9, 44, 101, 102, 202
nuclear reaction calculation mode, 49
nuclear resonance fluorescence, 7, 37
nucleus, 143, 201, 202
nuclide, 26, 87, 101, 204, 208, 220
nudtvar, 1, 233
numb, 50
number of group, 167
number of history, 30
nwsors, 45
nx, 70ny, 70nz, 70o-curr, 184o-type, 92
oa-curr, 184
ob-curr, 184
of-curr, 184
Open MP, 11, 18
OpenMP, 1, 255
output, 3, 6, 31, 71, 124, 125, 170, 184, 191, 195, 202,
207, 210, 217, 222, 237–241
outtime, 224
P, 105, 125p-type, 79, 81–83, 85, 86
parallel, 256
parallel calculation, 43, 45
parallel computing, 11, 18, 30, 255
param.inc, 9, 21
parameters section, 21, 191, 237
ParaView, 4268

part, 5, 6, 143, 147–149, 152, 154, 158, 160, 167, 168,
178, 181, 183, 185, 186, 188, 190, 193, 194,
199, 204, 208, 211, 215, 217, 220, 227, 230particle definition, 167
particle density, 9, 44, 102, 118
pcut, 43, 191, 256
PE, 20, 30, 43, 45, 255, 256
Pearlstein-Niita’s formula, 38
PEGS5, 48phi, 61, 63–65, 68–70, 72
photo-nuclear, 8–11, 37
photon, 191
PLIB, 101, 102
pnimul, 7, 37
point, 188
polarization, 137pre-equilibrium, 36
Processing Element, 30, 43, 45
product, 3Pulse magnet, 40
PX, 105, 120, 121, 123–129
px, 131
PY, 105, 120, 121, 123–129
py, 131
PZ, 105, 120, 121, 123–129
pz, 131pz0, 67

INDEX

208, 210, 212, 213, 215–217, 219, 220, 222,
224, 227, 230, 232, 239–241, 248
region boundary, 172, 173, 237, 239
region error, 47
region mesh, 161
region name, 157, 172, 173
region number, 147, 152, 153, 158, 160–163, 187
repeated structure, 118, 122–125, 129, 147, 162
resc2, 31
resc3, 31
resfile, 31, 169, 179, 184, 188, 191, 195, 200, 202, 207,
208, 212, 215, 217, 222, 227, 232
residual nuclei, 36, 201
resol, 174, 180, 184, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207, 210, 213,
216, 219, 222, 228, 230, 237, 239, 243
resolution, 172, 173
restart calculation, 10, 11, 30, 169, 179, 184, 188, 191,
194, 200, 202, 207, 208, 212, 215, 217, 222,
226, 227, 230, 232, 248, 255
Restricted LET, 39
RHO, 118, 119
RHP, 106rijk, 21rijklst, 31
ring, 188
RIsource.dat, 87
rn, 64, 65
rnok, 50q-type, 90, 91
RPP, 106q:, 24rpp, 131
QMD, 26, 33
rseed, 30
qp:, 24
rshow, 29, 157, 172–174, 179, 193, 197, 202, 207, 210,
quadrupole electromagnet, 136
213, 216, 219, 222, 227, 230
rx, 67r, 168, 179, 183, 191, 195, 201, 204, 208, 212, 215, 217, ry, 67
220
rz, 31, 168, 179, 191, 195, 202, 204, 207, 208, 212, 215,
r-from, 1, 187
217, 220r-in, 1, 187
r-mesh, 230
S, 105r-out, 1, 187, 230, 232
s-type, 1, 2, 59, 61, 63–70, 72, 75, 232, 248
r-to, 1, 187
S (α, β), 102r-type, 164, 165
sangel, 1, 171, 179, 184, 188, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207,r-z, 6, 161, 163, 164, 178, 187
210, 212, 215, 217, 222, 237, 239, 243
r0, 63, 68, 232
SANGEL parameter, 171
r1, 63, 65, 66, 68
Sato’s formula, 38
scoring mesh, 161, 163, 164
r2, 66, 68
SDM, 36
rad, 179
se-type, 215
random number, 30
se-unit, 215
ratio, 101
SED, 214
RBE, 214sed, 215
RCC, 106
set, 2, 258
rdam(i), 49
sfile, 176
REC, 11, 106reg, 1, 5, 29, 61, 73, 75, 124, 125, 127–129, 134, 136, shared memory parallel computing, 11, 19, 234
138, 140, 142, 147, 148, 152, 153, 155, 157, shared-memory parallel computing, 14, 16, 30, 255, 256
158, 160–163, 168, 173, 178, 180, 183, 187, Shen, 38
191, 193, 194, 197, 199–201, 203, 204, 207, simple, 191, 208

INDEX

SMM, 11, 36
SO, 105
source, 71, 207
source check, 29
SPAR, 5, 39
special, 201
specific energy, 214
SPH, 106
spin, 74, 137, 175
SQ, 105
standard output, 48
star density, 220
statistical uncertainties, 169
statistical uncertainty, 30
stdcut, 1–3, 180, 185, 189, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207, 210,
213, 216, 219, 222, 224, 228, 232
straggling, 50
sum tally, 6–8, 176
sumfactor, 176
sumtally, 4, 5, 25, 29, 227
surface, 104, 187
surface definition, 104
surface number, 104, 117, 118, 124, 125
surface sense, 119
surface symbol, 104, 105
switching energy, 32
swtm(i), 35
SX, 105sx, 37, 61, 72, 74, 75, 175
SY, 105sy, 37, 61, 72, 74, 75, 175
symbol, 26
SZ, 105, 119–121
sz, 37, 61, 72, 74, 75, 175

269

title, 170, 179, 184, 188, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207, 210,
212, 215, 217, 222, 224, 227, 232, 237, 239
tmax(i), 5, 35
TMP, 118, 119tmp, 134
tn, 92
totfact, 60, 61, 73, 87
track-structure mode, 2, 22, 32, 140transform, 174, 244
transform number, 132
transmut, 5, 222
TRC, 11, 106
TRCL, 61, 118, 119, 125, 126, 174, 180, 185, 193, 197,
203, 207, 210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 228, 237,
239, 244
trcl, 73, 138
trcle, 138
trclm, 138
trxcrd.dat, 8
TSFAC, 131
tw, 92
TX, 105
TY, 105
typ, 136
TZ, 105U, 61, 118, 119, 122–125, 127–129, 131, 134, 136, 139,
147, 148, 150, 152, 153, 158, 160, 162, 187
udtpara, 1, 233
udtvar, 1, 233
unit, 1, 43, 169, 179, 183, 188, 191, 193, 195, 199, 201,
205, 207, 208, 212, 215, 217, 220, 227
universe, 61, 119, 122–125, 127–129, 134, 136, 139,
147, 148, 150, 152, 153, 158, 160, 162, 187
UNIX, 20t, 168, 188, 204, 217, 227
user defined cross sections, 144t-e1, 168, 199
User defined-variable, 101t-e2, 168, 199
user-defined integer variable, 49
t-eng, 168, 194
user-defined real variable, 49
t-type, 73, 75, 92, 165, 178, 185, 188, 199, 204, 217, User-defined variable, 24
227, 230
usrelst, 40
t0, 92
usrmgt, 40
tab, 23
usrsors.f, 14, 59
target, 224
usrtally.f, 233
tc, 92
Vavilov, 39
td, 92
VOL, 118, 119
Tetra.bin, 46
tetrahedron, 46
vol, 153, 162, 163, 180, 193, 197, 200, 203, 207, 210,
213, 216, 219, 222
tetrahedron geometry, 1, 130
volmat, 173, 180, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 213, 216,
TFILE, 131
219, 222
tg-list, 224
volume, 45, 46, 153, 162, 163, 180, 193, 197, 200, 203,
the, 168, 183
207, 210, 213, 216, 219, 222, 228, 239
the Moliere theory, 39
volume and area calculation, 29, 66
tim, 148
volume correction, 173
time mesh, 165, 188, 204, 217, 227, 230
voxel, 46, 129
timeevo, 224
timeout, 3, 30
vtkfmt, 180, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 219, 222, 237

270

vtkout, 180, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 219, 222, 237
w-ang, 241
w-dst, 241
w-hgt, 241
w-mnh, 241
w-mnw, 241
w-wdt, 241
wc1(i), 35, 152
wc2(i), 35, 144
WED, 11, 106
weight cutoﬀ, 152
weight value, 37
weight window, 35, 148
Weight Window Bias Generator, 149, 229
Weight Window Generator, 149
wem, 67
wgt, 61, 72
width, 174, 180, 184, 193, 197, 203, 207, 210, 213, 216,
219, 222, 228, 230, 237, 239, 243
Windows, 8, 14, 19, 20, 24, 256, 257
Wobbler magnet, 40, 136
wsurvn, 35
wt0, 67
wupn, 35
wwbg, 230
wwbi, 149
wwg, 227
wwi, 148

INDEXy, 168, 169, 179, 183, 191, 195, 202, 204, 208, 212, 215,
217, 220y-txt, 173, 179, 184, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207, 210, 212,
215, 217, 222, 230, 237, 239, 243
y-type, 70, 164, 165, 173, 238, 240
y0, 63–69, 72, 75, 163, 230, 232, 241
y1, 63, 64, 67–69, 72, 75, 230, 232
y2, 69y3, 69ylin, 171ylog, 171ymax, 171ymin, 170
yp, 67yq, 67yz, 168, 172, 173, 179, 180, 183, 184, 191, 195, 202,
204, 207, 208, 210, 212, 215, 217, 219, 220,
222, 227, 230, 237, 239

z, 168, 179, 183, 191, 195, 201, 202, 204, 208, 212, 215,
217, 220z-mesh, 230
z-txt, 173, 179, 184, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207, 210, 212,
215, 217, 222, 230, 239, 243
z-type, 70, 164, 165, 173, 238, 240
z0, 63–69, 72, 75, 230, 232, 241
z1, 63–65, 67–69, 72, 75, 230, 232
z2, 69z3, 69zlin, 239
zlog, 239
x, 168, 169, 179, 183, 191, 195, 202, 204, 208, 212, ZP, 105
215, 217, 220zx, 168, 173
X-ray, 50
x-txt, 173, 179, 184, 193, 195, 200, 202, 207, 210, 212,
215, 217, 222, 230, 237, 239, 243
x-type, 70, 164, 165, 173, 238, 240
x0, 63–69, 72, 75, 163, 230, 232, 241, 248
x1, 63, 64, 67–69, 72, 75, 230, 232
x2, 69x3, 69xlin, 171
xlog, 171
xmax, 171
xmin, 170
xnum, 50
xp, 67xq, 67
xsdir, 14, 48, 101
xsdir.jnd, 2
XY, 105xy, 1, 31, 168, 171–173, 179, 180, 183, 184, 191, 195,
202, 204, 207, 208, 210, 212, 215, 217, 219,
220, 222, 227, 230, 237–240
xyz, 10, 29, 31, 70, 161, 164, 172, 173, 178, 187, 237
xz, 180, 184, 191, 202, 207, 208, 210, 212, 215, 217,
220, 227, 230

PHITS
Ver.2.70
Ver.2.71
Ver.2.72
Ver.2.73
Ver.2.74
Ver.2.75
Ver.2.76
Ver.2.77
Ver.2.80
Ver.2.80aVer.2.81
Ver.2.82
Ver.2.83
Ver.2.84
Ver.2.85
Ver.2.86
Ver.2.87
Ver.2.88
Ver.2.89
Ver.2.90
Ver.2.91
Ver.2.92
Ver.2.93
Ver.2.94
Ver.2.95
Ver.2.96
Ver.2.97
Ver.3.00
Ver.3.01
Ver.3.02

Ver. 3.02 User’s Manual
2014/08/30
2014/09/26
2014/10/21
2014/11/05
2015/01/30
2015/02/09
2015/03/23
2015/05/19
2015/09/02
2015/09/16
2015/10/15
2015/12/16
2016/03/03
2016/03/16
2016/05/16
2016/08/23
2016/09/15
2016/09/29
2017/01/11
2017/02/09
2017/02/20
2017/04/18
2017/06/16
2017/06/30
2017/07/21
2017/08/28
2017/09/21
2017/10/04
2017/10/31
2017/12/01

PH ITS development members：
Koji Niita1 , Tatsuhiko Sato2 , Yosuke Iwamoto2 , Shintaro Hashimoto2,† , Tatsuhiko Ogawa2 ,Takuya Furuta2 , Shinichiro Abe2 , Takeshi Kai2 , Norihiro Matsuda2 , Hiroshi Iwase3 ,Hiroshi Nakashima2 , Tokio Fukahori2 , Keisuke Okumura2 , Tetsuya Kai2 , Satoshi Chiba4 ,Nobuhiro Shigyo5 , and Lembit Sihver6
1
Research Organization for Information Science & Technology (RIST)
2
Japan Atomic Energy Agency (JAEA)
3High Energy Accelerator Research Organization (KEK)4Tokyo Institute of Technology (TITech)
5
Kyushu University
6
Vienna University of Technology, Austria†
Editor of this user’s manual from ver. 2.30